JP2018020162A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To make it possible to notify what combination is being won.SOLUTION: A slot machine includes first display means and second display means, and for combinations, includes a special combination capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player on the basis of a symbol combination mode becoming a special mode, a first combination capable of being won in an overlapped manner with the special combination and having a level of expectation at a predetermined degree, and a second combination capable of being won in an overlapped manner with the special combination and having a different level of expectation from the first combination. The second display means is capable of displaying a first display mode corresponding to a case in which a combination determined by an internal lottery is the first combination, and a second display mode corresponding to a case in which a combination determined by the internal lottery is the second combination. The first display mode and the second display mode are composed of common display parts common to each display mode and non-common display parts that are different in each display mode, and capable of causing a player to identify a degree of the expectation level by the difference of the non-common display parts.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 91

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine including a plurality of reels capable of executing a game for displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and arranging the plurality of reels in parallel so that rotation axes are located on the same line.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a game that includes a plurality of reels that can execute a game that displays a plurality of symbols (identification information) in a variable manner, and that is executed based on establishment of a predetermined start condition. In general, a player is given a predetermined game value based on the above. In such gaming machines, a plurality of reels are arranged side by side so as to rotate about a rotation axis set in the left-right direction, and a gap between adjacent reels is covered with a cover member. It has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 11-114130 A

  By the way, in the conventional slot machine, when the information about the winning combination is displayed while the dynamic background display or presentation is performed on the display device, the visibility of the information about the winning combination is not sufficient. I couldn't say that I was able to tell if I was winning the role.

  An object of the present invention is to make it possible to notify which role is won.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
A first display means for performing an effect according to the game, performing an internal lottery to determine whether or not to win a role in response to the establishment of a starting condition, and executing a game with variable display of a plurality of reels; In a slot machine in which a winning combination of the combination is established when a symbol combination mode corresponding to the combination determined by the internal lottery is derived,
Second display means different from the first display means,
The combination includes a special combination that is capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player because the symbol combination mode is a special mode, and the special combination can be elected redundantly and has a high degree of expectation. And a second role that can be elected in duplicate with the special role and has a different expectation from the first role,
The second display means includes
A first display mode corresponding to the case where the combination determined by the internal lottery is the first combination;
A second display mode corresponding to the case where the combination determined by the internal lottery is the second combination, can be displayed;
The first display mode and the second display mode are:
Consists of a common display portion common to each display mode and a non-common display portion that is different in each display mode,
The degree of the high expectation can be identified by the difference between the non-common display portions.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to notify which role is won.

It is a front view showing an appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the front frame of the slot machine. It is a front view of a fluctuation display device. It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the control system of a slot machine. FIG. 3 is an arrangement diagram of symbols on a sheet arranged on an outer peripheral surface of a reel. It is a figure explaining the kind of winning a prize, a pattern combination aspect, and winning content. It is a figure which shows an example of a reach eye. It is a figure which shows an example of the outcome of a rare role. It is a figure which shows an internal lottery. It is a state transition diagram explaining the transition of a game state. It is a state transition diagram explaining the transition of the game state in a game control apparatus. It is a state transition diagram explaining the transition of the gaming state in the effect control device. It is a figure explaining the acquisition mode of AT right in a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining game control processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an internal lottery process. It is a figure explaining the kind of winning winning determination table and the overlapping winning expectation degree of rare combination and bonus. It is a flowchart explaining a freeze production setting process. It is a figure explaining a freeze execution determination table. It is a flowchart explaining a reel rotation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the operation intervention freezing process. It is a flowchart explaining a reel rotation stop process. It is a figure explaining a continuous irregular operation counter value and invalid time. It is a flowchart explaining a winning determination process. It is a flowchart explaining game state update processing. It is a flowchart explaining an effect control process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a freeze production process. It is a flowchart explaining the operation intervention freeze effect process. It is a flowchart explaining a game effect determination process. It is a figure explaining a winning production | presentation determination table. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of production. It is a flowchart explaining a game progress control process. It is a flowchart explaining a bonus inside process. It is a flowchart explaining a normal / a precursor process. It is a flowchart explaining a normal / a precursor process. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of penalties freeze. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of penalties freeze. It is a flowchart explaining an AT waiting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during promotion / rush-in AT. It is a figure explaining an operation assistant image. It is a flowchart explaining a process during addition AT. It is a flowchart explaining the process in a special zone. It is a figure explaining the addition number determination table. It is a flowchart explaining the process during relief AT. It is a flowchart explaining a process during transfer chance. It is a flowchart explaining a stock acquisition determination process. It is a figure explaining AT stock expectation degree and special zone transition expectation degree. It is a flowchart explaining a stock lottery process. It is a figure explaining the stock determination table according to lottery probability state. It is a flowchart explaining stock processing during bonus. It is a flowchart explaining a BB1 stock process. It is a flowchart explaining a special zone transfer lottery process. It is a figure explaining the zone shift judgment table according to role. It is a flowchart explaining stock lottery mode transfer processing. It is a figure explaining mode promotion expectation. It is a flowchart explaining a continuous notice setting process. It is a figure explaining the execution pattern of a continuous notice. It is a flowchart explaining AT precursor setting processing. It is a figure explaining the execution pattern of a sign effect. It is a flowchart explaining a security monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a door opening corresponding | compatible process. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of manual symbol alignment assistance. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of a door open monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the reel rotation start process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the division | segmentation in the freeze time in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the long freeze process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the reel rotation stop process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the division | segmentation aspect of the freeze effect in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the freeze production process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the long freeze process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the execution pattern of the freeze production in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the execution pattern of freeze production C in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the AT waiting process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the distributed freeze production in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the reel rotation stop process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the automatic stop control process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the automatic stop control process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the automatic stop process during RT in the 3rd modification. It is a front view of the slot machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the slot machine in 2nd Embodiment, and is an enlarged view of the game production | presentation apparatus vicinity. It is a front view of the production unit in the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the initial position of the movable production | presentation member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the winning suggestion image in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the pushing order by the movable production | presentation member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the pushing order in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the alerting | reporting aspect at the time of pushing wrong in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the effect process at the time of a specific game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the presence or absence of the overlapping winning combination of a small part and a special prize in the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the freeze execution determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the stop output of the 7-segment display in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the game presentation apparatus control processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining normal game time production processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the process at the time of the game end in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal freeze effect process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the lottery result alerting | reporting operation | movement in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the lottery result alerting | reporting operation | movement in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the effect unit in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the object combination, rocking | fluctuation operation | movement, and rocking | fluctuation ratio in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the production | presentation including the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the production | presentation including the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the pushing order application effect in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the special effect in the freeze effect in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the selection content of the production | presentation aspect of the hidden production apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the reel change start order in the freezing effect in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal freeze effect process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation aspect of a 10 second freeze production in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation aspect of a 15 second freeze production in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation aspect of the freeze production based on the standby freeze in 3rd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the inclination base part vicinity in 4th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the inclination base part vicinity in the 1st modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the presentation mode update process in the 1st modification of 4th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the inclination base part vicinity in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of the inclination base part vicinity in another example of the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the presentation mode update process in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the button arrangement | positioning determination table in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the button arrangement | positioning determination table in the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of a display with the image display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the icon in the log | history window in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of alerting | reporting of the winning result in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the command in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the command identifier setting process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the command abnormality determination process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the reel rotation stop process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the continuous winning stock processing in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of command reception in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the display mode when there is a flow of abnormal command reception in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the display mode when there is a flow of abnormal command reception in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the example of the display mode when there is a flow of abnormal command reception in a 5th embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing whose front surface is open, and a hinge 2a (see FIG. 2) is provided on the front surface of the housing. The front frame 2 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a single-open manner. At the upper part of the front frame 2, there are provided an image display device 3 for effecting display and information display according to the game, a speaker 4 for effecting sound, and the like. The image display device 3 is composed of a liquid crystal display panel, for example, and displays various information in addition to the effect display relating to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information display on the image display device 3 are controlled by the effect control device 70 (see FIG. 4). In other words, the image display device 3 constitutes an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control device 70 serves as a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

  A movable effect device 8 is provided above the image display device 3. This movable effect device 8 can be converted into a state retracted above the image display device 3 and a state overlapping the front of the image display device 3, and produces a game effect by the operation. When the movable effect device 8 is retracted above the image display device 3, the movable effect device 8 is located behind the concealing member 8 a and is invisible to the player, and overlaps the front of the image display device 3. Visible from the player.

  A front panel 9 is arranged in the center portion of the front frame 2 so that the rear side cannot be visually recognized, and a decorative pattern or the like is drawn, and the rear side is visible in the center portion of the front panel 9 (for example, A (transparent) symbol display window 5 is formed. The front panel 9 may be constituted by a display device. In the state where no image is displayed on the symbol display window 5, the reel 6 is visible, and an image that produces a game mainly around the symbol display window 5 is displayed. indicate. In this case, it is also possible to display an image that produces a game on the symbol display window 5.

  Through the symbol display window 5 (window portion), a symbol that is variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 6 disposed in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 6 includes a cylindrical left reel 6a, a middle reel 6b, and a right reel 6c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 6a, 6b, and 6c according to a predetermined arrangement by winding a strip-shaped sheet 6d on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction ( (See FIG. 5). Each reel 6a, 6b, 6c is provided with a reel motor 64a, 64b, 64c (see FIG. 4), which is a stepping motor, and each reel 6a, 6b, 6c is independently driven for rotation. The rotation can be stopped. That is, the reel motors 64a, 64b, 64c serve as an electrical drive source for driving the reels 6a, 6b, 6c.

  By rotating the reel 6 by the reel motor 64, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 5 are varied so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 6 is stopped, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are displayed through the symbol display window 5 for each reel 6a, 6b, 6c. And is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 5, the effective display portions of the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c for deriving and displaying the game stop result can be visually recognized. That is, the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c form a plurality of variable display units that can display a plurality of symbols in a variable manner.

  A predetermined enabling line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 5. In this embodiment, a line (middle line) crossing the middle symbols of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c and a line (middle line) obliquely crossing the reels 6a, 6b, 6c from the lower stage of the left reel 6a-the middle stage of the middle reel 6b-the upper stage of the right reel 6c ( A line (lower right line) that obliquely crosses each reel 6a, 6b, 6c from the upper stage of the left reel 6a to the middle stage of the left reel 6a to the lower stage of the right reel 6c is a line that can be activated. Then, when the number of bets (the number of bets) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) by the insertion of medals by the player or input from credits (hereinafter referred to as “betting operation”), the enabling line is activated (so-called Whether or not a winning combination (combination) is established is determined based on the symbol combination form (out) on the effective line.

  When winning is established, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are arranged on another line in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are arranged on the effective line. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) crossing the upper symbols of each reel 6a, 6b, 6c. It should be noted that the lines crossing the lower symbols of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c (lower lines) and the front portions (visible portions) facing the symbol display windows 5 of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c other than the above are crossed. It is also possible to arrange the appearance symbols on the virtual lines that are positioned. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, right-up, and right-down lines), the lines that can be arranged in the appearance when winning the prize (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together. Line).

  The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are enabled, and a predetermined enable line is enabled according to the number of bets. Based on the symbol combination form formed on the enable line It may be determined whether a winning (role) is established or not. For example, in the case of 1 bet, the middle line is the effective line, in the case of 2 bets, the upper and lower lines are active lines in addition to the middle line, and in the case of 3 bets, the upper right, lower and lower lines are valid lines. And Also, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2). In addition, the bet number may be arbitrarily set within a range of 1 to 3 instead of dedicated to 3 cards. In this case, however, an internal lottery described later is performed so that the internal winning probability that is most advantageous to the player when the number of bets is 3 in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, a backlight 111 that irradiates light from the rear of the reel at a position on the back side of the reel 6 and behind each symbol stop position in the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 5. (See FIG. 4). The reel 6 can transmit light, and it is possible to produce effects by light by changing the light irradiation mode by the backlight 111.

  Below the symbol display window 5, a credit number display unit 11, a game progress display unit 12, and a payout number display unit 13 are provided. The credit number display unit 11 displays the number of medals stored as credits without being paid out by the medal payout device 63 (see FIG. 4). The game progress display unit 12 displays a game progress state. Further, the payout number display unit 13 displays the number of payouts at the time of winning. These display parts 11, 12, and 13 are comprised by LED of 7 segments, for example, and display various information by the lighting state.

  On the lower right side of the symbol display window 5, there is provided a game state display unit 18 for displaying a state such as a replay state, a wait state, and a game standby state, and the game state is displayed by lighting the lamp. Also, on the lower left side of the symbol display window 5, a bet number display unit 19 for displaying the bet number is provided.

  The game state display unit 18 includes a replay display unit that indicates that a replay winning (replay winning) has been established and a replay game has been awarded, and until the reel 6 rotates after the player operates the start lever 21. A weight display section indicating that there is a waiting time (a state in which the reel 6 is waiting to start rotating because a certain time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game), and a standby in which the slot machine 1 can play a game It is composed of an insert medal display section that indicates a state and prompts a betting operation.

  A step portion protruding forward is formed below the symbol display window 5, and the upper surface of the step portion is an inclined base portion 14 that is inclined downward on the front side. The tilting base portion 14 includes operation means including a medal insertion slot 15, a max bet button 17 as a progress operation portion for advancing the game, and an operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player. An effect button 10 is provided.

  The medal slot 15 is disposed on the right side (the open end side of the front frame 2) when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 1 in the inclined base part 14. When the player inserts a medal into the medal slot 15 and performs a betting operation, the game can be executed. A medal insertion detection switch 51 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the passage of medals is provided in a path through which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 15 pass. And the number of inserted medals is counted.

  The max bet button 17 is disposed on the left side of the inclined base portion 14 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 1. The maximum bet button 17 can input from the credit to the upper limit number (for example, three) of the bet number by performing a pressing operation once. However, when the credit number is less than the upper limit number, the credit number is input as the bet number. It is like that. The effect button 10 is arranged at the center of the tilting base part 14, and when the player operates, an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the effect display on the image display device 3 is performed, or the game History information is displayed.

  A payout button 20, a start lever 21, a return button 22, a reel stop button 24, a keyhole 23, and the like are provided below the inclined base portion 14. The payout button 20 is a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 15, a medal input as a bet number by the max bet button 17 (a bet medal), or a medal that is paid out when a winning is established (stored as a credit). This is used when giving a command to return the medal to the tray 27. In addition, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 15 after an automatic betting operation based on establishment of a re-game winning (replay winning), or a medal exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits, a flow path switching solenoid (medal selector) It is returned to the tray 27 via 68.

  The start lever 21 is an operation lever for making a progress operation unit for advancing the game and for starting a single game. The keyhole 23 is for inserting a key when opening the front frame 2 or resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 1. The return button 22 is used when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 15 and clogged by the flow path switching solenoid (medal selector) 68 is returned to the tray 27.

  The reel stop button 24 forms a progress operation unit for advancing the game, and is provided with a left reel stop button 24a, a middle reel 6c, a left reel stop button 24a, a middle reel 6c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each other. The reel stop button 24b and the right reel stop button 24c are configured to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 6a, 6b, 6c in accordance with the stop operation. These reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c are formed of, for example, a colored translucent resin member. Inside the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c, there is a stop button for informing whether or not the corresponding reel 6 can be stopped by operating the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c. Each LED 66 (see FIG. 4) is provided. That is, the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c perform a stop operation provided corresponding to each variation display unit, so that a plurality of stop operation units are formed, and the stop button LED 66 can cause the stop operation unit to emit light. The operation unit light emitting means is provided.

  Further, a decorative plate (decorative panel) 25 that constitutes a lower region of the front frame 2 is provided below a portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, an ashtray 26, a receiving tray 27 for storing medals, a medal payout port 28, a speaker 4 for outputting sound, and the like are provided below the decorative plate 25 and at the lowermost portion of the front frame 2. .

  As shown in FIG. 2, a game control device 50 that controls the entire slot machine 1 is disposed in the upper part inside the housing. In addition, a reel placement unit 29 is provided at substantially the center inside the casing, and the variable display device 100 having the rotatable reels 6a, 6b, and 6c is placed on the reel placement unit 29. Yes. Further, an external signal output terminal 33 for outputting a signal from the game control device 50 to an external device is provided on the right side of the variation display device 100 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 1.

  Further, a door open / close detection switch 62 for detecting the open / close state of the front frame 2 and an upper lock mechanism 34 are provided on the right side of the game control device 50, and the front frame 2 is provided on the left side of the game control device 50. A hinge 2a is provided as a rotating shaft. In addition, opening cover members 37a and 37b that cover the holding openings respectively provided on both side walls of the housing are provided immediately below both side portions of the reel mounting portion 29, and the front frame 2 is provided in the vicinity of the opening cover member 37b. There is provided a weight support portion 38 for receiving the weight when closed.

  Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 63 is disposed at the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 63 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 15 and guided by the flow path switching solenoid (medal selector) 68, and a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the effective line to establish a prize. In this case, the number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the winning or the medal that exceeds the upper limit of the credit by the addition associated with the winning is received to the tray 27. The medal for the credit is paid out to the tray 27 by the medal payout device 63 by operating the payout button 20. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 63, the medal that overflows and flows in from the medal payout device 63 is stored, or the medal collecting mechanism on the installation island where the slot machine 1 is installed. An overflow tank 30 is provided for guiding to the vehicle.

  Further, on the left side of the medal payout device 63, the power supply device 40 that supplies power to electronic components such as a control device, a motor, and a lamp, and the winning probability of the slot machine 1 are set to any one of six stages, for example. A setting device 60 is provided. A power switch 31 or the like is provided at a portion between the setting device 60 and the reels 6a, 6b, 6c.

  FIG. 3 shows the variable display device 100. The variable display device 100 includes a reel base member 101 fixed to a casing and a reel mounting portion 29, a light emitting base member 110 attached to the reel base member 101, and a reel unit 103 attached to the light emitting base member 110. And comprising. The reel base member 101 has a rectangular box shape having a concave chamber-shaped space 102 whose front surface is open. In the concave chamber-shaped space 102, a light emitting base member 110, a reel 6, a reel motor 64, and the like are provided. The reel unit 103 is arranged.

  The light emitting base member 110 is disposed so as to extend to the left and right in the concave chamber-shaped space 102 of the reel base member 101, and is fixed to the inner side surface of the reel base member 101. On the front surface of the light emitting base member 110, there is a backlight 111 that illuminates the reel 6 from the rear (inner circumference side), a winning line light emitting unit 112 that indicates the established winning, and a positioning unit 113 for manually aligning the symbols of the reel 6. Is provided. 3A shows a state where the backlight 111 and the winning line light emitting unit 112 are all turned off, and FIG. 3B shows a state where all the backlight 111 and the winning line light emitting unit 112 are turned on. ing.

  The reel unit 103 includes a left reel unit 103a, a middle reel unit 103b, and a right reel unit 103c arranged side by side. The driving mechanism such as the reel motor 64 of each reel unit 103 is supported by the light emitting base member 110, and the reel 6 rotates with respect to the light emitting base member 110.

  The backlight 111 provided on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 is a position overlapping the front and rear facing the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical reel 6, and the symbol display window 5 in the reel 6 that has stopped changing (rotating). Are arranged at positions corresponding to the front and rear of the symbol (effective display portion) that can be visually recognized. That is, for each reel 6, three backlights 111 are arranged in the vertical direction corresponding to the three symbols that can be visually recognized by the reel 6, and a total of nine backlights 111 are disposed.

  Each backlight 111 includes a rectangular box-shaped enclosure portion 111a having a recessed chamber-shaped space that opens to the front, and a light emitter 111b (LED or lamp) is disposed inside the recessed chamber-shaped space of the enclosed portion 111a. Has been. The opening in front of the surrounding portion 111a has a size corresponding to one symbol (one frame) of the reel 6, and this opening is arranged so as to overlap the symbol of the reel 6 in which the fluctuation is stopped. Further, the light from the light emitter 111b is prevented from diffusing around by the surrounding portion 111a. Thereby, as shown in FIG.3 (b), each backlight 111 can illuminate the symbol to which it respond | corresponds independently. The backlight 111 illuminates the symbol corresponding to the winning, or suggests the result of the internal lottery by the light emission mode.

  The winning line light emitting unit 112 is a linear light emitting unit, and a portion that overlaps the reel 6 in the front-rear direction along the enabling line (middle stage, right-up and right-down line) among the symbol stop lines (symbol alignment lines). Except for this, it is provided between the left and right reels 6 a and 6 c and the reel base member 101 and between the adjacent reels 6. The winning line light emitting unit 112 is visible from the symbol display window 5 and notifies the winning by causing the winning line light emitting unit 112 to emit light along the symbol stop line in which symbols corresponding to the established winnings are aligned. . That is, the winning line light emitting unit 112 forms a line light emitting unit provided along a symbol stop line set so as to cross the front surface facing the windows (symbol display windows 5) of the plurality of reels 6.

  As will be described later, when the front frame 2 is opened, the winning line light emitting unit 112 and the backlight 111 along the predetermined symbol stop line are caused to emit light, and the store clerk of the game store manually rotates the reel 6. And has a function of performing auxiliary display for aligning the symbols. This predetermined symbol stop line can be changed by switching the light emission line setting switch 112a.

  For example, when the store clerk of the amusement store manually rotates the reel 6 and arranges a specific symbol (here, “7”) on the symbol stop line, the positioning unit 113 opens the store. This is to facilitate the alignment of the symbols. Then, by aligning the reference portion 6e (see FIG. 5) provided on the reel 6 with the positioning portion 113, a specific symbol is aligned with the symbol stop line (here, the middle line).

  The positioning portion 113 includes a positioning line 113 a displayed on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 and a positioning display portion 113 b displayed on the left side of the reel base member 101. The positioning line 113a is displayed between the left and right reels 6a and 6c and the reel base member 101. Thus, by displaying the positioning line 113a at a position close to the left and right reels 6a and 6c, the reference portions 6e of the left and right reels 6a and 6c can be easily aligned. For the middle reel 6b, the positioning line 113a is not displayed at a close position. However, the reference portion 6e is aligned with reference to the left and right positioning lines 113a, or the left and right reels 6a, 6c already aligned with the positioning portion 113 are used. By aligning the reference portion 6e of the middle reel 6b with the reference portion 6e, the positioning can be easily performed.

  Further, the positioning display portion 113b is a display that indicates the position where the reference portion 6e is aligned in the same manner as the positioning line 113a. Here, the position is indicated by the apex of a triangle. It is also possible to position the reel 6 by aligning the reference portion 6e with the positioning display portion 113b. In addition, by using together with the positioning line 113a, the positioning line 113a and the winning line light emitting unit 112 can be easily distinguished from each other. The positioning display portion 113b displays “seam matching portion” as a display indicating a position where the reference portion 6e is to be aligned.

  The positioning display portion 113b is visible from the front when the front frame 2 is opened, but is blocked by the front panel 9 and cannot be viewed from the front when the front frame 2 is closed. That is, the front panel 9 (specifically, a decorative region around the symbol display window 5) serves as a shielding part that restricts rearward visual recognition. Thereby, it can prevent that a display is visible from a player, and does not spoil the beauty of the circumference of the symbol display window 5.

  In the present embodiment, the reference portion 6e of the reel 6 is a seam of the sheet 6d on which the pattern wound around the outer peripheral surface of the reel 6 is drawn. Thus, by using the joint of the sheet 6d as the reference portion 6e, it is not necessary to newly provide a separate reference portion 6e. “7” is arranged as a specific symbol on the frame that is directly above the joint of the sheet (see FIG. 5). By aligning the reference portion 6e provided on the reel 6 with the positioning portion 113, a specific symbol is displayed. The symbol (here, “7”) is aligned with the symbol stop line (here, the middle line).

  That is, the manual operation assisting means for assisting manual operation (manual symbol aligning assist) in which the positioning unit 113 and the reference unit 6e rotate the plurality of reels 6 so that a specific symbol is arranged on the symbol stop line. Make. As a result, it is possible to assist manual operation for setting a specific symbol on the symbol stop line with a simple structure. Note that the positioning unit 113 is not limited to the display as described above as long as it is a standard for matching the reference unit 6e. In addition to the joint of the sheet 6d, the reference portion 6e may be anything that serves as a reference for alignment, such as a mark drawn on the front surface of the reel 6, a protrusion or a depression formed on the reel 6 itself.

  Further, the position of the reference portion 6e of the reel 6 and the position of the positioning portion 113 can be arbitrarily set. The reference portion 6e and the specific symbol may be arranged on a portion where the reel 6 can be visually recognized with the front frame 2 opened. That is, it is only necessary that the reference portion 6e is within a predetermined frame number from a specific symbol. And it is possible to set the positioning part 113 according to this reference | standard part 6e. Further, the symbol stop line for aligning specific symbols may be a line other than the middle line. Moreover, a specific symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the positioning part 113 according to each of the symbol stop line which can be selected by switching of the light emission line setting switch 112a. That is, here, the positioning unit 113 is provided only at the position corresponding to the middle line, but the positioning unit 113 may be provided also at the position corresponding to the lower right line and the lower left line. For example, the position corresponding to the lower right line is a position where the reference portion 6e is aligned so that a specific symbol of the left reel 6a is aligned with the upper position and a reference where the specific symbol of the right reel 6c is aligned with the lower position. This is the position where the part 6e is aligned.

  From the above, the variable display device 100 having a plurality of reels 6 capable of variable display of a plurality of symbols, a front open concave chamber housing the variable display device 100, and opening / closing on the front of the housing In a slot machine including a front door (front frame 2) provided with a window portion (symbol display window 5) that is supported and can visually recognize the front portions of the plurality of reels 6, A specific symbol is arranged, and a symbol stop line positioned across the front surface of the plurality of reels 6 and a plurality of reels 6 are rotated so that the specific symbol is arranged on the symbol stop line. Manual operation assisting means (positioning part 113, reference part 6e) for assisting manual operation for this purpose.

  Here, the symbol stop line (symbol alignment line) is a virtual line that connects symbols that are visible from the symbol display window 5 among the symbols of the reels 6 for which the variable display is stopped. It may be the same as the effective line for determining the formation of the winning combination, or may not match.

  Further, the manual operation assisting means positions the reference portion 6e provided on the reel so as to be within a predetermined number of frames from the specific symbol, and the reference portion 6e so that the specific symbol is positioned on the symbol stop line. The positioning part 113 for performing will be provided.

  Here, the reference portion 6e may be anything that serves as a reference for alignment, such as a mark drawn on the front surface of the reel 6, a joint of the reel 6, a protrusion or a depression formed on the reel 6 itself. In addition, the positioning unit 113 may be anything as long as it is a standard for matching the reference unit 6e.

  The reel 6 is configured by winding a strip-shaped sheet 6d on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction around the outer periphery of the rotating body, and the reference portion 6e is formed when the sheet 6d is wound around the rotating body. This is a seam of the sheet 6d to be formed.

  Further, a moving mechanism that enables the positioning unit 113 to operate along the circumferential direction of the reel 6 may be provided. The moving mechanism is composed of a rail extending up and down along the circumferential direction of the reel 6 and a moving body movable along the rail, and a positioning portion 113 is provided on the moving body. This makes it possible to change the symbol stop line for aligning specific symbols. In addition, if the moving body can be moved step by step in accordance with the frame width so as to correspond to the upper, middle and lower symbol positions, it is easy to change the symbol stop line for aligning specific symbols. Furthermore, the moving body provided with the positioning unit 113 may be moved manually, but may be automatically moved in accordance with the switching of the light emission line setting switch 112a.

  The moving mechanism is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the positioning line 113a is formed of a light emitter, and is provided in advance so as to correspond to the upper, middle, and lower symbol positions, and the positioning line 113a that emits light is changed. It is good also as a mechanism which controls so that the positioning part 113 may move. The positioning line 113a for emitting light is selected according to the setting of the light emitting line setting switch 112a.

  That is, a plurality of symbol stop lines are set so as to cross the front portions of the plurality of reels 6 facing the window portion (symbol display window 5), so that the symbol stop lines for aligning specific symbols can be changed. In addition, a movement mechanism that allows the positioning unit 113 to move along the movement direction of the symbol may be provided.

  In addition, the moving mechanism may move the positioning unit 113 along the circumferential direction of the reel 6 and may move the positioning unit 113 stepwise in accordance with the frame width of the symbol.

  Further, in the positioning unit 113, only the positioning display unit 113b is shielded by the front panel 9 (decorative region around the symbol display window 5), but the positioning line 113a is also shielded by the front panel 9. All of the positioning portions 113 may be shielded by the front panel 9. Thereby, the beauty | look of the periphery of the symbol display window 5 can be improved more.

  That is, the front door (front frame 2) is provided with a shielding part (front panel 9) that restricts rearward visual recognition around the window part (symbol display window 5), and the positioning part 113 is in a state in which the front door is opened. In the case where the front door is closed, the front door may be shielded by the shielding portion.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the control system of the slot machine 1. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component which is the same as that of the component demonstrated in FIG. 1, or it corresponds, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the control system of the slot machine 1 controls a game control device (main control device) 50 that controls the game in an integrated manner, and controls related to the effects of the game under the control of the game control device 50. The production control device (sub-control device) 70 to be performed automatically and the power supply device 40 for supplying power to these control devices are provided. Each component of the control system is disposed inside the casing of the slot machine 1. In addition, the power supply device 40 is configured to supply backup power so that data stored in the RAM 50c and the RAM 70c (described later) is retained during a power failure.

  The game control device 50 is used for a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 50a, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 50b, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 50c, an input / output interface (hereinafter referred to as “I / F”) 50d, and an internal lottery. A random number generator 50e for generating various random numbers such as a winning determination random number is provided.

  The CPU 50a includes a control unit and a calculation unit, and performs various types of calculation processing, data input / output, generation of control signals, and the like as the calculation processing device of the game control device 50.

  The ROM 50b stores internal lottery determination values (determination tables) and the like in addition to control programs and control data for executing various processes. The ROM 50b stores a stop control table that is referred to when the reel 6 is stopped in each game. For example, there are a stop control table corresponding to various types of winning winnings, a stop control table corresponding to a loss, and the like. In the stop control table, the reel 6 pull-in stop control for forming the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning state (the state of the set winning flag) to the maximum on the effective line and various winnings not internally won. Stores the data for controlling the kicking stop of the reel that removes the corresponding symbol combination from the effective line (the maximum number of sliding frames of 4 frames, etc.), and the stop position depends on the operation stop order and operation timing of the reel 6 It is set in advance.

  In the RAM 50c, a random number storage area for internal lottery sampled by the CPU 50a based on the start operation, various data (for example, credit number data, bet number data, internal winning state data, and predetermined symbol combination modes are derived. A storage area for temporarily storing data relating to payout based on the data, data indicating the winning probability value of the internal lottery, and the work area of the CPU 50a.

  The I / F 50d includes a medal insertion detection switch 51, a start lever switch 52, a reel stop switch 53 (a first reel (left) stop switch 53a, a second reel (middle) stop switch) through a low-pass filter and a buffer gate (not shown). 53b, third reel (right) stop switch 53c), reel position detection switch 54 (left reel position detection switch 54a, middle reel position detection switch 54b, right reel position detection switch 54c), max bet switch 57, payout button switch 58 Various signals output from the payout medal detection switch 59, the setting device 60, the reset switch 61, the door open / close detection switch 62, the radio wave detection switch 81, the medal full switch 82, and the like are supplied to the CPU 50a.

  Here, the medal insertion detection switch 51 is provided in the flow path switching solenoid (medal selector) 68 to detect the passage of the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 15, and the medal insertion is based on this detection information. The number of sheets is counted. The start lever switch 52 is a switch for detecting that the start lever 21 has been operated.

  The first reel (left) stop switch 53a, the second reel (middle) stop switch 53b, and the third reel (right) stop switch 53c of the reel stop switch 53 are operated by the corresponding reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c. It is a switch for detecting that it has been performed. The left reel position detection switch 54a, the middle reel position detection switch 54b, and the right reel position detection switch 54c of the reel position detection switch 54 are switches for detecting the rotation phases of the corresponding reels 6a, 6b, and 6c. .

  The max bet switch 57 is a switch for detecting that the max bet button 17 has been operated. The withdrawal button switch 58 is a switch for detecting that the withdrawal button 20 has been operated. The payout medal detection switch 59 detects the medals paid out from the medal payout device 63, and the number of medals paid out is counted by counting the detection signals from the switches.

  The setting device 60 is for switching the setting of the slot machine 1 based on the setting change operation. With this setting device 60, for example, the winning probabilities (internal winning probabilities) of various winnings (combinations) in the internal lottery for each game are set to any one of a plurality of settings (for example, settings 1 to 6).

  The reset switch 61 is, for example, a switch for detecting that the key inserted into the keyhole 23 is rotated in the opposite direction to when the front frame 2 is opened, and resets the slot machine 1 based on this detection. is there. Note that the game control device 50 cancels the error state of the slot machine 1 based on the detection signal from the reset switch 61, for example. The door open / close detection switch 62 is a switch for detecting the open state of the front frame 2.

  The radio wave detection switch 81 is for detecting abnormal radio waves and for preventing fraud. The medal full switch 82 detects that the medals in the hopper of the medal payout device 63 are full.

  In addition, the I / F 50d sends a control signal output from the CPU 50a to an effect control device 70, a credit number display unit 11, a game progress display unit 12, a payout number display unit 13, a game via an output port and a driver (not shown). Status display unit 18, bet number display unit 19, medal payout device 63, reel motor 64 (left reel motor 64a, middle reel motor 64b, right reel motor 64c), external signal output terminal (with the slot machine 1) Are output to a terminal 33) connected to a management device provided separately, the flow path switching solenoid 68, and the like. Thereby, the game control device 50 can control various components.

  The control signal output to the external signal output terminal 33 includes, for example, a signal indicating the number of bets output when the start lever 21 is operated (game medal insertion signal), and a payout output when a medal is paid out. A signal indicating the number of medals (game medal payout signal), a signal indicating that the premium bonus state is being set (PB signal), a signal indicating that the big bonus state is being set (BB signal), and being in the regular bonus state Signal (RB signal), a signal indicating that the replay time state is in effect (RT signal), a signal (security signal) output when the front frame 2 is opened or when a setting is changed.

  In the game control device 50, for example, the CPU 50 a updates the random number every predetermined cycle time (for example, +1), performs the control of sampling the random number at that time at the detection timing by the start lever switch 52, and the sampled random number is Internal lottery is performed as a random number for internal lottery. Further, the game control device 50 refers to the corresponding stop control table based on the internal lottery result and the stop operation timing of the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c, and operates the reel motors 64a, 64b, 64c. By controlling, the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c are stopped so that a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 5. Note that the random number generated by the random number generator 50e may be sampled.

  Furthermore, the game control device 50, when the symbol constituting the symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning prize (combination) is stopped before reaching the valid line, the reels 6a, 6b, 6c. A so-called pull-in stop control is performed to delay the timing to stop the display so that the symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning that is not won internally is formed on the active line, the timing to stop the reels 6a, 6b, 6c is delayed to The so-called kicking stop control is performed so that the symbols constituting the symbol combination form that can be formed in the same manner pass the effective line. In the pull-in stop control and the kick-off stop control by the game control device 50, the time value at which the stop timing can be changed (delayed) is determined in advance, and the stop operation is normally performed (in the case of 21 frames per reel). The time value is such that it can be drawn or kicked within a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 4 frames) from the performed position.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 70 includes a CPU 70a, a ROM 70b, a RAM 70c, an I / F 70d, and the like. The effect control device 70 controls the effect display in the image display device (liquid crystal display device) 3 based on the information related to the game supplied from the game control device 50, and the effect by the backlight 111, the frame light emitting device 7, and the speaker 4. Control. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as a backlight control means capable of performing light emission control of the backlight 111. In addition, the volume setting when performing an effect or the like by the speaker 4 can be performed by the volume control switch 69 connected to the effect control device 70.

  Further, the effect control device 70 controls the stop button LED 66, the winning line light emitting unit 112, and the movable effect device 8 based on information related to the game supplied from the game control device 50. Furthermore, based on the input information from the light emission line setting switch 112a, the effect mode is changed based on the control for lighting the predetermined winning line light emitting unit 112 when the front frame 2 is opened and the input information from the effect button 10. Control and so on. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as an operation unit light emission control unit capable of performing light emission control of the operation unit light emission unit (stop button LED 66). Note that the stop button LED 66 enters a valid notification lighting state based on the reception of the stop valid command, and enters an invalid notification lighting state based on the reception of the stop command. The invalid notification lighting state may be turned off.

  Here, the information relating to the game supplied from the game control device 50 includes bet number information (for example, the number of pulses corresponding to the bet number) that is output when the start lever 21 is operated and the game is started. , Information that conveys the number of bets and the number of games), internal winning information indicating the lottery result by internal lottery, gaming state information indicating the current gaming state (normal state, special gaming state, RT state 1, 2, etc.), fluctuation The reel stop information indicating that the reel stop button 24 corresponding to the reel 6 being displayed has been operated is included.

  The I / F 70d outputs various signals input from the game control device 50 and input signals from the light emission line setting switch 112a and the effect button switch 10a to the CPU 70a via a low-pass filter and a buffer gate (not shown). The I / F 70d receives a control signal input from the CPU 70a via an output port and a driver (not shown), the image display device 3, the speaker 4, the movable effect device 8, a frame light emitting device 7 including a lamp, an LED, and the like. A stop button LED 66, a backlight 111 made up of LEDs, etc., a winning line light emitting unit 112, etc. As a result, the image display device 3 and the speaker 4 can be controlled by the effect control device 70.

  Thereby, for example, the effect control device 70 performs control to display a small role winning notice display, a special winning notification display, an effect display (thing completed in one game or over a plurality of games) on the image display device 3. Do. In addition, the effect control device 70 performs decoration by light emission from the frame light emitting device 7 provided on the front frame 2 and effects by sound from the speaker 4. Note that the communication between the game control device 50 and the effect control device 70 described above is in a form in which a control signal can be transmitted only in one direction from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70. An illegal signal is prevented from being input to the game control device 50.

  Here, the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. When playing a game in the slot machine 1, the player first inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 15 or operates the max bet button 17 to input the bet number (betting input). When the betting input is performed, the active line is set, and the operation of the start lever 21 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. When the start lever 21 is operated, an internal lottery process is performed in the game control device 50 to determine whether or not the winning (role) is won and the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c start to change.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed, the reels 6a, 6b, 6c are stopped from rotating based on the operation of the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c in which the stop operation is enabled, and a predetermined symbol is displayed in the symbol display window 5. . When the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning winning is formed on the active line, the winning is established, and the medal corresponding to the winning is paid out. The game of one segment is completed as described above, and thereafter, the game is advanced by repeating this operation.

  FIG. 5 shows an example of an arrangement of symbols on the sheet 6d wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c included in the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the sheet 6d includes “7”, “BAR”, “Bell”, “White Watermelon”, “Black Watermelon”, “White Cherry”, “Black Cherry”, “White Replay”. ”,“ Black Replay ”, and“ REP ”which can be identified are arranged in a predetermined order. The upper and lower end portions of each sheet 6 d are portions that become seams when wound around the reel 6. This portion constitutes the reference portion 6e for alignment described above, and “7” is arranged as a specific symbol on the frame immediately above the reference portion 6e.

  FIG. 6 shows the types of winning (role) in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination mode corresponding to each winning, and the winning contents. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a special prize, a premium bonus prize (PB prize), a big bonus 1 prize (BB1 prize), a big bonus 2 prize (BB2 prize), and a regular bonus prize (RB prize) are defined. . Each special prize winning flag (a flag set when winning an internal lottery) is treated separately. Note that if the special winning is won internally, the winning flag is carried over to the next game and the special winning can be established in subsequent games even if the special winning can not be established in the internally won game.

  The number of medals paid out when the special prize is established is 0, but when the PB prize, the BB1 prize, the BB2 prize or the RB prize is established, the PB state, the BB1 state, and the BB2 state corresponding to the respective special games state. Or, an RB condition occurs. In this special game state, a game is executed using a determination table in which the internal winning probability of a small role winning is higher than in the normal game state, and the number of payouts in the special game state exceeds a predetermined number, The special game state is ended by executing the game a number of times. In the special gaming state, the JAC game (a game in which the internal winning probability of a predetermined winning combination becomes high probability when a JAC in winning is established) is repeatedly executed until the total number of medals to be paid out reaches a specified number. Alternatively, the JAC game may be executed in combination with a game having a high internal winning probability of the small role winning.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, single bonus prizes (SIN prizes), bell prizes, Ripbell prizes, single-piece prizes, normal replay prizes, special replay 1 (promotion) prizes, special replays 2 (special replays 2) Inrush), a special replay 3 (relegation) award, a 10-piece winning award, and a 3-piece winning award are defined. The Ripbell winning can be established only in the RB state that is started based on the establishment of the RB winning, and the 10-player combination can be established only in the PB state that is started based on the establishment of the PB winning. Of these small part winnings, other than the replay winning are awarded, and the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In addition, when a replay winning is established, medals are paid out to 0, but a replay game (replay game) that can be executed without a betting operation is given.

  In addition, in the above small prize winnings, there are those that are further distinguished (separate flags) by the derived effective lines (in this case, the middle stage line and the slug line (upward or downward right line)). In addition, there are some cases that cannot be established unless the operation order (push order) of the predetermined reel stop button 24 is used. For example, the Bell winning a prize is distinguished from those derived to the middle line and those derived to the name line (upward or downward right line). Furthermore, there is a case where the bell winnings derived to the name line are not established unless they are in a predetermined pushing order. In the following description, the bell winnings derived to the middle line may be referred to as “middle bell winnings”, and those derived to the name line may be referred to as “named bell winnings”.

  Among the three-piece symbol combinations, symbol combinations in which the left reel 6a is not cherry and the right reel 6c is other than black replay, and symbol combinations composed of white or black watermelon are also derived to the middle line. And those derived to the slant line (upward or rightward line). In addition, when the left reel 6a of the symbol combination is a bell in the combination of 3 sheets, it can be derived only to the right downward line. In this case, the apparent bell is arranged on the upper line, and in the following explanation, This prize may be referred to as an upper bell prize.

  In addition, there are some replay winnings that cannot be established unless they are in the specified pushing order, and those that are differentiated between those derived to the middle line and those derived to the name line (upward or downward right line). is there. For example, special replay winning prizes 1 to 3 are not established unless they are in a predetermined pushing order. Furthermore, the special replay winning prize 2 is distinguished by what is derived to the middle line and what is derived to the name line.

  When a small winning combination is won internally, the small winning combination can be established only in the internally winning game. In other words, depending on the timing of the stop operation, depending on the type of the small role winning, even if the drawing stop control of 4 frames is performed due to the symbol arrangement, the small winning winning cannot be established or there is no pressing order. If there is a small role winning that may not be able to be established, and such a small role winning is not achieved by internal winning (so-called “missing”), The winning flag for this small role winning is cleared and is not carried over to the next game. In addition, although a combination of small role winnings may be established, the maximum payout number in one game is set to 15.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, in the same game, a special prize and a predetermined small role prize (see FIG. 8) can be won internally. In addition, when a win for a small role is won in a game after a game that has been internally won for the special prize and the winning flag is carried over, the priority order of the winnings derived on the active line is Replay Prize> Replay Other than winning a prize, it is considered as a special prize. In other words, even if the special winning flag is carried over, if the small winnings are won internally, the establishment of the small winnings is given priority, and the drawing stop control is performed so that the small winnings are achieved. .

  When one of the above winnings is won internally by the internal lottery in the game control device 50, the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning of the internal winning can be derived on a predetermined active line. On the other hand, if any winning is not won internally, the winning combination is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning is not formed on the active line.

  FIG. 7 shows an example of a reach that can be derived when a special prize is won internally. The first positive shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B is a reach that is established when the fluctuation of only the left reel 6a is stopped, and the second positive shown in FIG. This is the reach that is established when the fluctuation of only the right reel 6c is stopped. Further, the third probability shown in FIGS. 7D to 7H is a reach that is established when the fluctuations of all the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c are stopped.

  FIG. 8 shows an example of a stop type of a rare small role (rare role). These rare prizes are prizes that may be won internally by overlapping with the BB1 prize, the BB2 prize, or the RB prize. In the figure, “ANY” means that the stop type of the reel 6 does not matter. Further, the watermelons of the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c in FIGS. 8A and 8C may be black watermelons. Further, the middle stage of the right reel 6c in FIG. 8D means a symbol other than black replay.

  FIG. 9 shows a list of internal lottery combinations that can occur in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the small role winning, there are a single winning in which the small winnings are won independently, and a duplicate winning in which the winnings overlap with other small winnings and special winnings. It should be noted that “three overlapping winning combinations” such as the three winning combinations A to E, the bell G, and the single winning combination A and B mean that a single winning combination is included. In addition, when the three-piece role C (middle cherries) is not won in duplicate with the BB winning, an AT right that is a right to shift to an AT state assisting the derivation of the established small role is generated and stocked. .

  Among the internal lottery combinations shown here, there are those in which the possibility of establishment is determined according to the pressing order. For example, all of the promoted replays A to F are special replay 1 wins, but they are not established (missed) unless they are in a predetermined pushing order. The rush replays A to F are special replay 2 wins, but they are not established unless they are in a predetermined push order. The rush replays A to F are further distinguished from those derived to the middle stage line and those derived to the slant line (upward or rightward line) (separate flags).

  Further, the extra name play and the extra middle stage replay are special replay 2 winnings. These extra slender play and extra middle replay are not established unless they are in a predetermined push order, and six kinds of push orders different from each other are included. Special Replay Winner 2 is basically called an Inrush Replay Winner because it triggers entry into the AT state that assists the derivation of established small roles. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of establishment, the acquisition of AT rights Or the number of games in the AT state may be added, and in this case, it may be referred to as an extra replay prize.

  Further, the falling replays A to F are special replay 3 winnings, but they are not established unless they are in a predetermined pushing order. In addition, although bells A to F (named bells) all win the bell, they are not established unless they are in a predetermined pushing order.

  Among the special winning combinations, the PB winning is only a single winning, and the BB1 winning, the BB2 winning, and the RB winning have a single winning as well as a double winning with a rare small role. Rare small roles are three-piece roles A to E (weak, strong, middle cherry, weak, strong watermelon), bell G (middle bell), and one-piece role (chance eyes A and B). Note that the rare small combination may include a net loss that is not internally won in any winnings.

  FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram for explaining the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be broadly divided into a normal gaming state ST10, a special gaming state ST20 that shifts when a special winning is established, and a special condition established in the special gaming state ST20. There is a specific game state ST30 that is shifted to after the game state ends or when a specific condition is satisfied in the normal game state ST10. The specific game state ST30 is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST10.

  The normal gaming state ST10 includes a low probability state ST11 with a low probability of winning in the AT right acquisition lottery (AT right acquisition probability), a high probability state ST12 with a higher probability than the low probability state ST11, and a high probability state. There is an ultra-high accuracy state ST13 having a higher probability than ST12. The transition of the internal state is performed by lottery.

  In the normal gaming state ST10, when a PB winning, BB1 winning, BB2 winning or RB winning which is a special winning is internally won, and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and winning is established, the game proceeds to the special gaming state ST20. Specifically, when a symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning for PB winning is derived and winning is established, the process proceeds to the PB state ST21. When the symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning of the BB1 winning is derived and winning is established, the process proceeds to the BB1 state ST22. When the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning of the BB2 winning is derived and winning is established, the process proceeds to the BB2 state ST23. When the symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning of the RB winning is derived and winning is established, the process proceeds to the RB state ST24.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state ST10, when there is AT right stock (AT stock is present) and the transition condition that the digestion of the precursor game executed until the AT is activated is satisfied, the preparation AT of the specific gaming state ST30 The process proceeds to state ST34. Further, in the normal game state ST10, when the promotion replay (special replay 1) is internally won, the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived, and the winning condition is established, the transition condition is established, the transition chance of the specific gaming state ST30 Transition to state ST31.

  Further, when the special gaming state ST20 is completed, if there is an AT right stock, the process proceeds to the preparation AT state ST34 of the specific gaming state ST30, and if there is no AT right stock, the process proceeds to the normal gaming state ST10. In the special game state ST20, a lottery for acquiring the AT right is performed.

  In the transition chance state ST31 of the specific gaming state ST30, the internal winning probability of the replay winning is higher than the normal gaming state ST10 (RT state). As a result, it is possible to play games while suppressing the consumption of medals. Accordingly, it is possible to expect winning of a special prize while increasing the gaming value obtained by winning the small part prize. When the transition condition is satisfied in the transition chance state ST31, the state shifts to the ART (assist replay time) state ST35. The case where the transition condition is satisfied is a case where a winning is established by acquiring a new AT right and deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to an internal winning for the replay (special replay 2). Here, when a new AT right is acquired, the state may be shifted to the ART standby state ST33.

  On the other hand, when the fall condition due to the occurrence of the violation is satisfied in the transition chance state ST31, the transition is made to the normal gaming state ST10. Note that the fall condition due to the violation occurs when a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that has not been established in a predetermined order is missed (push order bell spilling) ). In any state of the specific game state ST30, when the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning of the special winning is derived, the state shifts to the special game state ST20.

  In the ART state ST35, the internal winning probability of the replay winning (normal replay winning) is higher than the normal gaming state ST10 within the prescribed number of games (RT state), and the derivation of the established small role is assisted (SIN winning) In the case of, avoidance of establishment is assisted) (AT state). Note that the expected increase in medals per game is about 1.5. The ART state ST35 includes an ART state 1ST35a and an ART state 2ST35b, and either one is selected depending on the type of AT right.

  In the ART state 1ST35a, one set (30 games) of the ART state is executed for one AT right. Further, the ART state is continued only by adding the number of sets. That is, if a new AT right is acquired, the number of sets corresponding to this is added. In the ART state 2ST35b, one set (30 games) of the ART state can be executed for one AT right, and the number of games that can be executed in this ART state can be added.

  There are an extra zone 1ST35b1 and an extra zone 2ST35b2 as the period in which the number of games is added. The extra zone 1 is an extra number of variable games, and an extra lottery is performed for each game, and 5 to 100 games are added according to the lottery result. This extra zone 1 continues for 2 to 25 games. The extra zone 2 is an extra fixed game number, and each game will be added lottery and continuous lottery in the extra zone 2, and if the extra lottery is won, 100 games will be added, and if the continuous lottery is won Add-on zone 2 continues.

  In the ART state ST35, when the specified number of games are consumed and the demotion condition is reached in which there is no stock of AT rights, the transition is made to the transition chance state ST31. On the other hand, in the ART state ST35, when the transition condition is reached in which the prescribed number of games has been consumed but the AT right stock exists, the state shifts to the ART standby state ST33. In the ART state ST35, when the demotion condition due to the occurrence of the violation is satisfied, the state shifts to the relief AT state ST32. The establishment of the demote condition due to the occurrence of a violation means that a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or a SIN prize has been established, or a bell prize that has not been established unless it has been pushed in a predetermined order (push order bell spilling). ).

  In the rescue AT state ST32, derivation of the established small role is assisted within the range of the number of games that have not been consumed in the ART state ST35, but the internal winning probability of the replay winning is made equal to that in the normal game state ST10. Accordingly, it is possible to expect a win for the special prize while increasing the game value obtained by the establishment of the small role prize, but the expected increase in medals per game is lower than the ART state ST35.

  When the promotion condition is satisfied in the repair AT state ST32, the state shifts to the ART standby state ST33. The case where the promotion condition is satisfied is a case where a winning combination is established by deriving an internal winning combination for promotion replay (special replay 1) and deriving a corresponding symbol combination mode. On the other hand, when the fall condition is satisfied in the relief AT state ST32, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST10. Satisfaction of the fall condition here means occurrence of violation (fall fall replay (special replay 3) win or SIN win, missing bell win (push order bell spill) that does not hold unless a predetermined push order) or ART This is a case where the number of games set in the state 35 is exhausted.

  In the ART standby state ST33, as in the ART state ST35, a game in which the internal winning probability of the replay winning is higher than that in the normal game state ST10 is executed, and a game for assisting the derivation of the established small role is executed. . Note that the expected increase in medals per game is about 1.5, which is the same expected value as in the ART state ST35.

  In the ART standby state ST33, when the entry replay (special replay 2) is internally won and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and the winning condition is established, the state is shifted to the ART state 35. On the other hand, in the ART standby state ST33, a fall condition due to occurrence of a violation (falling replay (special replay 3) winning or SIN winning, bell winning missing (pushing order bell spilling) that does not hold unless a predetermined pushing order) occurs. If established, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state ST10.

  In the preparation AT state ST34, a game for assisting the derivation of the established small role is executed, but the internal winning probability of the replay winning is made equal to that in the normal gaming state ST10. Accordingly, it is possible to expect a win for the special prize while increasing the game value obtained by the establishment of the small role prize, but the expected increase in medals per game is lower than the ART state ST35. In addition, the assistance for deriving the established small role is started from the next game of the game in which the winning of a bell that is not established unless it is in a predetermined pushing order is missed (pushing order bell spilling).

  When the promotion condition is established in the preparation AT state ST34, the state shifts to the ART standby state ST33. The case where the promotion condition is satisfied is a case where a winning combination is established by deriving an internal winning combination for promotion replay (special replay 1) and deriving a corresponding symbol combination mode. On the other hand, when the fall condition due to the violation occurs in the preparation AT state ST34, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST10. The establishment of the fall condition due to the occurrence of a violation here is a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or a SIN prize, or a missed bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined push order (push order bell spill). . However, before the assist starts, even if a push-down bell spill occurs, the falling condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 11 shows a state transition diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the game control device 50. The normal state ST40 is a non-RT state that is not an RT state, and the winning probabilities of normal replay, promotion replay (special replay 1), rush replay (special replay 2), and fall replay (special replay 3) are in a low probability state. The winning probability obtained by adding these replay winnings is 1/8 in the internal lottery. In FIG. 10, a corresponding portion is described as a non-RT state.

  Specifically, the normal replay winning probability is a normal probability. In addition, if the winning combination of the promotion replay and the fall replay occurs with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/15 in the internal lottery), the promotion replay and the fall replay can be established if the pushing order is applied. The rush replay is not won or is won with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/1000 in the internal lottery), and the rush replay can be established only when the first stop is the right reel 6c. Yes. Overlap replay and normal replay winning are generated with a very low probability (for example, 1/1000 in the internal lottery), and it is possible to establish an extra replay or a normal replay if the pushing order is applied. When an extra replay is established, a new AT right is generated or the number of ART games is added.

  When the promotion replay (special replay 1) is internally won in the normal state ST40 and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and the promotion condition in which a winning is established is established, the process proceeds to the RT state 1ST41. This RT state 1ST41 is an RT state in which the winning probability of the replay winning is higher than the normal state ST40, and the winning probability of the promotion replay (special replay 1), the rush replay (special replay 2), and the fall replay (special replay 3) is The high probability state is higher than the normal state ST40, and the winning probability of the normal replay is the same as the normal state ST40, and the winning probability obtained by adding these replay winnings is 1 / 1.5 in the internal lottery. ing. In FIG. 10, the RT state 1 is described at the corresponding location. In addition, you may make the winning probability of normal replay higher than normal state ST40.

  Specifically, the normal replay winning probability is a normal probability. In addition, if the winning combination of the promotion replay and the fall replay occurs with a very high probability (for example, ½ in the internal lottery), and the pushing order is applied, the promotion replay and the fall replay can be established. Further, if the winning winning combination of the rush replay and the falling replay occurs with a high probability (for example, 1/10 in the internal lottery) and the pushing order is applied, it is possible to establish the rushing replay and the falling replay. Overlap replay and normal replay winning are generated with a very low probability (for example, 1/1000 in the internal lottery), and it is possible to establish an extra replay or a normal replay if the pushing order is applied. When an extra replay is established, a new AT right is generated or the number of ART games is added.

  When the fall condition is satisfied in the RT state 1ST41, the process proceeds to the normal state ST40. Satisfaction of this fall condition is a violation (when a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order (push order bell spill)). It is the generation and winning of bonus prize (special prize). If the winning and winning of the bonus winning occurs in the same game, the process shifts to the special gaming state ST43.

  In RT state 1ST41, when the entry replay (special replay 2) is internally won and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and a winning condition is established, the process proceeds to RT state 2ST42. This RT state 2ST42 is an RT state in which the winning probability of the replay winning is higher than that in the normal state ST40, and the winning probability of the normal replay is a higher probability state than in the normal state ST40, and promoted replay (special replay 1) The winning probability of replay (special replay 2) and falling replay (special replay 3) is the same probability state as the normal state ST40, and the winning probability obtained by adding these replay winnings is 1 / 1.5 in the internal lottery. ing. In FIG. 10, the corresponding state is indicated as RT state 2.

  Specifically, the winning probability of normal replay is higher than that of the normal state ST40 and the RT state 1ST41. Promotion replay is not won or overlaps with normal replay with very low probability (for example, 1/1000 in internal lottery), but promotion replay is only possible when the first stop is the right reel 6c push order. Yes. In addition, duplicate winning between the rush replay and the normal replay occurs with a high probability (for example, 1/10 in the internal lottery). In this case, the rush replay is established in one way selected from the six pushing orders, and the others Normal replay is established in the order of pressing. In addition, the overlap winning of the fall replay and the normal replay occurs with a high probability (for example, 1/10 in the internal lottery). In this case, the fall replay is established in five ways selected from the six pushing orders. Normal replay is established in the order of pressing. Overlap replay and normal replay winning are generated with a low probability (for example, 1/100 in the internal lottery), and it is possible to establish an extra replay or a normal replay if the pushing order is applied. When an extra replay is established, a new AT right is generated or the number of ART games is added.

  When the falling condition is satisfied in the RT state 2ST42, the process proceeds to the normal state ST40. Satisfaction of this fall condition is a violation (when a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order (push order bell spill)). It is the generation and winning of bonus prize (special prize). If the winning and winning of the bonus winning occurs in the same game, the process shifts to the special gaming state ST43.

  When a bonus prize (special prize) is established in the normal state ST40, the process proceeds to the special game state ST43. If the winning and winning of the bonus prize occurs in the same game in the RT state 1ST41 or the RT state 2ST42, the process shifts to the special game state ST43 without passing through the normal state ST40. In the special game state ST43, when the end condition according to the type of the special winning established is satisfied and the bonus is ended, the process proceeds to the normal state ST40. Note that, except during the special game state, the winning probabilities other than the replay winning (small role winning, special winning) are always constant. Further, when a special prize is established, the state may be shifted to the RT state 2ST42.

  In FIG. 12, the state transition diagram for demonstrating the transition of the game state in the production | presentation control apparatus 70 was shown. In the non-assist state ST50 in which the derivation of the established small role is not assisted, the AT right acquisition probability in the AT right acquisition lottery has a low probability state, a high probability state with a higher probability than the low probability state, and a high probability state. There is an ultra-high-accuracy state with a higher probability, and the state shifts when the mode transition condition is satisfied. The mode transition condition is, for example, winning a lottery performed at the time of rare small role winning. This non-assist state ST50 corresponds to the normal game state in FIG.

  In the non-assist state ST50, when the promotion replay (special replay 1) is internally won and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and a winning condition is established, the transition is made to the transition chance effect state ST51. In the transition chance production state ST51, the assistance for deriving the established small role is not performed. This transition chance production state ST51 corresponds to the transition chance state ST31 in FIG.

  When the transition condition is established in the transition chance effect state ST51, the process proceeds to the specific assist state ST55. The transition condition is that a new AT right is acquired, and that a winning combination is established by deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning for the rush replay (special replay 2). In addition, when the fall condition due to the occurrence of violation is satisfied in the transition chance effect state ST51, the state shifts to the non-assist state ST50. The fall condition due to the occurrence of the violation means that a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or a SIN prize has been established, or a bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined pushing order (push order bell spilling). It is.

  Further, when the AT right is acquired in the non-assist state ST50 (including the case where the AT right is acquired by reaching the ceiling), the state shifts to the precursor game state ST52. This precursor game state ST52 corresponds to the normal game state in FIG. In the precursor game state ST52, the right acquisition probability in the AT right acquisition lottery becomes a low probability state with a low probability. In the precursor game state ST52, the precursor effect that suggests that the ART state is generated is performed. The number of continuation games for this sign production can be selected from 11, 13, 15, 17 or 19 games.

  When the number of precursor games is exhausted in the precursor game state ST52, the process shifts to the assist standby state ST53. This assist standby state ST53 corresponds to the state before the start of assist in the preparation AT state ST34 in FIG. In the assist standby state ST53, the right acquisition probability in the AT right acquisition lottery becomes a low probability state with a low probability. In the assist standby state ST53, an effect of displaying a screen for informing that the AT is started is performed. In this assist standby state ST53, if a push-order bell spill occurs that misses a bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined push order, the process proceeds to the transition assist state ST54.

  Further, in the assist standby state ST53, when the fall condition is satisfied and there is an AT right stock, the state shifts to the precursor game state ST52. The falling condition here is a fall replay (special replay 3) winning or a SIN winning. In the assist standby state ST53, if the fall condition is satisfied and there is no AT right stock, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50. The falling condition here is a fall replay (special replay 3) winning or a SIN winning. In the assist standby state ST53, information for assisting the avoidance of the SIN prize is notified, but information for assisting the establishment of the push order bell is not notified.

  The transition assist state ST54 is a state in which information for assisting promotion replay, rush replay, establishment of push order bell winning and avoidance of SIN winning is notified. Note that the right acquisition probability in the AT right acquisition lottery is in a low probability state with a low probability. This transition assist state ST54 corresponds to the state after the start of assist in the relief AT state ST32, the ART standby state ST33, and the preparation AT state ST34 in FIG. When the transition condition is satisfied in the transition assist state ST54, the transition is made to the specific assist state ST55. The transition condition is that a winning combination is established by deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning for the rush replay (special replay 2).

  The specific assist state ST55 is a state in which the derivation of the established small role is assisted. In the case of a SIN prize, avoidance of establishment is assisted. In the specific assist state, the game number fixed assist state ST55a and the game number variable assist state ST55b are set. This specific assist state ST55 corresponds to the ART state ST35 in FIG. 10, the game number fixed assist state ST55a corresponds to the ART state 1ST35a, and the game number variable assist state ST55b corresponds to the ART state 2ST35b.

  In the game number fixed assist state ST55a, the probability of right acquisition in the AT right acquisition lottery is a low probability state with a low probability, a high probability state with a higher probability than the low probability state, and a super high state with a higher probability than the high probability state. There is a certain state, and the state transitions when the mode transition condition is satisfied. The mode transition condition is, for example, winning a lottery performed at the time of rare small role winning. Then, an AT right acquisition lottery is performed with a probability corresponding to the above-mentioned lottery state. When a new AT right is acquired, the number of sets is increased, and a specific assist state ST55 of 30 games per set can be executed. .

  In the game number variable assist state ST55b, there are a normal zone ST55b0, a special zone 1ST55b1, and a special zone 2ST55b2, and the zone shifts when the zone transition condition is satisfied. The specialized zone 1ST55b1 corresponds to the added zone 1ST35b1 in FIG. 10, and the specialized zone 2ST55b2 corresponds to the added zone 2ST35b2 in FIG.

  In this specific assist state ST55, when the demotion condition due to the occurrence of the violation is satisfied, the state shifts to the transition assist state ST54. The establishment of the demote condition due to the occurrence of a violation means that a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or a SIN prize has been established, or a bell prize that has not been established unless it has been pushed in a predetermined order (push order bell spilling). ). In the specific assist state ST55, when the prescribed number of games is exhausted but there is an AT right stock, the transition assist state ST54 is entered. When the specified number of games is exhausted and there is no AT right stock in the specific assist state ST55, the state shifts to the transition chance effect state ST51.

  The transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 10 is combined with the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 12 and the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. Has been realized. In other words, the game control device 50 and the effect control device 70 change the gaming state into a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined winning combination for the transitional role. It is a game state switching means that can be switched. In addition, the transitional combination includes a promotion combination for switching the gaming state to the specific gaming state and a demoted combination for switching the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Promotional role includes promotion replay prize. In addition, a rush replay prize that triggers the transition from the transition chance state ST31 without assist to the ART state ST35 with assist can be included in the promotion combination for switching to a state advantageous to the player. Relegation roles include a fall replay prize and a SIN prize. In addition, a push-bell winning prize that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the RT state being terminated due to missing, can be included in the relegation role.

  FIG. 13 shows how the AT right is acquired in the special game state based on each special prize. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the PB winning is established, the AT right corresponding to the ART state 2ST35b is stocked. Further, in the PB state ST21 that is started based on the establishment of the PB winning, every time BAR is aligned, 30 games are added as the number of games that can be executed in the ART state 2ST35b. This PB state is terminated when ten bats are derived three times without BARs being prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, in the BB1 state started based on the establishment of the BB1 winning, the AT right corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a or the ART state 2 is obtained every time the special replay 2 winning (additional replay winning) is established. Stocked. When the black replays are arranged at an angle (the formation of the name change replay winning), the AT right corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a is stocked. The formation of the Naname Add-on Replay win occurs at 1/80. Further, when black replays are arranged in the middle stage (middle stage replay winning is established), AT rights corresponding to ART state 2ST35b are stocked. The middle stage replay winning will occur at 1/200. After the additional replay winning is established, the reel 6 restarts and stops, and an operation-mediated freeze effect (so-called 0G ream) that can derive up to eight consecutive replay winnings can be executed. The number of AT rights (AT rights corresponding to the ART state 2ST35b) corresponding to the number of times of the derived extra replay winning is stocked. This BB1 state ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 360.

  In the BB2 state that is started based on the establishment of the BB2 winning, an AT right acquisition lottery corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a or the ART state 2 is performed every time a middle bell winning is generated. When a lottery is won, AT rights corresponding to the lottery result are stocked. Information on the AT right acquisition result is notified in the final game in the BB2 state. This BB2 state ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 280.

  In the RB state that is started based on the establishment of the RB winning, the AT right corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a is acquired according to the gaming state at the time of the occurrence of the RB state and the number of correct answers of the six-selection push order bells A lottery will be held. If the selection of the six-selection pressing order bell is correctly answered and the establishment of the name slump winning is generated four times, the acquisition of the AT right corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a is confirmed. This RB state ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 60. If a predetermined freeze effect is generated during these special game states, the AT right corresponding to the ART state 2ST35b is confirmed to be acquired.

  Next, processing by the game control device 50 will be described. The process by the game control device 50 includes a game control process (see FIG. 14) for overall control of the game, and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) performed every predetermined time (for example, about every 2 msec).

[Game control processing]
First, the game control process will be described. FIG. 14 shows a flowchart showing an example of the game control process. This game control process is executed by the CPU 50a reading and executing the control program of the game control process stored in the ROM 50b when the power of the gaming machine 50 is turned on when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. Is started.

  In the game control process, first, a power-on process for initializing a register in the CPU 50a of the game control device 50 or initializing game data stored in the RAM 50c is executed (step S1).

Next, a bet number is set by a betting operation (that is, a medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 15 or an input from a credit) or an automatic betting operation based on establishment of a replay winning, and a bet number command is transmitted to the effect control device 70. A betting number / credit number control process is executed (step S2).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the payout button 20 has been operated. When it is determined that the payout button 20 has been operated, the inserted medal is refunded and the medal stored as credit is refunded. The medal clearing process to be transmitted to is executed (step S3).

  Then, it is determined whether the bet number is an upper limit value (for example, 3) (step S4). If the bet number has not reached the upper limit value (step S4; N), the process returns to step S2. If the bet number has reached the upper limit (step S4; Y), it is determined whether or not the start lever 21 has been operated (step S5).

  When the start lever 21 is not operated (step S5; N), the process returns to step S2. When the start lever 21 is operated (step S5; Y), the replay flag set based on the establishment of the replay winning is cleared (step S6), and the flow path switching solenoid (selector) 68 is operated. Then, a medal insertion prohibition operation is set for converting to a insertion restriction state in which the medal cannot be inserted (step S7).

  Thereafter, an internal lottery of a winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is performed, and an internal lottery process (step S8) is performed in which a lottery result command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control device 70. As a setting related to the freeze effect, which is an effect that is invalidated over time, a freeze effect setting process is performed for setting the execution of the freeze effect based on the internal lottery result and managing the number of games until the freeze effect is executed (step) S9).

  Next, a reel rotation start process (step S10) for executing the set freeze effect or setting the fluctuation start (rotation start) of the reel 6 is performed, and a winning / winning flag set based on the result of the internal lottery In response to the operation timing of the reel stop button 24, a reel rotation stop process (step S11) for performing a process related to stopping (rotating stop) the fluctuation display of each reel 6 is performed.

  Then, the symbol combination mode stopped and displayed on the active line based on the reel position information from the reel position detection switch 54 (specifically, the rotation phase of the reel 6 detected by the reel position detection switch 54) is displayed. It is determined whether or not the winning winning flag is determined, and it is determined whether or not a winning is achieved, and a winning determination process (step S12) for setting payout number information when the winning is achieved is performed.

  Thereafter, a payout control process (step S13) for adding credits or paying out medals by the medal payout device 63 based on the payout number information is performed, and the gaming state (normal state, special game) shown in FIG. 11 according to the established condition. A gaming state update process (step S14) for controlling the transition of the states (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state, RB state), RT state 1, RT state 2) is performed. Then, the flow path switching solenoid (selector) 68 is operated to convert to a insertion allowable state in which medals can be inserted, thereby canceling the medal insertion prohibiting operation (step S15), and the process returns to step S2.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the timer interrupt process, first, a register saving process (step S21) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is transferred to the RAM 50c, and inputs from various sensors are taken. An input process for reading the port state is executed (step S22).

  The inputs captured in this input process (step S22) are the medal insertion detection switch 51, the start lever switch 52, the reel stop switch 53 (first reel (left) stop switch 53a, second reel (middle) stop switch 53b, 3 reel (right) stop switch 53c), reel position detection switch 54 (left reel position detection switch 54a, middle reel position detection switch 54b, right reel position detection switch 54c), max bet switch 57, payout button switch 58, payout medal Detection switch 59, reset switch 61, door open / close detection switch 62, radio wave detection switch 81, medal full switch 82, etc.) and setting device 60.

  Next, as processing related to security, when an input from the medal insertion detection switch 51 is an input indicating an abnormality, a processing corresponding to this is performed, or a medal insertion error command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 The input error monitoring process (step S23) is performed. Further, as a security-related process, a radio wave error monitoring process for performing a process corresponding to detection of abnormal radio wave irradiation based on an input from the radio wave detection switch 81 or transmitting a radio wave illegal command to the effect control device 70. (Step S24) is performed to monitor the state of the front frame 2 based on the input from the door open / close detection switch 62 as a security-related process, and to control the production of the door open command or the door close command according to the opening / closing of the front frame 2. The door opening monitoring process (step S25) transmitted to the apparatus 70 is performed. That is, the game control device 50 serves as an opening detection means capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame 2).

  Next, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored, and when the power failure occurs, a power shut-off process (step S26) is performed to perform processing when the power failure occurs. As processing at the time of the occurrence of a power failure, for example, after stopping the payout of medals, backing up information of the RAM 50c, storing the stack pointer, checksum, etc., the RAM access is prohibited and the power of the slot machine 1 is shut off. Wait for If no power failure has occurred, the power cut-off process (step S26) is not performed, and the next reel operation process (step S27) is performed.

  In the reel operation process (step S27), output settings for rotation and stop of the reel 6 are performed based on the freeze information and the reel update information that are set when the freeze effect is performed. Thereafter, a timer update process (step S28) for updating various timers is performed, and a branch process corresponding to the process number is performed (step S29).

  If the process number is “0” in step S29, the medal full switch monitoring process for monitoring whether the medal in the hopper of the medal payout device 63 is full based on the input from the medal full switch 82 (step S30). I do. If the processing number is “1” in step S29, the medal payout abnormality is monitored based on the input from the payout medal detection switch 59, and if there is an abnormality, a payout switch error command is transmitted to the effect control device 70. The payout medal detection switch error monitoring process (step S31) is performed.

If the process number is “2” in step S29, the LED for controlling display on the game progress display unit 12, the bet number display unit 19, the credit number display unit 11, the payout number display unit 13, and the game state display unit 18. / 7-segment control processing (step S32) is performed. If the processing number is “3” in step S29, external information editing processing (step S33) for editing information to be output to an external device such as a hall computer is performed.

  After performing the process according to the process number, based on the output data set in various processes, the production control device 70, the game progress display unit 12, the bet number display unit 19, the credit number display unit 11, the payout number display unit 13 , An output process of outputting a control signal to the game state display unit 18, the medal payout device 63, the left reel motor 64a, the middle reel motor 64b, the right reel motor 64c, the external signal output terminal 33, and the like (step) S34). Then, the interrupt request is cleared (step S35), the register is restored (step S36), the interrupt is permitted (step S37), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Internal lottery processing]
FIG. 16 shows an internal lottery process in the game control process shown in FIG. Note that, during the internal lottery process, an input of various operations such as a betting operation and a reel 6 stop operation is not accepted and is invalidated. In the internal lottery process, first, a random value (random number for winning determination) is acquired from the random number generator 50e (step S41), and a winning / winning determination table (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the current gaming state is set (step 17). S42).

  Next, based on the random value acquired in step S41 and the winning winning determination table set in step S42, a winning / winning determination process (step S43) is performed for determining whether or not the internal winning has been won. In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the prize has been won internally using a random value generated by the random number generator 50e, that is, a hardware random number generated by hardware. It is not limited. For example, it can be configured to determine whether or not an internal win has been won based on a soft random number generated by software.

  Then, a loss winning flag is set (step S44), and it is determined whether or not the determination result obtained in the winning winning determination process in step S43 is a winning winning (step S45). If the determination result obtained in the winning / winning determination process is not a winning / winning (step S45; N), that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds to step S47. If the determination result obtained in the winning winning determination process is a winning winning (step S45; Y), a winning winning flag corresponding to the internal winning is set instead of the lose winning flag set in step S44. (Step S46), the process proceeds to Step S47.

  In step S47, a lottery result command corresponding to the winning flag (losing winning flag or winning winning flag) set in step S44 or S46 is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S47). Then, stop information setting processing (step S48) for setting stop information for stopping the symbol corresponding to the winning winning flag on the active line is performed, and the internal lottery processing is terminated.

  In the stop information setting process (step S48), for example, when a winning winning flag corresponding to a special winning is carried over, other winning winning flags corresponding to a plurality of winnings are set as in the case of winning other winnings. The priority order of winning that is established when set is set. This priority is the highest in the replay winning, and is lower in the order of the small role winning other than the replay winning and the special winning (replay winning> small winning other than the replay winning> special winning). That is, the game control device 50 forms an internal lottery (internal) lottery means for determining whether or not a winning combination (winning) is won each time a game with a variable display of a plurality of variable display units (reels 6) is executed.

  FIG. 17 (a) shows the types of winning / winning determination tables according to the gaming state. In each winning determination table, the winning probability of each winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is set. Thus, for example, in RT state 1, the probability of falling replay winning, promotion replay winning and entry replay winning is higher than in normal state, or in RT state 2, the probability of winning normal replay winning is higher than in normal state. It becomes possible to raise. In addition, during the special game state, it is possible to increase the winning probability of a specific small role winning than in the normal state. FIG. 17 (b) shows the order of the degree of expectation (probability) of winning in duplicate (simultaneously) with the bonus winning (special winning) in each rare small role. The degree of expectation is the lowest for the triple D (weak watermelon) and the highest for the triple C (middle cherry).

[Freeze effect setting processing]
FIG. 18 shows a freeze effect setting process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this freeze effect setting process, it is first determined whether or not the freeze effect is on standby (step S51). In the slot machine of this embodiment, there are an immediate freeze that performs a freeze effect in a game for which execution of the freeze effect is determined, and a standby freeze that performs a freeze effect in a game several games after the game for which the execution of the freeze effect is determined. Yes, when determining the execution of the freeze effect, which of the freeze effects is determined. Freezing effect standby is a state in which standby freezing is being executed.

  If it is not waiting for the freezing effect (step S51; N), the game state and the winning winning flag are acquired (step S52), and the freezing effect is executed according to the probability defined in the freezing execution determination table (see FIG. 18). A freeze effect execution lottery process (step S53) for performing the lottery is performed. Then, as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the execution of the standby freeze is determined (step S54).

  If execution of the standby freeze is determined (step S54; Y), the number of games (eg, 1, 2 or 3) until the freeze effect is generated is set in the freeze effect standby counter (step S60), and the freeze effect setting process is performed. finish. If execution of standby freeze is not determined (step S54; N), it is determined whether execution of immediate freeze is determined as a result of lottery (step S55).

  If execution of immediate freeze is not determined (step S55; N), the freeze effect setting process ends. In this case, the freeze effect is not executed. If execution of immediate freeze is determined (step S55; Y), a freeze timer corresponding to the determined freeze type is set (step S56), and a freeze effect command corresponding to the determined freeze type is set. Is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S57), and the freeze effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the freeze effect is on standby (step S51; Y), the freeze effect standby counter is updated by -1 (step S58), and it is determined whether the value of the standby counter is 0 (step S59). When the value of the standby counter is not 0 (step S59; N), that is, when the freeze effect of the standby freeze is not executed in the current game, the freeze effect setting process is terminated. Further, when the value of the standby counter is 0 (step S59; Y), that is, when the freeze effect of the standby freeze is executed in the current game, the processes of steps S56 and S57 are performed, and the freeze effect setting process is terminated. To do. As a result, when the stand-by freeze is being executed, the execution lottery for a new freeze effect is regulated. That is, the game control device 50 constitutes a freeze state generating means capable of generating a freeze state that invalidates (regulates) a predetermined operation (stop operation) for a predetermined period based on the result of the internal lottery. .

  FIG. 19 shows the contents of the freeze execution determination table. In this freeze execution determination table, types and generation conditions of freeze effects that can be selected according to the gaming state are set. The types of immediate freeze include 5 seconds freeze effect with 5 seconds freeze time, 10 seconds freeze effect with freeze time 10 seconds, 15 seconds freeze effect with freeze time 15 seconds, freeze time There is a 60-second freeze effect of 60 seconds. The types of standby freezes include the execution of the freeze effect after 2 or 3 games after the decision to execute the freeze effect, the 60 second freeze effect after the 2nd game, the 60 second freeze effect after the 3rd game, and the execution of the freeze effect. There is a post-game operation-mediated freeze effect in which an operation-mediated freeze (so-called 0G ream) is performed after a single game. The post-game post-operation freeze effect can be generated only in the BB1 state, but may be generated in other special game states (PB state, BB2 state, and RB state).

  In the 5-second freeze effect with a freeze time of 5 seconds, the reel effect operation in which the left reel 6a is rotated at a low speed or reversely while the other reels 6b and 6 are stopped while the stop operation is invalidated at the start of the game. After 5 seconds from the start of the game, the reel effect operation is terminated, and all reels 6 are rotated at a normal fluctuation speed to enable a stop operation. Also, in the 10-second freeze production with a freeze time of 10 seconds, the reel production operation is performed in the same way as the 5-second freeze production from the start of the game, and the freeze state continues after 5 seconds from the start of the game. Later, a reel effect operation is performed to rotate the middle reel 6b at low speed or reverse rotation. Then, after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the reel effect operation is terminated, and all reels 6 are rotated at a normal fluctuation speed, thereby enabling a stop operation.

  In the 15-second freeze effect with a freeze time of 15 seconds, the reel effect operation is the same as the 10-second freeze effect from the start of the game, and the freeze state continues after 10 seconds from the start of the game. Later, a reel effect operation is performed to rotate the right reel 6c at low speed or reverse rotation, and the movable effect device 8 is operated. Then, after 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the reel effect operation is terminated, and all the reels 6 are rotated at a normal fluctuation speed to enable a stop operation.

  In the 60 second freeze effect with a freeze time of 60 seconds, the reel effect operation similar to the 15 second freeze effect is performed from the start of the game, and the freeze state is continued even after 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game. Then, after 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the reel effect operation is terminated, and all reels 6 are rotated at a normal fluctuation speed, thereby enabling a stop operation.

  The 60 second freeze effect, the 2 second 60 second freeze effect, and the 3 game 60 second freeze effect are selected only when a special prize is won. In the following description, the 60-second freeze effect, the second-game 60-second freeze effect, and the 3-game 60-second freeze effect may be referred to as long freezes. In the case of the 60 second freeze effect after the second game and the 60 second freeze effect after the third game, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled if a special prize is established in the game before the freeze effect is started.

[Reel rotation start processing]
FIG. 20 shows a reel rotation start process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation start setting process, first, an inter-game wait timer value is acquired (step S61), and it is determined whether the inter-game wait timer value has become 0, that is, the time is up (step S62). The inter-game wait timer is a timer for managing a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) until the next game can be started after the start of the game, and a value corresponding to the predetermined time is set at the start of the game. In the timer update process (step S28), -1 is updated.

  Subsequent processing is waited until the inter-game wait timer value becomes 0, and when the timer value becomes 0 (step S62; Y), that is, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the previous game, It is determined whether there is a freeze execution setting which is information indicating that the freeze effect is executed in the current game (step S63). If there is no freeze execution setting (step S63; N), the reel rotation step number is set to infinity (reel rotation start is set) (step S67). If there is a freeze execution setting (step S63; Y), it is determined whether or not an operation-mediated freeze is present (step S64).

  If the operation-freezing is not performed (step S64; N), after the freeze time has elapsed in the normal freezing process (step S65), the number of reel rotation steps is set to infinity (reel rotation start is set) (step S67). ). The normal freeze process (step S65) stays until the freeze time elapses, starts the low speed rotation of the left reel 6a 1 second after the start of the freeze effect, and rotates the middle reel 6b at a low speed 6 seconds after the start of the freeze effect. And the process of starting the low-speed rotation of the right reel 6c is performed 11 seconds after the start of the freeze effect. That is, the game control device 50 serves as effect variation display means that can cause the variation display unit (reel 6) to perform a predetermined effect variation display (reel effect operation) while the freeze state is occurring.

  In the case of an operation-mediated freeze (step S64; Y), after the freeze time has elapsed in the operation-mediated freeze process (step S66), the reel rotation step number is set to infinite (reel rotation start is set). (Step S67). Thereafter, when all the reels are rotated at a constant speed (step S68; Y), a stop valid command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S69), and the reel rotation start process is terminated. Note that instead of determining whether all reels have rotated at a constant speed (step S68), it may be monitored whether a necessary time has elapsed until the reels have rotated at a constant speed.

[Operation-mediated freeze treatment]
FIG. 21 shows an operation-mediated freeze process in the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. In this operation-mediated freeze process, first, a reel effect operation process (step S71) is performed to effect the reel 6 in a predetermined rotation mode (low-speed rotation or reverse rotation) in the operation-mediated freeze. That is, the game control device 50 serves as an effect variation display means that allows the variation display unit to perform a predetermined effect variation display (reel effect operation) while the freeze state is occurring. And it is determined whether the intervention possible period which can accept operation of a player has started (step S72). The effect operation of the reel 6 can be continued up to eight times with one operation of 5 seconds as one set, and the intervening period is set for 4 seconds in the effect operation of the reel 6 of one set. During this intervening period, it is possible to operate the operation units that are input to the game control device 50 such as the start lever 21 and the max bet button 17, and the reel 6 is operated by the operation, and the result of the extra replay winning is obtained. Derived effects are performed.

  If it is not this intervening period (step S72; N), the process returns to the reel effect operation process (step S71). If it is the intervening period (step S72; Y), an operation prompting command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S73). The effect control device 70 performs an effect such as performing a display prompting the operation on the image display device 3 based on the reception of the operation prompting command.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the intervening period has ended (step S74), and if the intervening period has not ended (step S74; N), input to the game control device 50 such as the start lever 21 and the max bet button 17 is performed. It is determined whether there is an operation input based on the operation of the operation unit to be performed (step S75). When there is no operation input (step S75; N), the process returns to the determination (step S74) as to whether the intervening period has ended. Further, when there is an operation input (step S75; Y) or when the intervening period ends (step S74; Y), the continuation counter is updated by +1 (step S76), and the continuation counter is the upper limit value (8 in this case). (Step S77).

  When the continuation counter is not the upper limit value (step S77; N), a continuous lottery process (step S78) for lottery of whether to continue the reel effect operation is performed, and it is determined whether the lottery result is continuation (step S79). If the lottery result is continuation (step S79; Y), a continuation command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S80), and the process returns to the reel effect operation process (step S81). The production control device 70 performs processing for stocking one AT right every time a continuation command is received. If the lottery result is not continuation (step S79; N) or the continuation counter is the upper limit value (step S77; Y), an end command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S81), and the reel effect operation is stopped. Processing is performed (step S82).

  Thereafter, an end waiting timer for measuring the remaining time of the freeze period is set (step S83), and it is determined whether the value of the end waiting timer has become 0 (step S84). A value corresponding to the remaining time of the freeze period is set in the end standby timer, and the value is updated by −1 in the timer update process (step S28). Subsequent processing is waited until the value of the end standby timer becomes 0, and when the timer value becomes 0 (step S84; Y), that is, when the freeze period is ended, the freeze end command is effect-controlled. The information is transmitted to the device 70 (step S85), and the operation intervention freeze process is terminated.

[Reel rotation stop processing]
FIG. 22 shows a reel rotation stop process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation stop process, it is first determined whether or not a stop button (reel stop button 24) has been operated (step S91). The process of step S91 is repeated until the stop button is operated. When the stop button is operated (step S91; Y), the reel stop information which is information indicating the already stopped reel 6 and its stop position is displayed. Based on this, it is checked whether or not the stop button operation is being performed on the rotating reel (step S92), and it is determined whether or not the reel stop button 24 corresponding to the rotating reel 6 has been operated (step S93).

  If the button operation is not valid (step S93; N), the process returns to step S91. If the button operation is valid (step S93; Y), the reel stop information and the stop control table corresponding to the stop button are set (step S94), and the number of steps is acquired based on the establishment flag and the reel position information. (Step S95). Then, the acquired remaining number of steps is set as reel update information (step S96). Thereby, the stop position of the reel 6 is set, and the drawing of the symbol or kicking is set. That is, the stop control of the plurality of variable display units (reels 6) is performed so that the symbol combination mode according to the result of the internal lottery can be derived based on the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation units (reel stop button 24). It becomes.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the reel that has performed the stop operation has stopped (step S97). If the reel has stopped (step S97; Y), reel stop information corresponding to the stop reel is set (step S98), and the reel stop information is set. A reel stop command corresponding to is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S99). That is, the game control device 50 serves as stop control means that can individually stop and display the plurality of reels 6 based on a stop operation during the game.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the normal state (step S100). If the gaming state is in the normal state (step S100; Y), whether the bonus is being won or carried over, that is, a special prize in this game. It is determined whether or not the winning flag of the special winning prize is carried over (step S101). When the gaming state is not in the normal state (step S100; N) or when the bonus is being won / carryed over (step S101; Y), it is determined whether all reels that have been stopped are already stopped (step S108). ).

If the bonus winning / carryover is not in progress (step S101; N), it is determined whether there is an irregular stop flag (step S102). And when there exists an irregular stop flag (step S102; Y), it transfers to step S105. When there is no irregular stop flag (step S102; N), it is determined whether the irregular stop operation has been performed (step S103). The irregular stop operation here is an operation that may cause a penalty state (a state in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed) in which the player is disadvantageous with respect to the occurrence of the AT state (including the ART state). The first stop operation, which is the first effective stop operation in the game, is an operation that is not for the left reel 6a.

  As will be described later, the penalty state is set by the effect control device 70. The penalty state is set when there is an irregular stopping operation and a penalty winning combination that is a winning combination that can be established by performing the irregular stopping operation (the first stop is a pushing order bell winning other than the left reel 6a, This is a case where a replay prize (a pressing order is determined) is established. That is, the production control device 70 serves as a penalty state generating means that can generate a penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player over a plurality of games based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation.

  If it is not an irregular stop operation (step S103; N), it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). If it is an irregular stop operation (step S103; Y), the irregular operation flag is set and the continuous irregular operation counter that counts the number of consecutive games in which the irregular stop operation is performed is updated by +1 (step S104). Then, an operation invalid timer corresponding to the continuous irregular operation counter value is set (step S105).

  FIG. 23 shows the continuous irregular operation counter value, the invalid time during which the stop operation is invalid, and the corresponding operation invalid command. Until the continuous irregular operation counter value becomes 4, the invalid time increases as the value increases, and when it is 4 or more, it is 60 seconds. That is, the invalid time increases as the number of consecutive games in which the irregular stop operation is performed increases. As a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness to continuously perform the irregular stop operation over a plurality of games, and it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally pushing the irregularity.

  Returning to FIG. 22, after setting the operation invalid timer corresponding to the continuous irregular operation counter value (step S105), the corresponding operation invalid command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S106), and the value of the operation invalid timer is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S107). On the basis of the reception of the operation invalid command, the effect control device 70 performs a notification that an irregular stop operation has been performed and a notification that a penalty freeze state in which the stop operation is invalid for a predetermined period is entered. In other words, based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation, the effect control device 70 can perform predetermined notification (notification by voice, light emission, display, etc.) that can recognize that the irregular stop operation has been performed. Make.

  A value corresponding to the time for invalidating the stop operation is set in the operation invalid timer, the value is updated by −1 in the timer update process (step S28), and the value of the operation invalid timer is 0. Until then, the penalties freeze state where the next stop operation is invalidated. In this way, when the freeze state occurs based on the occurrence of an irregular stop operation (anomalous pressing), it may take extra time to end the game or attract the attention of surrounding players, and intentionally the irregular The act of pushing can be suppressed. In addition, since it can be made to feel as if it was a lottery result advantageous to a player because a freeze state generate | occur | produces, there also exists an effect of encouraging continuation of a game. In this case, the player who has generated the penalty state can digest the penalty state.

  In other words, the game control device 50 serves as an irregular stop operation determination means for determining occurrence of an irregular stop operation in which the stop operation unit (reel stop button 24) is operated in a predetermined irregular operation order. Further, the game control device 50 constitutes a freeze state generating means capable of generating a freeze state that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation.

  When the value of the operation invalid timer becomes 0 (step S107; Y), it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). If the reels are not completely stopped (step S108; N), the process returns to step S91. If all reels have been stopped (step S108; Y), the irregular operation flag is cleared (step S109), and it is determined whether there has been an irregular stop operation in the current game (step S110). If the reels are all stopped (step S108; Y), a reel all stop command may be transmitted to the effect control device 70.

  If there is an irregular stop operation in the current game (step S110; Y), the reel rotation stop process is terminated. If there is no irregular stop operation in the current game (step S110; N), the continuous irregular operation counter is cleared (step S111), and the reel rotation stop processing is terminated.

  The irregular operation flag is set when an irregular stop operation is performed in one game, and is cleared when the game ends. As a result, the player can be alerted as soon as the irregular stop operation is performed, and the irregular stop operation can be suppressed. In addition, when the irregular stop operation is the first or second stop operation, a penalty freeze in which a predetermined invalid time is set after the stop operation is executed, and also after a later stop operation in the game. Penalty freeze with a predetermined invalid time is executed. Therefore, since the freeze state occurs several times in one game, the player can be fed up, and the irregular stop operation can be effectively suppressed.

  Also, the penalty state is set when there is an irregular stop operation and a penalty winning combination which is established by performing the irregular stop operation (the first stop is a push order bell other than the left reel 6a). In this case, a penalty freeze state is set based only on an irregular stop operation regardless of the occurrence of a penalty state. In this way, it is possible to always call attention to the player who has performed the irregular stop operation regardless of the penalty state.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display units (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, a plurality of stop operation units (reel stop buttons 24) provided corresponding to the respective variation display units, and a plurality of variations A lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with a variable display on the display unit, and depending on the result of the internal lottery based on the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation units In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of variation display units so that an aspect can be derived, an irregular stop operation determination unit that determines occurrence of an irregular stop operation in which the stop operation unit is operated in a predetermined irregular operation order ( The game control device 50) and penalty state generating means (effect control device) capable of generating a penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player over a plurality of games based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation. 70) and freeze state generating means (game control device 50) capable of generating a freeze state that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation. Become.

  The freeze state generating means (game control device 50) stops the game when the stop operation for stopping the change display of the change display unit (reel 6) performed first in the game corresponds to the irregular stop operation. The freeze state is generated by invalidating the operation of the operation unit (reel stop button 24) for a predetermined period.

  In addition, the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) generates a freeze state every time the second and subsequent stop operations are performed in the game.

  Further, the penalty state generating means (production control device 70) is configured to generate a penalty state based on the result of the game in which the irregular stop operation has occurred, and the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) is the penalty state generating means. Therefore, the freeze state is generated regardless of whether or not the penalty state is generated.

  Here, generating the penalty state based on the result of the game in which the irregular stop operation has occurred means that the penalty state is in a case where the player has an advantage, for example, when a combination can be established by the irregular stop operation. It is to do.

  Further, the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) increases the period of the freeze state as the number of consecutive games in which the irregular stop operation has occurred increases.

  Note that the penalty freeze state may be set only when a penalty state occurs. That is, the penalty freeze state may be generated only when the penalty state actually occurs, instead of unconditionally generating the penalty freeze state by the irregular stop operation.

  In addition, the penalty freeze state may be set for the first time when an irregular stop operation is performed in a plurality of consecutive (two or more arbitrarily settable times) games. This will only alert the player who appears to have performed an irregular stop operation by notification, and cause a freeze state for a player who may have intentionally performed the irregular stop operation. Is possible.

  In other words, on the basis of the occurrence of the irregular stop operation, there is provided a notification means (production control device 70) capable of performing a predetermined notification capable of recognizing that the irregular stop operation has been performed, and a freeze state generation means (game control) The device 50) may generate a freeze state based on occurrence of an irregular stop operation in a plurality of consecutive games. Here, the predetermined notification is notification performed by voice, light emission, display, or the like. Further, the term “multiple times” refers to the number of times that can be arbitrarily set at least twice.

  Further, the number of occurrences of the penalty state may be increased according to the number of occurrences of the irregular stop operation or the continuous number of games in which the irregular stop operation has occurred. Then, the invalid time in the penalty freeze state may be increased as the number of games in which the penalty state occurs is increased. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the willingness to perform the anomaly stop operation again, and it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally pushing the anomaly.

  That is, the penalty state generating means (production control device 70) is configured to increase the number of occurrences of the penalty state every time an irregular stop operation occurs, and the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) performs the irregular stop operation. You may make it lengthen the period of a freeze state, so that the continuous frequency | count of the produced | generated game increases.

  In addition, when an irregular stop operation occurs and a winning is established, a process for slowing the payout speed may be performed. This process may be performed instead of the occurrence of the penalty freeze state, or may be performed in combination with the penalty freeze. That is, based on the occurrence of an irregular stop operation, a delay means (game control device 50) may be provided that slows the payout speed of the game medium for the established winning than the normal payout speed.

[Winning determination process]
FIG. 24 shows a winning determination process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this winning determination process, first, reel stop information which is information indicating the stopped reel 6 and its stop position is acquired (step S121), and winning establishment determination information according to the gaming state is set (step S122). . Next, the number of effective lines is set (step S123), the effective line to be determined is set (step S124), and it is determined whether there is a winning symbol (step S125).

  If there is no winning symbol (step S125; N), the process proceeds to step S129. If there is a winning symbol (step S125; Y), it is determined whether the winning symbol matches the winning winning flag (step S126). If they do not match (step S126; N), an unrecoverable error process (step S133) is performed, and the game control process ends. If they match (step S126; Y), it is determined whether or not a replay winning is achieved (step S127).

  When the replay winning is established (step S127; Y), the replay flag is set (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. If the replay winning is not established (step S127; N), the number of payouts corresponding to the winning symbol is added to the payout counter (step S128), and the winning determination result information is stored (step S129). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the effective lines have been determined (step S130). If not determined (step S130; N), the process returns to step S124 to determine an undecided effective line. If all the active lines have been determined (step S130; Y), it is determined whether the set payout number exceeds the maximum payout number (for example, 15) in one game (step S131).

  When the maximum number of payouts is not exceeded (step S131; N), the process proceeds to step S135. If the maximum payout number is exceeded (step S131; Y), the maximum payout number is set in the payout counter (step S132). Then, a game result command corresponding to the winning determination result information is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S135), and the winning determination process is terminated.

[Game state update processing]
FIG. 25 shows a game state update process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this game state update process, first, it is determined whether any bonus is in progress (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state, or RB state) (step S141).

  If it is in any bonus state (step S141; Y), a bonus end determination process (step S152) is performed to determine whether the bonus state is to be ended (step S153). In the bonus end determination process, an end determination is made according to the type of bonus state. For example, in the PB state, it is determined that the bonus is ended when more than 20 sheets are paid out. And when not complete | finishing a bonus state (step S153; N), it transfers to step S161. When the bonus state is to be ended (step S153; Y), the normal state is set (step S154), and the process proceeds to step S161.

  On the other hand, if any bonus is not in effect (step S141; N), winning determination result information is acquired (step S142), and it is determined whether there is a bonus winning (special winning) (whether established) (step S143). . If there is a bonus winning (step S143; Y), a special gaming state (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state, RB state) corresponding to the established special winning is set (step S155), and a bonus winning flag is set. And the information regarding the standby freeze is cleared (step S156), and the process proceeds to step S161. In other words, the game control device 50 wins a special role (special prize) in the internal lottery, and generates a special state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the outcome corresponding to the special role is derived. It is a special condition generation means that can.

  If there is no bonus winning (step S143; N), it is determined whether a bonus is being won (including carryover) (step S144). If a bonus is being won (step S144; Y), the normal state is set. After setting (step S154), the process proceeds to step S161. If the bonus is not being won (step S144; N), it is determined whether the normal state is in effect (step S145).

  If it is not in the normal state (step S145; N), that is, if it is in the RT state 1 or the RT state 2, the process proceeds to step S147. If it is in the normal state (step S145; Y), it is determined whether the promotion condition is satisfied (step S146). The establishment of the promotion condition here means that a winning combination is established by deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to internal promotion for the promotion replay (special replay 1). That is, the promotion replay winning makes a predetermined start outcome that generates a specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state. When this promotion condition is satisfied (step S146; Y), RT state 1 is set (step S157), and the process proceeds to step S161. If the promotion condition is not satisfied (step S146; N), it is determined whether the RT state 1 is being performed (step S147).

  If not in the RT state 1 (step S147; N), the process proceeds to step S150. If it is in the RT state 1 (step S147; Y), it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S148). Satisfaction of the fall condition here means violation (when a fall fall (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined push order is missed (push order bell spill) ). In other words, the outcome of the fall replay prize, the outcome of the SIN prize, and the outcome of the push order bell spilling make a predetermined end outcome that ends the specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state.

  When this fall condition is satisfied (step S148; Y), the normal state is set (step S158), and the process proceeds to step S161. If the falling condition is not satisfied (step S148; N), it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S149). The establishment of the transition condition here means that a winning combination is established by deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning for the rush replay (special replay 2).

  When this transition condition is satisfied (step S149; Y), the RT state 2 is set (step S159), and the process proceeds to step S161. When the transition condition is not satisfied (step S149; N), it is determined whether the RT state 2 is being performed (step S150). And when it is not in RT state 2 (step S150; N), it transfers to step S161. If it is in the RT state 2 (step S150; Y), it is determined whether the falling condition is satisfied (step S151).

  Satisfaction of the fall condition here means violation (when a fall fall (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined push order is missed (push order bell spill) ). In other words, the outcome of the fall replay prize, the outcome of the SIN prize, and the outcome of the push order bell spilling make a predetermined end outcome that ends the specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state. When this fall condition is satisfied (step S151; Y), the normal state is set (step S160), and the process proceeds to step S161. If the falling condition is not satisfied (step S151; N), the winning flag other than the bonus is cleared (step S161).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has changed before and after the above process (step S162). If there is no change (step S162; N), the gaming state update process is terminated. If there is a change (step S162; Y), a gaming state command corresponding to the changed gaming state is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S163), and the gaming state update process is terminated.

  With the above processing, the gaming state transition as shown in FIG. 11 is realized. In other words, the game control device 50 generates a specific state (RT state) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state until the predetermined end outcome is derived after the predetermined start outcome is derived. It is possible to generate a specific state. In addition, you may make it transfer to RT state 1 or 2 on the condition that internal winning is carried out to special prize. Further, after the special game state is ended, the state may be shifted to the RT state 1 or 2.

  Next, processing by the effect control device 70 will be described. The processing by the effect control device 70 includes an effect control process (see FIG. 26) for comprehensively controlling the effect, and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, approximately every 2 msec).

[Production control processing]
FIG. 26 shows the effect control process. This effect control process is performed by reading the control program of the effect control process stored in the ROM 70b by the CPU 70a when the effect control device 70 is turned on when the slot machine 1 is turned on. Is started.

  In this effect control process, first, initialization of a register in the CPU 70a of the effect control device 70, initialization of game data stored in the RAM 70c, and power-on based on a power-on / recovery command from the game control device 50 are performed. A power-on process for performing a recovery notification process or the like is executed (step S201). Next, history information browsing processing for displaying history information of game results such as a special winning occurrence history on the image display device 3 based on a browsing operation such as the effect button 10, the reel stop button 24, or other dedicated button operations. (Step S202) is performed.

Thereafter, a customer waiting control process (step S203) is performed for making settings related to a customer waiting notification (display of a customer waiting demo screen, demonstration light emission, etc.) based on the fact that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period. A betting number notifying process (step S204) for notifying the betting number (sound, display, light emission) is performed based on the transmitted betting number command. Then, a settlement notification control process (step S205) for notifying that the settlement has been performed based on the settlement command (sound, display, light emission) is performed, and it is determined whether the game is started (step S206). The start of the game is determined by receiving a lottery result command.

  If the game has not started (step S206; N), the process returns to the history information browsing process (step S202). When the game is started (step S206; Y), a freeze effect process (step S207) is executed to execute an effect corresponding to the freeze effect when the freeze effect is performed. Next, a game effect determination process for performing a one-time effect only for the game or a continuous notice for a plurality of games, depending on the winning of a special prize or a small role prize, the presence or absence of AT rights, and the game mode. (Step S208) is performed.

  Thereafter, a game progress control process (step S209) is performed to advance the game according to the game mode, and the AT right acquisition lottery is performed based on the penalty state, the AT right acquisition probability state (AT lottery mode), and the winning combination. The stock acquisition determination process to be performed (step S210) is performed. Then, based on the current AT lottery mode (low accuracy, high accuracy or super high accuracy) and the winning combination, the stock lottery mode transition processing (step S211) for performing the lottery transition to the AT lottery mode is performed, and the specialized mode being executed Based on the type of (specialized zone 1 or 2), the number-of-games addition process (step S212) in which the number of games that can continue the AT state is added and lottery is performed is performed.

  Next, a continuous warning setting process (step S213) for setting a continuous warning to be performed continuously over a plurality of games is performed, and an AT warning setting process for setting a warning effect suggesting that an AT (ART) state occurs ( Step S214) is performed. Further, when the game result includes payout, payout notification setting processing (step S215) for notifying (sound, display, light emission) of payout is performed based on the payout command transmitted for each payout, and the game state command and AT An effect mode update process (step S216) for changing the effect mode based on the lottery mode is performed. Then, a history information storage process (step S217) for storing the game result as history information is performed, and the process returns to the history information browsing process (step S202).

  In addition, when a power failure occurs, a power-off process is performed to perform processing when the power failure occurs. As a process when a power failure occurs, for example, backup of information in the RAM 70c, storage of a stack pointer, checksum, and the like are performed, and then RAM access is prohibited to wait for the power to the slot machine 1 to be cut off.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 27 shows timer interrupt processing. In this timer interruption process, first, a register saving process (step S221) for transferring a value held in a predetermined register to the RAM 70c is performed, and an input process (step S222) for processing a signal input to the effect control device 70. To perform a security monitoring process (step S223) for performing a process corresponding to the error that has occurred.

  Next, a display control process for controlling display on the image display device 3 (step S224), an audio control process for controlling sound output from the speaker 4 (step S225), and a backlight emission process for controlling light emission of the backlight 111 (Step S226) is performed. Then, a start lever light emission process (step S227) for controlling the light emitter provided on the start lever 21, and a stop button light emission process for controlling the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c, which are stop buttons. (Step S228), a winning line light emission process (Step S229) for controlling the winning line light emission unit 112 is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame light emission process for controlling the frame light emitting device 7 (step S230), and a random number update process for updating (for example, +1) random numbers such as an effect random number used when determining the content of the game effect (step S231). Then, an output process for outputting a control signal based on information set in various processes is performed (step S232), the interrupt request is cleared (step S233), the register is restored (step S234), and the interrupt is permitted. (Step S235), the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Freeze production process]
FIG. 28 shows a freeze effect process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this freeze effect process, first, it is determined whether a freeze effect command has been received (step S241). If not received (step S241; N), the freeze effect process is terminated. If received (step S241; Y), the execution pattern is determined from the freeze effect pattern corresponding to the command (step S242).

  Each freeze effect has a plurality of execution patterns with different display contents as special display effects, and two types of A and B are prepared for the 5, 10 and 15 second freeze effects, and A and B are provided for the 60 second freeze effect. Four types of B, C, and D are prepared. In the case of 5, 10 and 15-second freeze production, the selection ratio varies depending on the result of the internal winning, and when the special winning is not won, the selection ratio of the A pattern is high, and the special winning is won. If so, the selection ratio of the B pattern is high. In other words, the B pattern has a higher expectation.

  Thereafter, the execution of the determined freeze effect pattern is set (step S243), and it is determined whether the type of the freeze effect is an operation-mediated freeze (step S244). If it is not an operation-mediated freeze effect (step S244; N), a normal freeze effect process (step S245) for performing an effect related to a normal freeze effect according to the determined freeze effect pattern is performed, and the freeze effect process is terminated. If it is an operation-mediated freeze effect (step S244; Y), an operation-mediated freeze effect process (step S246) for performing an effect related to the operation-mediated freeze effect is performed, and the freeze effect process is terminated. In other words, the effect control device 70 can perform a predetermined display effect during the execution of the game, and serves as a display effect means capable of performing a special display effect during the occurrence of the freeze state.

[Operation-mediated freeze production processing]
FIG. 29 shows an operation-mediated freeze effect process in the freeze effect process shown in FIG. In this operation-mediated freeze effect process, first, an operation prompt transmitted when an operation-intervening period during which the operation unit such as the start lever 21 and the max bet button 17 can be operated can be operated. It is determined whether a command has been received (step S251). When the operation prompting command has not been received (step S251; N), the process proceeds to step S253. When an operation prompt command is received (step S251; Y), an operation prompt notification for performing an effect such as a display for prompting the operation on the image display device 3 (for example, “tap a lever!”) Is executed. (Step S252), it is determined whether or not the continuation command transmitted when winning the lottery for the reel effect operation is received (Step S253).

  When the continuation command has not been received (step S253; N), the process proceeds to step S255. Further, when the continuation command is received (step S253; Y), a stock acquisition effect for notifying that the AT right has been acquired is executed (step S254), and the continuous lottery of the reel effect operation is not won. It is determined whether an end command transmitted when the number of continuations has reached the upper limit has been received (step S255).

  If the end command has not been received (step S255; N), the process returns to the determination (step S251) as to whether the operation prompting command has been received. If an end command has been received (step S255; Y), is the end effect being an effect indicating that the reel effect operation in the operation-mediated freeze effect has been completed (step S256), and has the freeze end command been received? Is determined (step S257). When the freeze end command is received (step S257; Y), the operation-mediated freeze effect process ends.

  Note that the number of times the end command is received and the number of continuation commands are stored. In the BB1 stock process (see FIG. 52) performed later in the game, the number of games is added to the AT number (AT right 2) stock number. The number of times of reception +1 is added.

[Game production decision processing]
FIG. 30 shows a game effect determination process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this game effect determination process, first, it is determined whether a bonus is in effect (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state or RB state) (step S261). If the bonus is being performed (step S261; Y), a bonus effect determination process (step S272) for determining an effect corresponding to the bonus is performed, and the game effect determination process is terminated. If it is not during the bonus (step S261; N), it is determined whether there is a long freeze (60-second freeze effect) (step S262).

  If there is a long freeze (step S262; Y), the execution of the bonus confirmed effect after the end of the freeze effect is set (step S273), and the game effect determining process is terminated. If there is no long freeze (step S262; N), the bonus winning winning flag is being carried over, that is, the game after the game that has been internally won for the special winning and the special winning is not established. It is determined whether or not there is (step S263).

  If the bonus winning winning flag is being carried over (step S263; Y), it is determined whether there is a setting of a continuous winning notice that is a continuous notice that can be executed when a special winning is won (step S274). When there is a setting for winning continuous notice (step S274: Y), execution of winning continuous notice is set (step S275), and the game effect determining process is terminated. Further, when the winning continuous notice is not set, that is, when the winning continuous notice is finished (step S274; N), execution of the bonus finalization effect is set (step S276), and the result of the current internal lottery is determined. It is determined whether or not the game has been won (step S277).

  If the result of the current internal lottery is a lost win (step S277; Y), the bonus type notification effect that informs the type of the winning winning flag carried over (the type of special winning that can be established) is used as the bonus finalizing effect. A plus process is performed (step S278), and the game effect determination process is terminated. If the winning combination is not lost (step S277; N), a process (step S279) of adding the winning small role notification effect for notifying the type of the small winning combination won this time to the bonus confirmed effect is performed (step S279), and the game effect determining process is performed. finish. In the winning small role notification effect, the type of the small role may not be notified, and only the fact that the small role has been won may be notified.

  On the other hand, when the bonus winning winning flag is not carried over (step S263; N), it can be executed when the special winning is not won, and the setting of the consecutive lost notice that is similar to the winning consecutive notice is set. It is determined whether or not there is (step S264). If there is a setting for continuous loss advance notice (step S264; Y), execution of continuous lost notice is set (step S265), and the process proceeds to step S270. Also, if there is no setting for continuous notice of loss (step S264; N), it is determined whether or not the pre-announcement effect indicating that the ART state is occurring is being executed (step S266). In this process (step S266), if the winning continuous effect that can be executed when the AT right is acquired in the ART state, it is determined that the precursor effect is being executed.

  When the present sign effect is being executed (step S266; Y), the execution of the present sign effect is set (step S267), and the process proceeds to step S270. Further, when the present sign effect is not being executed (step S266; N), it can be executed when the ART state does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a gasse sign effect similar to the present sign effect (step S268). ). In this process (step S268), it is determined that the gasse sign effect is being executed when the continuous loss effect that can be executed when the AT right cannot be acquired in the ART state is being executed.

  If the prelude effect is not being executed (step S268; N), the process proceeds to step S270. In addition, when the gasse warning effect is being executed (step S268; Y), the execution of the gasse warning effect is set (step S269), and the process proceeds to step S270. In step S270, an effect mode corresponding to the lottery result is determined from the winning effect determination table (see FIG. 31) (step S270), execution of the winning effect according to the determined effect mode is set (step S271), and the game effect is set. The decision process is terminated.

  FIG. 31 shows the contents of the winning effect determination table. The winning effect determination table determines the effect to be executed based on the result of the internal lottery and the game state. In addition, in the case of a losing, in addition to a net losing that has not been won for any winning combination, the first stop is a small winning combination other than the left reel 6a in a state where the derivation of the established small winning combination is not assisted (not AT or ART). Including the case of winning.

Here, in the game state (game mode), the normal / precursor state is a state in which the game state in the effect control device 70 is the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52. The continuous effect is a general term for continuous notice, continuous effect, and sign effect. The sign production includes the present sign production and the gasse sign production. In addition, as described later, the sign production is to perform the continuous production after performing the sign production and the special production, and before the sign production is the stage before performing the continuous production in the sign production, “Indication for continuous production” is a state in which a continuous production is being performed during the production of warning.

The AT standby state is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the assist standby state ST53. During the promotion AT is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the transition assist state ST54. The rushing AT is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the transition assist state ST54. Further, during the extra AT is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the specific assist state ST55. During the relief AT is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the transition assist state ST54. Furthermore, during the transition chance is a state in which the game state in the effect control device 70 is the transition chance effect state ST51. That is, the normal / prediction in the game state corresponds to the normal game state ST10 in FIG. 10, and the others correspond to the specific game state ST30 in FIG.

  Moreover, the loss effect in the winning effect mode when the result is a loss is an effect that suggests and notifies that it is a loss. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and (b), the expected small role in each result suggests that there is a possibility that some small role is won, or that there is a possibility that it is a loss. This is a notification effect.

  For example, in FIG. 32A, “losing” and “bell” are displayed on the image display device 3 to indicate that there is a possibility of being lost or winning a bell winning. doing. In addition, the display of “?” Suggests a possibility other than a lose or a bell prize. In addition, in the small role expectation production, for example, when a bonus or rare small role is elected, the small role expectation production does not include the “?” Display and suggests a small role (a small role that is not missed). It also includes an effect that suggests and notifies the winning of a bonus or a rare small role due to the fact that none of them is established (so-called breaking of the law).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 32 (c) and 32 (d), the rare role expectation effect in each result indicates that there is a possibility that some rare small role has been won, and that a small role other than a rare small role has been won. It is an effect that suggests and notifies that there is a possibility of being lost or a possibility of being lost. For example, in FIG. 32 (c), by displaying “Bell”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon” on the image display device 3, the possibility of winning the Bell prize or the Cherry prize winning or watermelon that is a rare small role This suggests that you may have won the prize.

  In addition, the rare winning combination effect when the result is a rare small combination is an effect that informs that a certain rare small combination is won, as shown in FIGS. 32 (e) and 32 (f). For example, in FIG. 32 (e), the winning of the rare small combination is notified by displaying the corresponding color (purple) of the rare small combination.

  In addition, when the result is an add-on replay, the push order directing effect means that if the push order can be applied and established, the AT right will be acquired or the number of games that can be executed in the AT state will be added to the internal replay. It is an effect to notify. Since the addition replay is not established unless the pressing order is applied, for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (g), an effect display that prompts the user to apply the pressing order is performed. In other words, the pushing order effect produces a predetermined chance effect that is executed in a game in which the right to execute assist information may be stored, and the effect control device 70 executes the predetermined chance effect. The chance production execution means that can be performed.

  This push order effect is prohibited from being executed during the continuous production, such as during the continuous notice or the continuous production during the warning. As a result, continuous production is interrupted, and the expectation for winning the special prize is prevented from being attenuated.

  In addition, the push order effect is prohibited from being executed even during the transition chance. During the transition chance, that is, the transition chance state ST31, the transition is made when the specified number of games is consumed in the ART state ST35 and there is no AT right stock. That is, this is a case where the ART state advantageous to the player is finished and the RT state is reached. If a new AT right can be acquired in this state, it is possible to return to the ART state. However, the possibility of acquiring the AT right is not so high, and most of them fall to the normal gaming state ST10.

  If an effect that excessively expresses the player's expectation, such as a push order effect, is given during this transition chance, the player's discouragement will increase when the player falls into a normal state. Therefore, during the transition chance that is a specific state (RT state) after the notification of the assist information is finished, a predetermined chance effect such as a push order effect is not performed, and the player who has fallen into a normal game I try to reduce my disappointment and loss. This also has the advantage that the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, when it is not during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), it is a case where the original gaming state ST10 or the fall to the normal gaming state ST10 is not close, and discouraged even if the AT right cannot be acquired. The feeling of loss is not so great, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by effectively giving the player's expectation by executing a predetermined chance effect.

  In addition, even if it is during the transition chance, when the AT right acquisition is confirmed, a predetermined confirmed effect is executed. For example, when the single winning combination C (middle stage cherry) is won (when it is not won in duplicate with the BB winning), the acquisition of the AT right is confirmed, and in this case, the acquisition of the AT right is definitely notified. The finalized effect is performed in the game or the subsequent game. In other words, the effect control device 70 serves as a confirmed effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect in a game in which it is determined that the AT right is stored or in a subsequent game. Thereby, even if it is during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the predetermined confirmed effect will be executed. The execution of the freeze effect when winning the middle cherries may be performed only in the case of single winning. In addition, when a rare small role is elected alone (when not overlapping with a BB prize), and when winning an AT right acquisition lottery, a predetermined finalization effect is provided for definite notification of AT right acquisition. May be performed.

  Further, as described later, during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), the sign effect that is executed over a plurality of games to notify that the AT right may be stored, that is, the assist information The predetermined chance effect that is executed in a game after the game that may store the execution right for informing is also not executed. This also reduces the disappointment and loss of the player when falling to normal games. In addition, during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), even if it is a case where a rare small role with the possibility of storing the AT right is won, an effect of suggesting and notifying the winning is not performed. good.

  It should be noted that the predetermined chance effect can be executed basically when the transition chance is not in progress (transition chance state ST31), but even if the game state capable of executing the predetermined chance effect is set in more detail. good. For example, a predetermined chance effect may be executable in the normal state and the ART state, which is neither the AT state, the RT state, nor the ART state, or in the normal state or the ART state. It may be possible to execute the chance production.

  In addition, during the execution of continuous effects such as continuous announcements, continuous effects, and pre-annual continuous effects in the normal and ART states that are neither the AT state, the RT state, nor the ART state, a predetermined chance is given. Execution of the performance may be prohibited, or execution of a predetermined chance effect during execution of continuous performance such as continuous notice in the normal state or ART state, continuous performance, or continuous performance during the warning In these cases, execution of the predetermined chance effect may be prohibited only in the case of continuous notice, and the predetermined chance effect may be executed in the continuous effect or the pre-signed continuous effect.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display units (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with the variation display, When a game corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery is derived as a result of the game stopped based on the variable display stop operation, the slot machine where the winning of the winning combination is established has a predetermined start Specific state generating means (game control device 50) capable of generating a specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state until a predetermined end result is derived from Assist information notifying means (production control device 70) capable of notifying assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined acquisition condition The execution right storage means (production control device 70) capable of storing the execution right for causing the assist information notification means to notify the assist information based on the fact that the execution information is established, and the execution right can be stored. A chance effect execution means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a predetermined chance effect in a game with or after the game, and the assist information notifying means for deriving at least the starting point The assist information and the assist information for avoiding derivation of the end event are notified, and the chance effect executing means is in a specific state after the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the notification of the assist information by the assist information notifying means is ended. This means that the predetermined chance effect is not executed.

  Here, a game in which the execution right may be memorized is, for example, when an internal winning is made for a specific combination, and when the execution right can be acquired with a predetermined probability, the specific winning is internally won It is a game. “Execution rights can be acquired with a predetermined probability” includes a case where acquisition is determined based on a lottery result or a case where the execution right can be acquired by applying a pushing order. In addition, the predetermined chance effect is an effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the execution right for notifying the assist information may be stored. For example, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop operation mode (push order). This is an effect that urges the player to consider the pressing order when the execution right can be acquired.

  The chance effect execution means (effect control device 70) executes a predetermined chance effect in the normal state and / or in the specific state where the assist information notification means (effect control device 70) is being executed. It will be like that.

  Also, a special state generating means (game control) capable of generating a special state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the special role is won in the internal lottery and the outcome corresponding to the special role is derived. Device 50), and a continuous advance notice that can be performed across multiple games based on winning a special role or an overlapping target role that may be won in duplicate in the internal lottery. Notice execution means (effect control device 70), and the chance effect execution means (effect control device 70) is in a normal state and / or is notified of assist information by the assist information notification means (effect control device 70). Even in the specific state, when the continuous notice is being executed, the predetermined chance effect is not executed.

  In addition, the game includes a confirmed effect executing means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect in a game in which execution rights are determined to be stored or a game thereafter, and the confirmed effect executing means includes assist information. Even in the specific state after the notification of the assist information by the notification means (the effect control device 70) ends, the predetermined confirmed effect is executed.

[Game progress control processing]
FIG. 33 shows a game progress control process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this game progress control process, first, it is determined whether a bonus is being won (carryover), that is, whether a special win has been won or a special win flag has been carried over (step S281). If the bonus is being won (carryover) (step S281; Y), a bonus internal intermediate process (step S282) is performed, and the game progress control process is terminated. If the bonus is not won (carryover) (step S281; N), the process selected in the branch process (step S283) in the game mode is performed, and the game progress control process is terminated.

When the game mode is normal / precursor (non-assist state ST50 or precursor game state ST52), normal / precursor processing (step S284) is performed. If the game mode is AT standby (assist standby state ST53), AT standby processing (step S285) is performed. When the game mode is in the promotion AT / rushing in (transition assist state ST54), the promotion / rushing in process (step S286) is performed.

  If the game mode is in the extra AT (specific assist state ST55), the extra AT processing (step S287) is performed. When the game mode is in the repair AT (relief AT state ST32), the repair AT process (step S288) is performed. If the game mode is during the transition chance (transition chance presentation state ST51), the transition chance processing (step S289) is performed.

  Further, when the game mode is in the PB state, a process during PB (step S290) is performed. If the game mode is in the BB1 state, a process during BB1 (step S291) is performed. If the game mode is in the BB2 state, a process during BB2 (step S292) is performed. If the game mode is in the RB state, RB processing (step S293) is performed. In the case of the game mode in these special game states, an effect process corresponding to each special game state is performed. It should be noted that the penalty state (the state in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed) is generated based on the irregular stop operation only when the game mode is the normal / predictive game mode corresponding to the normal game state ST10. It has become.

[Bonus internal processing]
FIG. 34 shows a bonus internal intermediate process in the game progress control process shown in FIG. In this bonus internal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current game is a bonus winning game that is a game that has been won internally for a special prize (step S301). If it is not a bonus winning game (step S301; N), the process proceeds to step S303. If the game is a bonus winning game (step S301; Y), the execution information of the AT sign effect (the main sign effect and the gasse sign effect) is cleared (step S302). Thereby, the execution of the precursor effect is stopped.

  Then, the execution of the game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) using the determined effect pattern is started (step S303), and a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received. Is determined (step S304). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S304; N), the process proceeds to step S307. When the reel stop command is received (step S304; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S305), and the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S306). It is determined whether or not a game result command including information on a winning determination result has been received (step S307).

  If no game result command has been received (step S307; N), the process returns to step S304. If a game result command is received (step S307; Y), it is determined whether a bonus prize (special prize) has been established (step S308). If the bonus winning is not established (step S308; N), the bonus internal processing is terminated. If a bonus winning is established (step S308; Y), the start of a bonus state (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state or RB state) corresponding to the type of bonus won is set (step S309), and the bonus is set. End internal processing.

[Normal / predictive treatment]
FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 show the normal / precursor processing in the game progress control processing shown in FIG. In this normal / precursor processing, first, execution of a determined game effect (continuous notice, book, gasse predictor effect, small role expectation effect, etc.) is started (step S311), and it is determined whether a reel stop command has been received. (Step S312).

  When the reel stop command is received (step S312; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S313), and the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S314). In other words, the effect control device 70 performs a game effect corresponding to the result of the internal lottery and serves as a game effect means capable of advancing the game effect according to a stop operation.

  Then, it is determined whether the current stop operation is an irregular stop operation (step S315). The irregular stop operation here is an operation in which the first stop operation is not the left reel 6a. If the current stop operation is not an irregular stop operation (step S315; N), the process proceeds to step S319. If it is an irregular stop operation (step S315; Y), a penalty flag is set (step S316), and an output of a warning sound is set (step S317). Then, the progress of the effect display is stopped (step S318), and it is determined whether an operation invalidation command including information related to the penalty freeze state is received (step S319). As described above, the penalty freeze state is set when the irregular stop operation occurs, but in this case, the progress of the game effect is stopped. Thereby, the penalty freeze state is made boring, and the suppression effect of the irregular stop operation is enhanced.

  As described above, the game effect means includes a game effect means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a game effect corresponding to the result of the internal lottery and advancing the game effect according to a stop operation. When a freeze state (penalty freeze state) occurs during the game, the progress of the game effect is stopped.

  When the operation invalid command has not been received (step S319; N), the process proceeds to step S326. If an operation invalid command is received (step S319; Y), an invalid timer corresponding to the command is set (step S320), and a remaining invalid time display corresponding to the invalid timer is set (step S321). Thereafter, warning notification (display, light emission) is set (step S322), the remaining invalid time display is updated based on the invalid timer (step S323), and it is determined whether the invalid timer has become 0 (step S324).

  The invalid timer is set to a value corresponding to the time during which the stop operation is invalidated in the game control device 50, and the value is updated by -1 for each timer interrupt process, and the invalid timer value becomes zero. Until then, the penalties freeze state where the next stop operation is invalid. In the penalty freeze state, a notification by displaying a warning display or a remaining invalid time display on the image display device 3 or a notification by causing the frame light emitting device 7 to emit light is performed. Note that the warning display and the light emission mode may be changed each time the warning notification is set. Further, based on the reception of the operation invalidation command, one or both of the main effect (such as an effect suggesting the probability state of the AT lottery) and the notice effect (such as an effect suggesting the small role winning) may be stopped.

  If the invalid timer becomes 0 (step S324; Y), the remaining invalid time display and warning notification are cleared (step S325), and it is determined whether a game result command has been received (step S326). If no game result command has been received (step S326; N), the process returns to step S312. If a game result command is received (step S326; Y), it is determined whether there is a penalty flag (step S327).

  If there is a penalty flag (step S327; Y), it is determined whether a penalty target winning combination has been established (step S328). The penalty target winning combination is a winning combination that can be established by performing an irregular stopping operation. For example, the first stop is a pushing order bell winning other than the left reel 6a or a replay winning in which the pushing order is determined. When this penalty target winning combination has not been established (step S328; N), the process proceeds to step S332. If a penalty target winning combination is established (step S328; Y), a penalty state is set (step S329), and the number of penalty games corresponding to the winning combination is set (step S330).

  That is, a penalty state is set in which an AT right acquisition lottery is not performed for a predetermined game when an irregular stopping operation is performed and a player becomes advantageous, such as when a winning is achieved. Further, the number of penalty games, which is the number of games for which a penalty state is set, is set according to the winning combination, for example, set according to the degree of advantage of the player by the irregular stop operation, The number of penalty games is larger when the push order bell is established than when the replay winning with the push order is established.

Thereafter, the various consecutive winning / winning counters are cleared (step S331), the penalty flag is cleared (step S332), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S337). The continuous winning counter counts the number of consecutive winnings of the rare small role, and the AT right is given according to the number of consecutive winnings. In addition, the consecutive winning counter counts the number of consecutive bell winnings, and the AT right is given according to the number of consecutive winnings. Clearing these counters also imposes a penalty of delaying the granting of benefits to players.

  In other words, the production control device 70 serves as an irregular stop operation determination unit that determines the occurrence of an irregular stop operation in which the stop operation unit (reel stop button 24) is operated in a predetermined irregular operation order. Further, the effect control device 70 serves as a penalty state generating means capable of generating a penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player over a plurality of games based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation. The penalty state generating means is configured to generate a penalty state based on the result of the game in which the irregular stop operation has occurred.

  On the other hand, when there is no penalty flag (step S327; N), it is determined whether it is in the penalty state (step S333), and when it is not in the penalty state (step S333; N), the process proceeds to step S337. If it is in the penalty state (step S333; Y), the penalty game number is decremented by 1 (step S334), and it is determined whether the penalty game number is 0 (step S335).

  When the number of penalty games is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, when the penalty state is set even in the next game, the process proceeds to step S337. When the number of penalty games becomes 0 (step S335; Y), the penalty state is canceled and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S337).

  In the determination of whether or not the transition condition is satisfied (step S337), it is determined whether or not the promotion replay winning is satisfied as the transition condition is satisfied. If this transition condition is satisfied (step S337; Y), the start of the transition chance state is set (step S344), and the normal / precursor processing is terminated. As a result, from the next game, the gaming control device 50 becomes the RT state 1ST41, and the effect control device 70 becomes the transition chance effect state ST51, and the gaming state becomes the transition chance state ST31. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S337; N), it is determined whether or not the sign effect is being performed (step S338). Then, when the present sign production is being performed (step S338; Y), the number of sign games is updated by -1 (step S339), and it is determined whether the number of sign games has become 0 (step S340). When the number of precursor games is not 0 (step S340; N), the normal / precursor processing is terminated. When the number of precursor games becomes 0 (step S340; Y), the start of the assist standby state is set (step S341), and the normal / precursor processing is terminated. Thereby, the assist standby state ST53 is entered from the next game. The effect display is switched to the effect display corresponding to the assist standby state ST53 based on the bet operation for the next game.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the present sign production (step S338; N), it is determined whether it is in the gas sign production (step S342). When the warning sign is not in progress (step S342; N), the normal / predictor process is terminated. In addition, when it is in the predicament (step S342; Y), the number of precursor games is updated by -1 (step S343), and the normal / predictor processing is terminated.

  The penalty state may be set regardless of whether or not a penalty target winning combination has been established. Also, the number of penalty games may be constant regardless of the type of winning prize. Further, when setting the number of penalty games, the number of occurrences of the irregular stop operation may be taken into account. For example, a predetermined number of penalty games may be added for each occurrence of the irregular stop operation. Also, the number of precursor games is subtracted even in the penalty state so that the number of precursor games does not change, but the number of precursor games is reset to a longer game number in accordance with the penalty state setting. Also good.

  FIGS. 37 and 38 show an example in which a normal operation that is not an irregular stop operation mode is performed and an irregular stop operation is performed when the game mode is normal / a precursor. As shown in FIG. 37A, when a betting operation is performed and the start lever 21 is operated, the game is started and the rotation of the reel is started. As the game starts, an effect display is displayed on the image display device 3. Here, an effect that changes stepwise with the stop of the reel is set, and an effect image display STEP1 that is an effect display of the first stage is displayed. The stop operation is disabled from the start of rotation of the reel 6 until the reel 6 is rotated at a constant speed that rotates at a predetermined rotation speed. In this state, the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24 is in an invalid notification lighting state indicating that the stop operation is invalid.

  After that, when all the reels are rotated at a constant speed, a stop valid command indicating that the stop operation is possible is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and as shown in FIG. The stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24 is in an effective notification lighting state indicating that a stop operation is possible.

  When the player operates the reel stop button 24a corresponding to the left reel 6a as the first stop operation, the rotation of the left reel 6a is stopped as shown in FIG. This stop operation is a normal operation that is not an irregular stop operation. At this time, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70. Based on this, a normal stop operation sound (for example, bomb!) Is output, and the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24a corresponding to the left reel 6a is in an invalid notification lighting state. Further, the effect display of the image display device 3 is changed to effect image display STEP2 which is the second stage effect display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), when the reel stop button 24b corresponding to the middle reel 6b is operated as the second stop operation while the right and left reels 6b and 6c are rotated, the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) is obtained. As shown, the rotation of the middle reel 6b is stopped. This stop operation is a normal operation that is not an irregular stop operation. In the slot machine of the present embodiment, if the left reel 6a is stopped as the first stop operation, the normal operation is performed even if the right reel 6c is stopped as the second stop operation.

  In response to the stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70. Based on this, a normal stop operation sound (for example, bomb!) Is output, and the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24b corresponding to the middle reel 6b is set in the invalid notification lighting state. Furthermore, the effect display of the image display device 3 is changed to effect image display STEP3 which is the effect display of the third stage.

  Thereafter, when the reel stop button 24c corresponding to the right reel 6c is operated as the third stop operation, the rotation of the right reel 6c is stopped. Along with this stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and based on this, a normal stop operation sound (for example, bomb !!) is output and the right reel is output. The stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24c corresponding to 6c is in an invalid notification lighting state. Further, the effect display of the image display device 3 is changed to effect image display STEP4 which is the effect display of the fourth stage. When a winning is established, the corresponding payout or game state transition is performed, and the game ends.

  On the other hand, when the reel stop buttons 24b and 24c other than the reel stop button 24a corresponding to the left reel 6a are operated as the first stop operation, an irregular stop operation is performed. FIG. 37D shows an example in which the player operates the reel stop button 24c corresponding to the right reel 6c as the first stop operation to stop the rotation of the right reel 6c. The penalty freeze state is started based on this irregular stop operation, and the next stop operation is invalidated for a predetermined invalid time (here, 20 seconds).

  Along with the stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and the effect control device 70 also performs processing corresponding to the irregular stop operation. As this process, first, a warning stop operation sound (for example, bu ~!) Is output in response to the stop operation. In addition, all the stop button LEDs 66 provided on the reel stop buttons 24 corresponding to the reels 6 are set to the invalid notification lighting state. In addition, the effect display of the image display device 3 is in a dark state where the progress is stopped and the brightness is lowered while the effect display is in the first stage. It should be noted that the display may be any display that makes it difficult to recognize the effect display, such as displaying the color lightly, even in the dark state. Moreover, it is good also as just stopping the progress of effect display, without setting it as a dark state. Further, a warning display 91 is performed so as to overlap the front side of the effect display. The warning display 91 notifies that the left reel 6a must be stopped as the first stop.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38C, a remaining invalid time display 92 is performed instead of the warning display 91. In addition, a warning sound (for example, bu ~!) Is continuously output during a period in which the penalty is frozen. When the invalid time in the penalty freeze state ends, the second stop operation can be performed as shown in FIG. 38D, and the stop provided on the reel stop buttons 24a and 24b corresponding to the rotating reels 6a and 6b. The button LED 66 is in an effective notification lighting state. Also, the output of the warning sound (for example, bu ~ !!!!) ends. Note that the warning sound may be continuously output. Even in this state, the effect display of the image display device 3 is kept in the state where the progress is stopped with the effect display at the first stage at the time when the irregular stop operation is performed, and in the dark state where the brightness is lowered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), when the player operates the reel stop button 24a corresponding to the left reel 6a as the second stop operation, the penalty freeze state is started again, and a predetermined invalid time (here, 20). The next stop operation is invalidated for 2 seconds).

  In response to the stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and the effect control device 70 also performs the process corresponding to the irregular stop operation again. As this processing, a warning stop operation sound (for example, buzz!) Is output in response to the stop operation, a warning display 91 is performed so as to overlap the effect display, and then the remaining invalid time display 92 is performed. . In addition, all the stop button LEDs 66 provided on the reel stop buttons 24 corresponding to the reels 6 are set to the invalid notification lighting state. In addition, a warning sound (for example, buzz!) Is continuously output until the end of the invalid time. Note that the effect display of the image display device 3 is kept in the state where the progress is stopped with the effect display at the first stage at the time when the irregular stop operation is performed, and in the dark state where the brightness is lowered.

  Thereafter, when the invalid time in the penalty freeze state is over, the third stop operation is possible, and the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24b corresponding to the rotating reel 6b is in an effective notification lighting state. In addition, the output of the warning sound ends. In this state as well, as in the state shown in FIG. 38 (d), the effect display on the image display device 3 is in a state where the progress is stopped with the effect display at the first stage at the time when the irregular stop operation is performed. It remains in a dark state with reduced brightness.

  Then, when the player operates the reel stop button 24b corresponding to the middle reel 6b as the third stop operation, the penalty freeze state is started again, and the next game starts for a predetermined invalid time (here, 20 seconds). Operations (betting operations and operations of the start lever 21) are invalidated.

  Also, with the third stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and the effect control device 70 also performs the process corresponding to the irregular stop operation again. As this processing, a warning stop operation sound (for example, buzz!) Is output in response to the stop operation, a warning display 91 is performed so as to overlap the effect display, and then the remaining invalid time display 92 is performed. . It should be noted that all stop button LEDs 66 provided on the reel stop buttons 24 corresponding to the reels 6 are in an invalid notification lighting state. In addition, a warning sound (for example, buzz!) Is continuously output until the end of the invalid time. Note that the effect display of the image display device 3 is kept in the state where the progress is stopped with the effect display at the first stage at the time when the irregular stop operation is performed, and in the dark state where the brightness is lowered.

  When the invalid time elapses, the next game can be started. As a result of the game in which the irregular stop operation has occurred, a penalty winning combination which is a winning combination that can be established by performing the irregular stop operation (the first stop is a push order bell prize other than the left reel 6a or a pushing order is determined). When a replay winning) is established, a penalty state is set in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed for a predetermined number of games.

[AT standby processing]
FIG. 39 shows AT standby processing in the game progress control processing shown in FIG. In this AT standby processing, first, execution of a game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) based on the determined effect pattern is started (step S351), and transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped. It is determined whether a reel stop command has been received (step S352). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S352; N), the process proceeds to step S355. When the reel stop command is received (step S352; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S353), and the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S354). It is determined whether or not a game result command including information on a winning determination result has been received (step S355).

  If no game result command has been received (step S355; N), the process returns to step S352. If a game result command has been received (step S355; Y), it is determined whether or not a push order has been missed (step S356). When the push order bell is missed (step S356; Y), the start of the promotion / rush-in AT state is set (step S360), and the AT standby process is terminated. As a result, the transition assist state ST54 is entered from the next game, and provision of information for assisting establishment of the selected small role (for example, notification of the pressing order) is started. The effect display is switched to the effect display corresponding to the transition assist state ST54 based on the betting operation for the next game. In other words, the occurrence of the pushing order bell missing here satisfies the start condition for starting the notification of the assist information regarding the stop operation that is advantageous to the player.

  If the push order bell has not been missed (step S356; N), it is determined whether the falling condition is satisfied (step S357). The falling condition here is establishment of a falling replay (special replay 3) winning or a SIN winning. If the fall condition is not satisfied (step S357; N), the AT standby process is terminated. If the fall condition is satisfied (step S357; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S358), the start of the normal / precursor state is set (step S359), and AT waiting processing is performed. finish.

  Thereby, in the game control device 50, the normal state ST40 remains unchanged, but from the next game, the effect control device 70 changes to the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52, and the game state shifts to the normal game state ST10. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. If the AT right stock is not 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the game proceeds to the precursor game state ST52. If the AT right stock is 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50.

Here, the game shifts to the assist standby state ST53 as the precursor game is exhausted, and shifts to the promoted / rushing AT state (transition assist state ST54) when the push order bell is lost. Alternatively, when the precursor game is consumed, the state may be shifted directly to the promoted / rushing AT state.

[Promotion / Processing during rushing AT]
FIG. 40 shows a process during promotion / rush-in AT in the game progress control process shown in FIG. In this process during promotion / rush-in AT, first, execution of a game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) based on the determined effect pattern is started (step S371), and whether or not the assist target role is won is determined. Determination is made (step S372). If the winning combination is not won (step S372; N), the process proceeds to step S374. If the winning combination is won (step S372; Y), the display of an operation assist image that is advantageous to the player is set (step S373).

  The assist target combination is a push order bell prize, a promotion replay prize, a rush replay prize, a fall replay prize, and a SIN prize. The operation assist image that is advantageous to the player includes a push order and a stop pattern to be aimed at which can avoid the establishment of the push order bell prize, the promotion replay prize and the rush replay prize, the SIN prize and the fall replay prize. It is an image to notify. Since the promotion replay winning and the fall replay winning are duplicated, it is possible to assist the avoidance of the falling replay winning by assisting the establishment of the promotion replay winning.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S374). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S374; N), the process proceeds to step S379. If the reel stop command is received (step S374; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S375), and it is determined whether there is an assist violation (step S376).

  The assist violation means that the player performs an operation ignoring the pressing order notified by the operation assist image and the target stop symbol. If there is an assist violation (step S376; Y), a warning sound output and a warning image display are set (step S377), and it is determined whether a game result command including information on a winning determination result has been received. (Step S379). The warning sound is output and the warning image is displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the game effect and the update of the operation assist image are also stopped. If there is no assist violation (step S376; N), the effect (game effect (G effect) or operation assist image (AT image)) being executed is updated based on the reel stop information (step S378), and the prize is won. It is determined whether a game result command including information on the determination result is received (step S379).

  If no game result command has been received (step S379; N), the process returns to step S374. If a game result command is received (step S379; Y), it is determined whether the promotion condition is satisfied (step S380). The establishment of the promotion condition here means establishment of a promotion replay prize. If this promotion condition is satisfied (step S380; Y), the start of the promotion / rush-in AT state is set (step S381), and the promotion / rush-in process is terminated. Thereby, although the game state in the production control device 70 does not change, the game control device 50 makes a transition to the RT state 1 and enters the ART standby state ST33 from the next game. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  On the other hand, when the promotion condition is not satisfied (step S380; N), it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S382). The establishment of the fall condition here is due to the occurrence of a violation. When a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order ( Push order bell spill). If this fall condition is satisfied (step S382; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S386), the start of the normal / precursor state is set (step S387), and the process during promotion / rush-in AT Exit.

  Thereby, in the game control device 50, there is no change in the normal state ST40, but in the next game, the presentation control device 70 provides information for assisting the establishment of the winning small role in the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52. (For example, the notification of the pressing order) ends, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST10. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. If the AT right stock is not 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the game proceeds to the precursor game state ST52. If the AT right stock is 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50. That is, establishment of the fall condition here establishes an end condition for ending the notification of assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player.

  If the falling condition is not satisfied (step S382; N), it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S383). The establishment of the transition condition here means establishment of a rush replay winning. If this transition condition is not satisfied (step S383; N), the process during promotion / rush-in is terminated. If the transition condition is satisfied (step S383; Y), an initial value is set in the AT game number counter that manages the number of games that can be executed in the ART state ST35 (step S384), and corresponds to the AT right stock content. The start of the additional AT state to be set is set (step S385), and the process during promotion / rush-in AT is terminated.

  As a result, from the next game, the game control device 50 enters the RT state 2ST42, and the effect control device 70 enters the specific assist state ST55, and the game state becomes the ART state ST35. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. Note that, depending on the type of AT right that is the earliest stock right among the stocked AT rights, the game number fixed assist state ST55a, that is, the ART state 1ST35a, and the game number variable assist state ST55b, that is, the ART state 2ST35b. It becomes. It should be noted that the game state to be transferred may be selected depending on the type of AT replay winning that has been established (middle or naname) instead of the type of AT right.

  FIG. 41 shows an example of the operation assist image. 41A to 41C show operation assist images for assisting establishment of the promotion replay winning (avoidance of falling replay winning). When the game is started, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the image display device 3 displays the push order indicated by numerals and the type of winning established indicated by the figure. Here, the case where the pressing order is the order of left, middle, and right is shown, and it is shown that the promotion replay winning is established by the diamond shape. Furthermore, the types of winnings that are established by voice (here, Kyupin!) Are also shown.

  When the player performs an operation to stop the left reel 6a as the first stop operation according to the instruction of the operation assist image, the display corresponding to the stopped left reel 6a is darkened as shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the player performs an operation to stop the middle reel 6b as the second stop operation in accordance with the instruction of the operation assist image, the display corresponding to the stopped middle reel 6b is darkened as shown in FIG. When the player performs an operation that does not follow the instructions on the operation assist image (when there is an assist violation), a warning sound is output and a warning image is displayed, and the game effect and the operation assist image are updated. Is stopped.

  FIGS. 41D to 41F show operation assist images for assisting the establishment of the rush replay winning. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the push order indicated by numerals and the type of winning established indicated by figures are displayed on the image display device 3. Here, a case where the pressing order is left, middle, and right is shown, and it is shown that a rush replay winning is established by a square figure. Furthermore, the type of winning that is established by voice (in this case, JOW!) Is shown.

  When the player performs the stop operation according to the instruction of the operation assist image, the operation assist image is updated in the same manner as in the case of the promotion replay winning as shown in FIGS. 41 (e) and 41 (f). Similarly, when there is an assist violation, a warning sound is output and a warning image is displayed, and the update of the game effect and the operation assist image is stopped.

  FIGS. 41 (g) to (i) show operation assist images for assisting in avoiding establishment of the SIN prize. In this case, the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, and the right reel 6c is instructed to aim at “7”. When the player performs a stop operation according to the instruction of the operation assist image, the operation assist image is updated, and the assist display corresponding to the stopped reel is erased. When there is an assist violation, a warning sound is output and a warning image is displayed, and the update of the game effect and the operation assist image is stopped.

  FIGS. 41 (j) to (l) show operation assist images for assisting the establishment of the pushing order bell winning. Also in this case, as in the case of the promotion replay winning, as shown in FIG. 41 (j), the push order indicated by numerals and the type of winning established indicated by the figure are displayed on the image display device 3. Here, the case where the pressing order is the order of left, middle, and right is shown, and it is shown that the pressing order bell winning is established by a circular figure.

  When the player performs a stop operation according to the instruction of the operation assist image, the operation assist image is updated in the same manner as in the case of the promotion replay winning as shown in FIGS. 41 (k) and (l). Similarly, when there is an assist violation, a warning sound is output and a warning image is displayed, and the update of the game effect and the operation assist image is stopped.

  Note that during the ART state ST35, the operation assist image is the same image as the operation assist image that assists the establishment of the push order bell prize even when assisting the establishment of the promotion replay prize and the rush replay prize. Further, even in a state where information for assisting the establishment of the winning prize is not notified (for example, the normal gaming state ST10), an operation assist image for assisting establishment of the push order bell prize may be displayed with a low probability. .

[Additional processing during AT]
FIG. 42 shows the extra AT processing in the game progress control processing shown in FIG. In this extra AT processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the specialized zone (step S391). The special zones are a special zone 1ST55b1 and a special zone 2ST55b2 in the game number variable assist state ST55b. If it is the special zone (step S391; Y), the special zone medium process (step S393) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S394. If the zone is not a specialized zone (step S391; N), execution of the game production (freeze production, rare role expectation production, continuous notice, etc.) using the decided production pattern is started (step S392), It is determined whether or not the winning is made (step S394).

  If the winning combination is not won (step S394; N), the process proceeds to step S396. If the winning combination is won (step S394; Y), an operation assist image display that is advantageous to the player is set (step S395). Note that the operation assist image that is advantageous to the assist target role and the player is the same as the processing during the promotion / rush-in AT, and an additional replay winning is added as the assist target role, and the push assist effect as the corresponding operation assist image (See FIG. 32 (g)).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S396). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S396; N), the process proceeds to step S401. If the reel stop command is received (step S396; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S397), and it is determined whether there is an assist violation (step S398).

  The assist violation means that the player performs an operation ignoring the pressing order notified by the operation assist image and the target stop symbol. If there is an assist violation (step S398; Y), the output of the warning sound and the display of the warning image are set (step S399), and it is determined whether or not a game result command including information on the determination result of winning is received. (Step S401). The warning sound is output and the warning image is displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the game effect and the update of the operation assist image are also stopped. When there is no assist violation (step S398; N), the effect (game effect (G effect) or operation assist image (AT image)) being executed is updated based on the reel stop information (step S400), and the prize is won. It is determined whether a game result command including information on the determination result is received (step S401).

  If no game result command has been received (step S401; N), the process returns to step S396. If a game result command is received (step S401; Y), the AT game number counter is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S403). The establishment of the fall condition here is due to the occurrence of a violation. When a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order ( Push order bell spill).

  If this fall condition is satisfied (step S403; Y), it is determined whether the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S409). If the value of the AT game number counter is not 0 (step S409; N), the start of the rescue AT state is set (step S410), and the process during the addition AT is terminated. When the fall condition is satisfied, the game control device 50 is in the normal state ST40, and the effect control device 70 is in the transition assist state ST54 because the AT game number counter is not 0, and the game state from the next game becomes the relief AT state ST32. Further, the effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  On the other hand, if the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S409; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S411), and the start of the normal / precursor state is set (step S412). Add-on AT processing is terminated. As the fall condition is established, the game control device 50 is in the normal state ST40, and in the effect control device 70, since the AT game number counter is 0, the assist role is established in the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52. The provision of information to be performed (for example, notification of the pressing order) ends, and the gaming state from the next game becomes the normal gaming state ST10. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the AT right stock is not 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the game proceeds to the precursor game state ST52. If the AT right stock is 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50. That is, when the fall condition here is satisfied and the value of the AT game number counter is 0, the end condition for terminating the notification of the assist information regarding the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is satisfied.

  If the fall condition is not satisfied (step S403; N), it is determined whether the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S404). If it is not 0 (step S404; N), an additional AT is being performed. End the process. When the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S404; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S405), and it is determined whether the AT right stock is 0 (step S406). ).

If the AT right stock is not 0 (step S406; N), the start of the promotion / rush-in AT state is set (step S407), and the process during the addition AT is terminated. Thereby, in the game control device 50, the RT state 2 remains unchanged, but in the effect control device 70, the transition assist state ST54 is entered, and the game state from the next game becomes the ART standby state ST33. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the AT right stock is 0 (step S406; Y), the start of the transition chance state is set (step S408), and the extra AT processing is terminated. Thereby, in the game control device 50, there is no change in the RT state 2, but in the production control device 70, provision of information for assisting the establishment of the winning small role in the transition chance production state ST51 is provided (for example, notification of pushing order). Is completed, and the gaming state from the next game becomes the transition chance state ST31. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. That is, when the AT game number counter value is 0 and the AT right stock is 0, an end condition for ending notification of assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is established.

[Specialized zone processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special zone processing in the extra AT processing shown in FIG. In this special zone processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the special zone 1 (ST55b1) (step S421). If it is the special zone 1 (step S421; Y), an additional number determination process 1 (step S422) for determining the additional number is performed, and the additional number is added to the AT game number counter to set the execution of the additional effect. (Step S423).

  Then, the number of zone games is updated by -1 (step S424), and it is determined whether the number of zone games is 0 (step S425). If the number of zone games is not 0 (step S425; N), the special zone processing is terminated. In this case, the special zone 1ST55b1 continues in the next game. If the number of zone games is 0 (step S425; Y), execution of the special zone end effect is set (step S426), and the special zone processing is ended. In this case, the normal game zone ST55b0 is entered from the next game.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the special zone 1 (step S421; N), it is determined whether it is in the special zone 2 (ST55b2) (step S427). If it is not the special zone 2 (step S427; N), the special zone processing is terminated. If it is the special zone 2 (step S427; Y), an additional number determination process 2 (step S428) for determining the additional number is performed, and the additional number is added to the AT game number counter to execute the additional effect. Set (step S429).

  Then, the special zone continuous lottery is performed (step S430), and it is determined whether the lottery result is non-continuation of the special zone (step S431). When the lottery result is not the continuation of the special zone (step S431; N), the special zone process is terminated. In this case, the special zone 2ST55b2 continues in the next game. If the lottery result is a non-continuation of the special zone (step S431; Y), the execution of the special zone end effect is set (step S426), and the special zone processing is terminated. In this case, the normal game zone ST55b0 is entered from the next game.

  In the additional number determination process 1 (step S422), the additional number is determined according to the selection rate shown in FIG. Further, in the additional number determination process 2 (step S428), the additional number is determined according to the selection rate shown in FIG. At this time, the additional number may be selected so that the selection rate shown in FIG. 44 (a) or (b) is obtained by a random number for determining the additional number, or the additional number corresponding to the internal winning winning combination is added. The selection rate shown in FIG. 44 (a) or (b) may be obtained by determining the number. When determining the number of extras corresponding to the internal winning combination, one additional number may correspond to one winning combination, or multiple additional numbers may correspond to one winning combination, May be selected. In this case, it is preferable that the expected value of the additional number increases as the winning combination has a lower winning probability. Also, 0 may be set for the number of additions, and in the specialization zone 2ST55b2, it may be set as a non-continuation condition that 0 is selected for the number of additions instead of the continuous lottery.

[Relief AT processing]
FIG. 45 shows a process during repair AT in the game progress control process shown in FIG. In the processing during the relief AT, first, execution of the game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) based on the determined effect pattern is started (step S441), and it is determined whether or not the assist target role is won. (Step S442).

  If the winning combination is not won (step S442; N), the process proceeds to step S444. If the winning combination is selected (step S442; Y), an operation assist image display that is advantageous to the player is set (step S443). Note that the operation assist image that is advantageous to the assist target combination and the player is the same as the processing during the promotion / rush-in AT.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S444). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S444; N), the process proceeds to step S449. When the reel stop command is received (step S444; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S445), and it is determined whether there is an assist violation (step S446).

  The assist violation means that the player performs an operation ignoring the pressing order notified by the operation assist image and the target stop symbol. When there is an assist violation (step S446; Y), the output of the warning sound and the display of the warning image are set (step S447), and it is determined whether or not a game result command including information on the winning determination result has been received. (Step S449). The warning sound is output and the warning image is displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the game effect and the update of the operation assist image are also stopped. If there is no assist violation (step S446; N), the effect (game effect (G effect) or operation assist image (AT image)) being executed is updated based on the reel stop information (step S448), and the prize is won. It is determined whether or not a game result command including information on the determination result is received (step S449).

  If no game result command has been received (step S449; N), the process returns to step S444. If a game result command is received (step S449; Y), the AT game number counter is updated by -1 (step S450), and it is determined whether the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S451). If the value of the AT game number counter is not 0 (step S451; N), it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S452). The establishment of the fall condition here is due to the occurrence of a violation. When a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order ( Push order bell spill).

When the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S451; Y) or when the fall condition is satisfied (step S452; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S453), and the normal / precursor state Is set (step S454), and the process during the repair AT is ended. Thereby, in the game control device 50, there is no change in the normal state ST40, but in the effect control device 70, since the AT game number counter is 0, the small role won in the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52 is won. The provision of information for assisting establishment (for example, notification of the pressing order) ends, and the gaming state changes from the next game to the normal gaming state ST10. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the AT right stock is not 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the game proceeds to the precursor game state ST52. If the AT right stock is 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50. That is, when the AT game number counter value is 0 or the falling condition is satisfied, the ending condition for ending the notification of the assist information regarding the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is satisfied.

  On the other hand, when the fall condition is not satisfied (step S452; N), it is determined whether the promotion condition is satisfied (step S455). The establishment of the promotion condition here means establishment of a promotion replay prize. If this promotion condition is not satisfied (step S455; N), the repair AT process is terminated.

If the promotion condition is satisfied (step S455; Y), the start of the promotion / rush-in AT state is set (step S456), and the in-repair AT process is terminated. Thereby, in the game control apparatus 50, it transfers to RT state 1ST41 from normal state ST40. Moreover, in the production | presentation control apparatus 70, there is no change with the transition assistance state ST54. Thereby, the gaming state from the next game becomes the ART standby state ST33. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

[Processing during transition opportunities]
FIG. 46 shows a process during transition chance in the game progress control process shown in FIG. In this transition chance processing, first, execution of a game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) based on the determined effect pattern is started (step S461), and is transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped. It is determined whether a reel stop command has been received (step S462).

  If the reel stop command has not been received (step S462; N), the process proceeds to step S465. When the reel stop command is received (step S462; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S463), and the effect being executed based on the reel stop information (game effect (G effect)). ) Is updated (step S464), and it is determined whether or not a game result command including information on the determination result of winning is received (step S465).

  If no game result command has been received (step S465; N), the process returns to step S462. When the game result command is received (step S465; Y), it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S466). The establishment of the fall condition here is due to the occurrence of a violation. When a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order ( Push order bell spill).

  When this fall condition is satisfied (step S466; Y), the start of the normal / precursor state is set (step S470), and the process during the transition chance is ended. As a result, the game control device 50 shifts from the RT state 2ST42 to the normal state ST40, and the effect control device 70 shifts from the transition chance effect state ST51 to the non-assist state ST50, and the game state changes from the next game to the normal game state ST10. . The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the falling condition is not satisfied (step S466; N), it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S467). The establishment of the transition condition here means establishment of a rush replay prize. It should be noted that, here, the push order effect (predetermined chance effect) is not performed in the game that is internally won for the rush replay prize. If this transition condition is not satisfied (step S467; N), the process during transition chance is terminated. If the transition condition is satisfied (step S467; Y), the number of sets is added and the start of the AT state is set (step S468), the initial value is set in the AT game number counter (step S469), and the transition chance is in progress. End the process.

  As a result, in the game control device 50, the RT state 2ST42 remains unchanged, but in the effect control device 70, the transition from the transition chance effect state ST51 to the game number fixed assist state ST55a in the specific assist state ST55 is established. Provision of information that assists the player (for example, notification of the pressing order) is started, and the gaming state is changed to the ART state 1ST35a of the ART state 35 from the next game. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. That is, the establishment of the rush replay winning here establishes a start condition for starting notification of assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player.

  That is, the effect control device 70 serves as assist information notification means capable of notifying assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Further, the assist information notifying means at least assist information for deriving a start outcome (promotion replay prize) and assist information for avoiding derivation of an end outcome (push order bell spill, SIN prize and fall replay prize). Will be notified.

[Stock acquisition judgment processing]
FIG. 47 shows a stock acquisition determination process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this stock acquisition determination process, it is first determined whether a bonus is in effect (in a special gaming state) (step S481). If the bonus is being acquired (step S481; Y), the bonus stock process (step S490) is performed. To complete the stock acquisition determination process. If it is not during the bonus (step S481; N), it is determined whether or not it is in a penalty state (step S482).

  If it is in the penalty state (step S482; Y), the stock acquisition determination process ends. In the penalty state, the foresign effect and the gasse sign effect are not started. However, if there is AT right stock, the foreword effect may be started. If not in the penalty state (step S482; N), the AT random numbers 1 to 3 are acquired (step S483), and it is determined whether the number of games is added and AT is in progress (step S484). In addition, the number of games on AT is a state in which the game state in the effect control device 70 is the game number variable assist state ST55b and the game state is the ART state 2ST35b.

  If the number of games is not added and the AT is not being executed (step S484; N), a stock lottery process (step S485) is performed in which an AT right acquisition lottery is performed in accordance with the winning prize. Next, a consecutive winning stock process that stocks one AT right when a rare small role is continuously won a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), and stocks one AT right every time it wins continuously (step) S486) is performed. Then, if the Bell prize is continuously established for a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times), one AT right is stocked, and one AT right is stocked every time a consecutive winning is made (step S487). I do. In the case where the consecutive winning of the small role combination or the continuous establishment of the Bell prize continues, even if there is an AT right stock, the foreplay effect is not started and the AT right is not digested.

  Next, ceiling stock processing (step S488) for stocking 3 or 5 AT rights based on the execution of 1000 games from the later of the end of the special game state or the end of the specific game state is performed. Thereafter, an extra replay stock process (step S489) for stocking one AT right is performed based on the establishment of the special replay 2 prize (the extra replay prize) according to the gaming state, and the stock acquisition determination process is terminated. In other words, the effect control device 70 stores the execution right (AT right) for causing the assist information notification means (effect control device 70) to notify the assist information based on the predetermined acquisition condition being satisfied. The execution right storage means is possible.

  On the other hand, when the number of games is added and the game is in AT (step S484; Y), it is determined whether the game is in the special zone (step S491). The special zones are a special zone 1ST55b1 and a special zone 2ST55b2 in the game number variable assist state ST55b. If it is this specialized zone (step S491; Y), the stock acquisition determination process ends. If the zone is not a special zone (step S491; N), a special zone transfer lottery process (step S492) is performed in which a lottery for shifting to a special zone is performed in accordance with the winning prize. It is determined whether or not the transition to the zone has been determined (step S493).

  When the transition to the special zone has not been determined (step S493; N), the stock acquisition determination process ends. When the transition to the special zone is determined (step S493; Y), the transition to the corresponding special zone is set (step S494), and it is determined whether the transition is to the special zone 1 or not. (Step S495).

  If it is a transition to the specialized zone 1 (step S495; Y), the number of zone games is determined and set (step S496), and the stock acquisition determination process is terminated. The number of zone games is determined as any of 2 to 25 games using the AT random number 2. If it is not the transition to the specialized zone 1 (step S495; N), the zone continuation rate is determined and set (step S497), and the stock acquisition determination process ends. The zone continuation rate is determined as 50%, 75%, or 90% using the random number 3 for AT.

  FIG. 48 shows a high expectation (probability) of acquiring the AT right in the stock lottery process (step S485) when each rare small role is won, and a special zone transfer lottery when each rare small role is won. The level of expectation (probability) that the transition to the specialized zone is selected in the process (step S492) is shown. The degree of expectation is the lowest for three-player A (weak cherry) and the highest for pure loss. The net loss is a case where no winning combination is won. In the case of this net loss, the acquisition of AT rights or the transition to the specialized zone 2 is confirmed.

[Stock lottery processing]
FIG. 49 shows a stock lottery process in the stock acquisition determination process shown in FIG. In this stock lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a lottery subject combination (rare) is won (step S501). When the lottery target (rare) role is not won (step S501; N), it is determined whether or not a pure loss is won (step S513). When the pure loss is not won (step S513; N), the stock lottery process is terminated. In addition, when a pure loss is won (step S513; Y), the process proceeds to step S510.

  On the other hand, if the winning combination (rare small combination) is won (step S501; Y), the rare combination counter is updated by +1 (step S502), and it is determined whether the rare combination counter has reached the upper limit (for example, 9). (Step S503). When the rare combination counter has not reached the upper limit (step S503; N), the stock determination table corresponding to the lottery probability state is set (step S504), and the combination-specific stock determination table corresponding to the winning combination is set from the set table. Is set (step S507).

  As shown in FIG. 50, a table corresponding to the AT right lottery probability state is prepared in the stock determination table. If the lottery probability state is a low probability state, the low probability medium stock determination table is set. When this stock determination table is selected, the probability of acquiring an AT right (stock expectation) is 2%. In addition, when the lottery probability state is a high-accuracy state, a high-accuracy medium stock determination table is set, and when the lottery probability state is an ultra-high-accuracy state, an ultra-high-probability stock determination table is set. The AT right acquisition lottery is performed with the expected stock expectation.

  If the rare combination counter reaches the upper limit (step S503; Y), the rare combination counter is cleared to 0 (step S505), the ultra-high-probability stock determination table is set (step S506), and set. From the table, a stock judgment table for each role corresponding to the winning combination is set (step S507). When the number of rare small roles won is a predetermined number (for example, 9 times), as a privilege, the AT right acquisition lottery based on the predetermined number of times of winning is an ultra-high accuracy state regardless of the lottery probability state at that time It is done with the probability of.

  Further, the role-specific stock determination table corresponding to the winning combination is set corresponding to each stock determination table, and the winning probability of the AT right for each winning combination is determined. In addition, the winning probabilities for each winning combination are determined in the order shown in FIG. In each stock determination table, when the winning probabilities of AT rights in the role-specific stock determination table corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are combined, the stock expectation shown in FIG. 50 is obtained.

  After performing the process of setting the role-specific stock determination table corresponding to the winning combination from the set table (step S507), it is determined whether or not to store the AT right based on the AT random number 1 (step S508), and the AT It is determined whether acquisition of the right stock has been determined (step S509). When the AT right stock acquisition is not determined (step S509; N), the stock lottery process is terminated.

  If the AT right stock acquisition is determined (step S509; Y), stock right type determination processing is performed (step S510). There are two types of AT rights: AT rights 1 which is the right to transition to the game number fixed assist state ST55a, that is, the ART state 1ST35a, and AT rights 2 which is the right to transition to the game number variable assist state ST55b, that is, the ART state 2ST35b. The right to be used is determined based on the random number 2 for AT. Note that AT right 1 is selected with a higher probability.

  Then, a stock number determination process (step S511) for determining the number of AT rights to be stocked (for example, 1 to 5) based on the winning combination and the AT random number 3 is performed, and the AT right stock information is updated based on the determination result. (Step S512), the stock lottery process is terminated.

[Stock processing during bonus]
FIG. 51 shows stock processing during bonus in the stock acquisition determination processing shown in FIG. In this bonus stock process, first, a branch process in the game mode (step S521) is performed, and after performing the corresponding process, the bonus stock process is terminated.

  If the game mode is PB (corresponding to the PB state), PB stock processing is performed (step S522). If the game mode is BB1 (corresponding to the BB1 state), BB1 stock processing is performed (step S523). If the game mode is BB2 (corresponding to the BB2 state), BB2 stock processing is performed (step S524). If the game mode is RB (corresponding to the RB state), RB stock processing is performed (step S525).

[Stock processing in BB1]
FIG. 52 shows the stock process during BB1 in the stock process during bonus shown in FIG. In the stock process during BB1, first, it is determined whether or not a slug entry replay winning is established (step S531), and if not established (step S531; N), the process proceeds to step S533. Further, when the Naname rush replay winning is established (step S531; Y), the number of sets added to the AT right (AT right 1) stock number is updated by +1 (step S532).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the middle stage replay winning has been established (step S533), and if not (step S533; N), the process proceeds to step S535. If the middle stage replay winning is established (step S533; Y), the number of games is added and the AT number (AT right 2) stock number is updated by +1 (step S534).

  Then, it is determined whether or not an end command transmitted when the operation intervening freeze is received (step S535). If no end command is received (step S535; N), the BB1 stock processing is ended. If an end command has been received (step S535; Y), the number of continued command receptions + 1 is added to the number of games added to the AT right (AT right 2) stock number (step S536), and BB1. End stock processing.

[Specialized zone transfer lottery processing]
FIG. 53 shows the special zone transfer lottery process in the stock acquisition determination process shown in FIG. In this special zone transfer lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a lottery subject combination (rare) is won (step S541). If the winning combination (rare) is not won (step S541; N), it is determined whether or not a pure loss is won (step S549). And when it is not winning a pure loss (step S549; N), a special zone transfer lottery process is complete | finished. Further, when a win is won (step S549; Y), the transition information to the special zone 2 is set (step S550), and the special zone transition lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the winning combination (rare) is won (step S541; Y), a role-specific zone transition determination table corresponding to the winning combination is set (step S542). As shown in FIG. 54, in the role-specific zone transition determination table, the transition expectation (probability) to the specialized zone 2 when each winning combination is won is determined. In the case of winning, the table for three-piece combination A is selected, and the transition to the specialized zone 1 or 2 is selected with a probability of 0.005%.

  After setting the role-specific zone shift determination table corresponding to the winning role (step S542), it is determined whether or not to shift to the special zone based on the AT random number 1 (step S543), and the shift to the special zone is performed. It is determined whether it has been determined (step S544). And when transfer to a special zone is not determined (step S544; N), a special zone transfer lottery process is complete | finished.

  Further, when the shift to the special zone is determined (step S544; Y), the special zone is determined based on the AT random number 2 (step S545). It is determined whether or not migration has been determined (step S546). The transition to the special zone 1 is selected with a high probability (for example, 99% for the special zone 1 and 1% for the special zone 2).

  When the transition to the special zone 1 is determined (step S546; Y), the transition information to the special zone 1 is set (step S547), and the special zone transition lottery process is terminated. If the transition to the specialized zone 1 is not determined (step S546; N), that is, if the transition to the specialized zone 2 is determined, the transition information to the specialized zone 2 is set (step S548), the special zone shift lottery process is terminated.

[Stock lottery mode transition process]
FIG. 55 shows a stock lottery mode transition process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this stock lottery mode transition process, first, it is determined whether or not the super high probability mode (super high probability state) is set (step S561). When it is not the super high probability mode (super high probability state) (step S561; N), a lottery mode promotion determination process (step S562) is performed to determine whether there is a promotion (step S563).

  In the lottery mode promotion determination process (step S562), a lottery for promotion is performed based on the current lottery mode and the type of winning combination. The probability of winning the promotion varies depending on the type of the rare small role selected, and FIG. 56 shows the order of the mode promotion expectation, which is the probability of promotion when each rare small role is won. This mode promotion expectation is the lowest in the single-player combination A (chance eye A) and the highest in the three-player combination A (weak cherry). This order is different from the order of AT right stock expectation and specialized zone transition expectation shown in FIG. 48. In FIG. 48, many of the rare small actors whose expectation ranks were low are expected rank in FIG. Is to be higher.

  If there is no promotion (step S5563; N), the process proceeds to step S567. If there is a promotion (step S563; Y), it is determined whether the promotion is to the ultra high probability mode (step S564). When the lottery mode before promotion is the low probability mode (low probability state), it is possible to shift to the high probability mode (high probability state) or the ultra high probability mode. In addition, when the lottery mode before promotion is the high probability mode, only the transition to the ultra-high probability mode is possible.

  If it is not promoted to the ultra-high probability mode (step S564; N), the high probability mode is set (step S565), and the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated. In the case of promotion to the super high probability mode (step S564; Y), the super high probability mode is set (step S566), and the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is in the super high probability mode (step S561; Y), lottery mode demotion determination processing (step S567) is performed to determine whether there is demotion (step S568). In the lottery mode demotion determination process (step S567), demotion is determined based on staying a predetermined number of games in the current lottery mode. Alternatively, a lottery for demotion is performed based on staying a predetermined number of games in the current lottery mode, and a demotion is determined based on the result of the lottery.

  When the lottery mode is not demoted (step S568; N), the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated. Further, when there is a demotion (step S568; Y), it is determined whether the demotion is to the low probability mode (the low probability state) (step S569). If it is demoted to the low probability mode (step S569; Y), the low probability mode is set (step S570), and the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated. If not demoted to the low probability mode (step S569; N), the high probability mode is set (step S571), and the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated.

[Continuous notice setting process]
FIG. 57 shows a continuous notice setting process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this continuous notice setting process, first, it is determined whether a bonus is in effect (in a special gaming state) (step S581). If a bonus is being given (step S581; Y), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. If the bonus is not in effect (step S581; N), it is determined whether or not a bonus prize (special prize) has been established in the current game (step S582).

  If a bonus winning is established in this game (step S582; Y), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. If no bonus winning is achieved in the current game (step S582; N), it is determined whether a bonus winning is won in the current game (step S583). When the bonus winning is not won in the current game (step S583; N), it is determined whether the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is being executed (step S584).

  When the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is being executed (step S584; Y), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. In addition, when the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is not being executed (step S584; N), it is determined whether or not the rare combination (rare small combination) is won (step S585). If the rare combination is not won (step S585; N), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. If a rare combination is won (step S585; Y), a process for determining whether to continuously lose notice is performed (step S586), and it is determined whether or not the execution of the consecutive lose notice is determined (step S587).

  In the losing continuous notice execution determination process, the execution of the losing continuous notice is determined with a probability corresponding to the gaming state and the type of the rare role winning. Rare small roles may be won in duplicate with special prizes, so if you do not win in duplicate with special prizes, you will be able to run a continuous notice of loss, raising the expectation for winning special prizes, The fun of gaming can be improved. It should be noted that depending on the gaming state, it may not be determined to execute the continuous losing notice. For example, when the player is in the specialized zone, the execution of the continuous losing notice is not determined. In addition, even if the special winning flag is carried over, it is determined not to execute the continuous losing notice. When it is determined to execute the continuous losing notice (step S587; Y), the continuation notice pattern for losing is determined from the losing continuous notice table (step S588), the continuous continuation notice is set (step S589), and the continuous notice setting is performed. End the process.

  On the other hand, if a bonus win is won in this game (step S583; Y), it is determined whether there is a setting for continuous notice of loss (step S590). When there is a continuous continuous notice setting (step S590; Y), a process of replacing the continuous continuous notice setting with the continuous notice setting is performed (step S591), and the continuous notice setting process ends. In the process of replacing the continuous continuous notice setting with the continuous continuous notice setting (step S591), the number of continuous notice games and the execution pattern, which are the number of games for which the continuous notice is executed, are as follows. Without changing, the result notification effect performed at the end of the continuous notice is changed from the loss result effect to the hit result effect.

  If there is no lost continuous notice setting (step S590; N), the winning continuous notice pattern is determined from the winning continuous notice table (step S592), the winning continuous notice is set (step S593), and the continuous notice setting process is performed. Exit. That is, based on the fact that the production control device 70 has won a special role or an overlapping target role (rare small role) that may be won in duplicate with the special role in the internal lottery, it continues across a plurality of games. A continuous notice execution means capable of giving a notice is provided.

  In addition, only when a rare small role that may be elected in duplicate with a special prize is won (only if the special prize has not been won), the consecutive loss notice can be executed. Even if the player is not elected, the losing continuous notice may be executed. In addition, the continuous notice of losing is not executed when the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is being executed, but the continuous notice is executed if there is no problem with the sign effect (especially the continuous effect during the sign effect). You may do it.

  On the other hand, if the execution of the continuous loss notice has not been determined (step S587; N), it is determined whether the ART state is in effect (step S594). If it is not in the ART state (step S594; N), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. In the case of the ART state (step S594; Y), it is determined whether the winning or losing continuous notice is in progress (step S595).

  If the winning or losing continuous notice is in progress (step S595; Y), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not during the winning or losing continuous notice (step S595; N), it is determined whether or not the AT right is acquired in the current game (step S596). When the AT right is acquired in the current game (step S596; Y), the winning continuous effect B or C in which the winning result effect is finally performed is set (step S597), and the continuous notice setting process is ended. The continuous effect will be described later (see FIG. 60).

  If the AT right cannot be acquired in this game (step S596; N), a process for determining whether to continuously perform the lost effect is performed (step S598), and it is determined whether or not the execution of the lost consecutive effect is determined (step S599). If the execution of the continuous loss production is not determined (step S599; N), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. If it is decided to execute the continuous loss production (step S599; Y), the continuous continuous production B or C in which the final loss result production is performed is set (step S600), and the continuous notice setting process is terminated. To do. That is, the effect control device 70 may change from a game that may have stored an execution right (AT right) for notifying assist information related to a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, or a subsequent game to a plurality of games. A continuous production execution means capable of executing a continuous production (continuous production: equivalent to the second continuous production) is provided.

  The winning continuous effect is a confirmed effect that can recognize that the AT right has been acquired. Therefore, the effect control device 70 serves as a confirmed effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect (a winning continuous effect) in a game in which it is determined that the AT right is stored or a subsequent game. Here, the continuous effect (second continuous effect) is not executed except during the ART state, but this final effect (winning continuous effect) may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, a game is played with the expectation that a definite effect (a winning continuous effect) will be executed even in a specific state (transition chance state ST31) after the notification of assist information has ended. Can do.

  It should be noted that the execution of the present sign effect or the gusset sign effect (step S584; Y) may include the execution of a winning or losing continuous effect in the ART state. Further, when there is a continuous losing notice setting (step S590; Y), it may include a case where there is a continuous losing effect setting in the ART state. In this case, the losing continuous effect is notified of the winning of the special prize. Replace with production. Moreover, even if it is in the case of winning or winning continuous notice, it is possible to execute a continuous effect. In particular, when the losing continuous notice is being made, it is possible that the continuous effect can be executed.

  FIG. 58A shows a win continuous notice pattern which is an execution pattern of hit continuous notice, and FIG. 58B shows a lose continuous notice pattern which is an execution pattern of lose continuous notice. The continuous notice is composed of a sign production performed in the first few games and a continuous production performed in the second half games. The indication effect is an effect of changing the sound (stop sound or the like), the light emission mode (backlight 111, the frame light emitting device 7 or the like), the display mode of the image display device 3 or the like step by step every time the game is repeated.

  The continuous effect is an effect of a continuous story over a plurality of games, and a loss result effect or a hit result effect is performed as a result notification effect that is finally performed. In addition, there are three types of continuous production, A, B, and C, with different production contents (story etc.). System A is a special effect for the special prize, and is an effect performed only by the image display device 3. The B system is a common effect for the special winning and the AT state occurrence, and is an effect using the image display device 3 and the movable effect device 8. The C system is a special effect for the occurrence of the AT state, and is an effect performed only by the image display device 3. In addition, you may make it comprise by a continuous effect, without performing a sign effect.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), in the hit continuous notice pattern, the number of continuous notice games, which is the number of games for which continuous notice is executed, is 4 to 7 games, and the systems A and B are included as the series of continuous effects included respectively. There are a total of 8 patterns with 2 types of systems. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the lost continuous notice pattern includes 4 to 6 consecutive notice games, which are the number of games for which the continuous notice is executed, and the A system as a series of continuous effects included therein. There are a total of six types of patterns including two types of B and B.

  The execution patterns of 4 to 6 games with consecutive notice games are common and common to loses, and the result is not known until the final result notification effect. However, an effect suggesting the result may be performed during the continuous notice. In addition, the execution pattern of 7 consecutive notice games can be selected only when it is a win, and it can be recognized that the success pattern is a win when the continuous notice exceeds 6 games.

[AT precursor setting processing]
FIG. 59 shows AT precursor setting processing in the effect control processing shown in FIG. In this AT precursor process, it is first determined whether a bonus winning / carrying-over is in progress, that is, whether a special winning is won in the current game or a special winning flag is being carried over (step S601). If the bonus is being won / carrying over (step S601; Y), the AT precursor setting process is terminated.

  Further, if the bonus is not won or carried over (step S601; N), it is determined whether there is an AT right stock (step S602), and if there is an AT right stock (step S602; Y), the normal / precursor It is determined whether it is in the middle (step S603). Note that the normal / predictive state is the non-assist state ST50 or the predecessor game state ST52 in the effect control device 70. If the normal / precursor is not in progress (step S603; N), the AT precursor setting process is terminated. Thereby, at least in the specific state (transition chance state ST31) after the notification of the assist information is ended, the precursor effect (predetermined continuous effect) is not performed, and the game proceeds smoothly.

  Further, if it is normal / precursor (step S603; Y), it is determined whether the present precursor effect is being performed (step S604), and if it is the present precursor effect (step S604; Y), the AT precursor is set. The process ends. Further, when it is not under the present sign effect (step S604; N), it is determined whether the sign indication effect is being performed (step S605).

  If it is not during the harsh sign effect (step S605; N), the process proceeds to step S607. Further, when the gasse sign effect is being performed (step S605; Y), the setting related to the gasse sign is cleared (step S606). Thereby, it will be changed from the Gase sign production to the present sign production. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the present sign setting condition is satisfied (step S607). The sign setting condition is that the consecutive winning of the rare small role or the continuous establishment of the bell winning is not continued and the continuous notice is not executed. The condition that the continuous notice is not executed here is to prevent the expectation for the winning of the special prize from being attenuated by performing the precursor effect during the execution of the continuous notice. .

  If the present sign setting condition is not satisfied (step S607; N), the AT sign setting process ends. When the precursor setting conditions are satisfied (step S607; Y), the number of precursor games, which is the number of games that execute the precursor effect, is determined (step S608), and until the precursor game is digested. The precursor effect pattern is determined (step S609). Thereafter, the execution of the present sign effect is set (step S610), and the AT sign setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if there is no AT right stock (step S602; N), it is determined whether normal / precursor is in progress (step S611). If the normal / precursor is not in progress (step S611; N), the AT precursor setting process is terminated. As a result, at least in the specific state (transition chance state ST31) after the notification of the assist information is finished, the gasse sign effect is not executed, and the disappointment and loss of the player when falling to the normal gaming state ST10 is reduced. It becomes possible to do. There is also an advantage that the game proceeds smoothly. Further, in the normal gaming state ST10 (non-assist state ST50), even if the AT right cannot be obtained, the feeling of disappointment or loss is not so great, and the player's expectation is felt by executing the continuation effect (prediction effect). It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by effectively playing.

  Further, when it is normal / precursor (step S611; Y), it is determined whether or not the present precursor effect is being performed (step S612), and when the present precursor effect is being performed (step S612; Y), the AT precursor is set. The process ends. Further, when it is not under the present sign effect (step S612; N), it is determined whether the sign indication effect is being performed (step S613).

  If it is during the harsh sign effect (step S613; Y), the AT sign setting process ends. Further, when it is not during the gasse warning effect (step S613; N), a gasse warning execution determination process is performed (step S614), and it is determined whether execution of the gasse warning effect is determined (step S615).

  In the Gase precursor execution determination process (step S614), execution of the Gase precursor effect is determined based on the AT lottery mode, the winning combination, etc. For example, in the low probability that the possibility of acquiring the AT right is low In addition, the execution of the gasse precursor effect is determined with a higher probability than in the high accuracy or ultra high accuracy, the expectation for acquiring the AT right is increased, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the execution of the gasse sign production is determined with a higher probability after the winning of a rare role with a high possibility of acquiring AT rights (AT stock expectation), and the interest of the game is further improved. In addition, if the advance notice is being executed, the execution of the advance notice will not be decided when the advance notice is being executed, and the expectation for the winning of the special prize will be reduced. Is preventing.

  Then, if execution of the gasse sign effect is not determined (step S615; N), the AT sign setting process ends. In addition, when execution of the gasse sign effect is decided (step S615; Y), the number of gaze sign games, which is the number of games for which the gasse sign effect is executed, is decided (step S616), and the gaze sign game is consumed. A gasse sign effect pattern is determined (step S617). Thereafter, the execution of the gaze precursor effect is set (step S618), and the AT precursor setting process is terminated. That is, the effect control device 70 may change from a game that may have stored an execution right (AT right) for notifying assist information related to a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, or a subsequent game to a plurality of games. A continuous production execution means capable of executing a predetermined continuous production (prediction production: equivalent to the first continuous production) is provided.

  FIG. 60A shows a real sign effect pattern that is an execution pattern of the real sign effect, and FIG. 60B shows a gase sign effect pattern that is an execution pattern of the gaze sign effect. The precursor effect is composed of a predictor effect, a special effect, and a continuous effect. In addition, there is a case where only the predictive effect is produced in the Gase sign effect. The sign effect is a lively effect, and the sound (stop sound, etc.), the light emission mode (backlight 111, the frame light emission device 7, etc.), and the display mode (character appearance, etc.) of the image display device 3 are different from usual. It is an effect as an aspect.

  In addition, the special performance is performed by moving to a special stage (for example, the background is different) different from the normal performance. The continuous effect is an effect of a continuous story over a plurality of games, and an effect of notifying the presence or absence of transition to the AT (ART) state is performed as a result notification effect that is finally performed. In the sign effect, it is possible to execute a continuous effect of the B system that is a common effect for the special prize and the occurrence of the AT state and the C system that is a dedicated effect for the occurrence of the AT state. In addition, in the game displayed as “none”, no effect related to the sign effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the foreplay effect pattern includes 11, 13, 15, 17 or 19 games that are the number of games for which the foreplay effect is executed. There are 11 different patterns. Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the gasse sign effect pattern, the number of gasse sign games, which is the number of games for which the gasse sign effect is executed, is 13, 15 or 17, and the execution mode of the effects is different. There are different types of patterns.

  There are patterns in which the number of precursor games is 13, 15, and 17 games, which are the same execution modes for both the foreplay effect and the gasse sign effect, and in these patterns, the result until the result notification effect that is finally performed is obtained. I don't know. However, an effect suggesting the result may be performed in the middle of the sign effect.

  In addition, the patterns of 11 and 19 game signs can be selected only in the case of the prelude effect, and in this case, it is possible to recognize that it is the predecessor effect from the timing of shifting to the continuous effect. That is, this sign effect is a confirmed effect capable of recognizing that the AT right has been acquired. Therefore, the effect control device 70 serves as a confirmed effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect in a game in which it is determined that the AT right is stored or a game thereafter.

  As described with reference to FIG. 57, in the ART state, the winning continuous effect B or C (step S597) or the lost continuous effect B or C (step S600) is set depending on whether or not the AT right is acquired. These continuous effects are the same effects as the continuous effects in FIG. In this case, the sign effect and the special effect are not performed, but the sign effect and the special effect may be performed similarly to the sign effect pattern.

  Here, during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), the precursor effect is not performed, but this final effect may be performed. Further, not only the final effect but also the sign effect may be performed. In other words, it may be determined not to determine whether or not there is a transition chance (step S603). By doing in this way, even if it is the specific state (transition chance state ST31) after notification of assist information is complete | finished, a game can be played in anticipation that a fixed effect will be performed.

  Basically, the sign effect can be executed in the normal / pre-sign (non-assist state ST50), but the game state in which the sign effect can be executed may be set in more detail. For example, in the normal state that is neither the AT state, the RT state, nor the ART state, execution of the warning effect may be prohibited during the execution of the continuous notice, or the continuous notice is being executed in the normal state. It may be possible to perform a prelude production.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display units (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with the variation display, When a game corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery is derived as a result of the game stopped based on the variable display stop operation, the slot machine where the winning of the winning combination is established has a predetermined start Specific state generating means (game control device 50) capable of generating a specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state until a predetermined end result is derived from Assist information notifying means (production control device 70) capable of notifying assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined acquisition condition The execution right storage means (production control device 70) capable of storing the execution right for causing the assist information notification means to notify the assist information based on the fact that the execution right is established, and the execution right are stored. Continuation effect execution means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a predetermined continuation effect (prediction effect, continuous effect) over a plurality of games from a possible game or a subsequent game, and assist The information notifying means notifies at least the assist information for deriving the start outcome and the assist information for avoiding the derivation of the end outcome, and the continuous effect executing means notifies the assist information when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. In the specific state after the notification of the assist information by the means is completed, the predetermined continuation effect (prediction effect, continuous effect) is not executed.

  Here, the game with the possibility of memorizing the execution right is, for example, when the specific right is internally won for the specific combination when the execution right can be acquired with a predetermined probability. It is a game. “Execution rights can be acquired with a predetermined probability” includes a case where acquisition is determined based on a lottery result or a case where the execution right can be acquired by applying a pushing order. The predetermined continuation effect is an effect that is executed over a plurality of games to notify that there is a possibility that the execution right for notifying the assist information is stored. What is called and what is called continuous production. This precursor effect includes a present precursor effect that is executed when the execution right is stored and a gasse precursor effect that is executed when the execution right is not stored. In addition, the continuous effects include a hit continuous effect that is executed when the execution right is stored and a lost continuous effect that is executed when the execution right is not stored.

  Further, the predetermined continuation effect includes a second continuation effect (continuous effect) in which the first continuation effect (prediction effect) and the first continuation effect are different from each other. In the normal state, the first continuation effect (prediction effect) is executed, while in the specific state in which the assist information notification means (effect control device 70) is executing the second continuation effect (continuous effect). Will be executed.

  Also, a special state generating means (game control) capable of generating a special state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the special role is won in the internal lottery and the outcome corresponding to the special role is derived. Device 50), and a continuous advance notice that can be performed across multiple games based on winning a special role or an overlapping target role that may be won in duplicate in the internal lottery. A notice execution means (effect control device 70), and the continuation effect execution means is a specific state in which notification of assist information by the normal state and / or assist information notification means (effect control device 70) is being executed. However, when the continuous notice is being executed, the predetermined continuation effect (prediction effect, continuous effect) is not executed.

  In addition, the game includes a confirmed effect executing means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect in a game in which execution rights are determined to be stored or a game thereafter, and the confirmed effect executing means includes assist information. Even in the specific state after the notification of the assist information by the notification means (the effect control device 70) ends, the predetermined confirmed effect is executed.

  Here, the predetermined confirmed effect is an effect for notifying that the memory of the execution right has been confirmed, and is, for example, a sign effect or a hit continuous effect that is executed when the execution right is stored.

[Security monitoring processing]
FIG. 61 shows the security monitoring process in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this security monitoring process, first, a medal insertion fraud handling process (step S621) for performing a corresponding error notification based on reception of a medal insertion error command is performed. Next, a radio wave fraud countermeasure process (step S622) for performing a corresponding error notification based on reception of the radio wave fraud command is performed.

  Then, based on reception of a door opening or closing command transmitted with opening / closing of the front frame 2, a corresponding error notification and door opening handling processing for performing manual symbol alignment assistance (step S623) is performed, and a medal full error command is received. The medal full error handling process (step S624) for performing the corresponding error notification based on the above is performed. Thereafter, a medal payout error handling process (step S625) for performing a corresponding error notification based on reception of the payout switch error command is performed, and the security monitoring process is terminated.

(Door opening handling process)
FIG. 62 shows door opening handling processing in the security monitoring processing shown in FIG. In this door opening handling process, it is first determined whether or not a door opening command has been received (step S631). If not received (step S631; N), the process proceeds to step S638. When the door opening command is received (step S631; Y), the start of door opening notification is set (step S632). The door opening notification notifies that the front frame 2 is open, and is performed by voice, display, light emission, or the like.

  Next, it is checked whether or not the door is first opened since the power is turned on (step S633). If it is not the first door opened (step S634; N), the door opening handling process is terminated. Thereby, unnecessary light emission such that the winning line light emitting unit 112 emits light each time the front frame 2 is opened during business can be prevented.

  If the door is first opened after the power is turned on (step S634; Y), the value of the light emission line setting switch is acquired (step S635), and lighting of the winning line light emission unit corresponding to the set value is set (step S635). S636). Thereafter, the backlight of the portion not corresponding to the lit winning line light emitting unit is turned off (step S637), and it is determined whether a door closing command is received (step S638). It should be noted that the portion of the backlight 111 that does not correspond to the lit winning line light emitting unit 112 may be dimmed rather than extinguished.

  If the door closing command has not been received (step S638; N), the door opening handling process ends. When the door closing command is received (step S638; Y), the end of door opening notification is set (step S639), and the winning line light emitting unit is turned off (step S640). And the all lighting command of all the backlights is transmitted (step S641), and the door opening corresponding | compatible process is complete | finished. Thus, by returning to the lighting state before opening based on closing of the front frame 2, the winning line light emitting unit 112 emits necessary light only when the symbols are aligned with the symbol stop line, and unnecessary paying line light emitting unit 112 is unnecessary. Can be prevented.

  That is, the production control device 70 causes the line light emitting unit (winning line light emitting unit 112) to emit light based on the detection of the opening of the front door (front frame 2) by the opening detection means (game control device 50). It makes possible light emission control means. Further, the light emission line setting switch 112a serves as a light emission setting unit for setting a line light emitting unit to emit light by the light emission control unit.

  FIG. 63 shows how the manual symbol alignment assist is performed when the front frame 2 is first opened after the slot machine 1 is powered on. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the front frame 2 is closed, a predetermined number (for example, three) of symbols on the reel 6 via the symbol display window 5, that is, a total of nine 3 × 3 symbols. The design is visible. Here, for convenience, only “7” forming a specific symbol and the joint serving as the reference portion 6e are displayed. Further, in the region that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 5, the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 is visible in the region other than the portion where each reel 6 is located.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 3, a winning line light emitting unit 112 indicating an effective line corresponding to the established winning is provided in a portion visible through the symbol display window 5 on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110. Yes. In addition, a backlight 111 that can illuminate each symbol located on the effective line of the reel 6 is provided on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 and at a position behind the reel 6.

  In a state where the slot machine 1 is turned on and no game is played, the winning line light emitting unit 112 is turned off and all the backlights 111 are turned on as shown in FIG. When the front frame 2 is opened, the winning line light emission unit 112 corresponding to the setting of the light emission line setting switch 112a is turned on as manual symbol alignment assistance as shown in FIG. Further, the portion of the backlight 111 that does not correspond to the winning line light emitting unit 112 is turned off. Here, the setting of the light emission line setting switch 112a is set to “middle stage”, and the winning line light emitting unit 112 and the backlight 111 corresponding to the middle line are turned on. As the front frame 2 is opened, a sound “door is open!” Is output as a door opening notification.

  By performing such manual symbol alignment assist, when the reels 6 are manually rotated to align a desired symbol on the symbol stop line, the position of the symbol stop line becomes easy to understand. It becomes easy to arrange a predetermined pattern in a line. In addition, by turning on only the winning line light emitting unit 112 and the backlight 111 for aligning symbols, it becomes obvious at a glance which symbol stop line should have a predetermined symbol. Further, by dimming or extinguishing the backlight 111 that does not correspond to the symbol stop line in which symbols are arranged, it is possible to make the light emission of the winning line light emitting unit 112 conspicuous, and the position of the symbol stop line becomes easy to understand. In addition, you may make it light-emit only any one of the winning line light emission part 112 and the backlight 111 corresponding to the symbol stop line which aligns a symbol.

  Further, by switching the light emission line setting switch 112a, it is possible to turn on the winning line light emission unit 112 and the backlight 111 corresponding to the right lowering line or the left lowering line. In this way, since it is possible to set which winning line light emitting unit 112 emits light, it is possible to easily change the symbol stop line in which predetermined symbols are aligned. Accordingly, it is possible to assist the operation of aligning a desired symbol with the right-down line or the left-down line in addition to the middle line. In other words, the effect control device 70 serves as a manual operation assisting unit that assists a manual operation for rotating a plurality of reels 6 so that a desired symbol is arranged on the symbol stop line.

  The variable display device 100 includes a positioning unit including a positioning line 113a displayed on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 and a positioning display unit 113b displayed on the reel base member 101 as a guide for aligning specific symbols. 113 is provided. Then, by manually rotating each reel 6 so that the reference portion 6e of the reel 6 is aligned with the positioning line 113a and the positioning display portion 113b, a specific symbol “7” can be easily aligned with the middle stage line. It can be done.

  Even when a specific symbol is aligned with the middle line using the positioning unit 113, the efficiency of work can be improved by performing manual symbol alignment assist for lighting the winning line light emitting unit 112 and the backlight 111. it can. As described above, the positioning unit 113 may be provided at a position corresponding to the lower right line and the lower left line in addition to the position corresponding to the middle line. Further, a moving mechanism that enables the positioning unit 113 to operate along the circumferential direction of the reel 6 may be provided, and the positioning unit 113 may automatically move in accordance with the switching of the light emission line setting switch 112a. .

  Alternatively, the predetermined pay line light emission unit 112 (for example, the middle line) may be turned on without providing the light emission line setting switch 112a. Further, both the manual operation assisting means constituted by the positioning part 113 and the reference part 6e and the manual operation assisting means constituted by the winning line light emitting part 112 and the backlight 111 are provided. You may make it provide only. Also, the operation of aligning the reels 6 by manual operation is assisted, but for example, when the store clerk operates a button, the reels 6 are operated so that the symbols set on the preset symbol stop line are automatically aligned. You may make it provide the mechanism to do.

  From the above, the variable display device 100 having a plurality of reels 6 capable of variable display of a plurality of symbols, a front open concave chamber housing the variable display device 100, and opening / closing on the front of the housing In a slot machine 1 including a front door (front frame 2) provided with a window portion (symbol display window 5) that is supported in such a manner that the front portions of the plurality of reels 6 can be visually recognized, the front surface of the plurality of reels 6 is provided. A line light emitting part (winning line light emitting part 112) provided along a symbol stop line located across the part, an opening detection means (game control device 50) capable of detecting the opening of the front door, On the basis of the detection of the opening of the front door by the opening detection means, there is provided a light emission control means (effect control device 70) capable of causing the line light emitting section to emit light.

  Here, the symbol stop line (symbol alignment line) is a virtual line that connects symbols that can be visually recognized from the window among the symbols of the reels 6 for which the variable display is stopped. It may be the same as the effective line for determining the formation of the winning combination, or may not match.

  Further, a plurality of line light emitting units (winning line light emitting unit 112) are provided along each of the plurality of symbol stop lines, and the light emission control means (production control device 70) is a specific symbol among the plurality of symbol stop lines. The line light emitting unit corresponding to the stop line is caused to emit light.

  Moreover, the light emission setting means (light emission line setting switch 112a) for setting the line light emission part (winning line light emission part 112) to light-emit by the light emission control means (effect control apparatus 70) will be provided.

  Further, the reel 6 can transmit light, and the backlight 111 that can irradiate the front part facing the window of the reel 6 from the inside of the reel 6 and the control of the backlight 111 can be performed. Backlight control means (effect control device 70), and the backlight control means is at least a backlight when the light emission control means (effect control device 70) causes the line light emitting unit (winning line light emitting unit 112) to emit light. A part of the light 111 is dimmed or turned off.

  The backlight control means (effect control device 70) is a portion of the backlight 111 corresponding to the symbol stop line corresponding to the line light emission portion (winning line light emission portion 112) that the light emission control means (effect control device 70) emits light. In other words, the portion of the backlight 111 that does not correspond to the symbol stop line is dimmed or extinguished.

  Further, the light emission control means (the effect control device 70) is configured so that the line light emission unit (winning line light emission unit 112) is detected when the front door (front frame 2) is first opened after the slot machine 1 is turned on. ) Is emitted.

  In addition, the light emission control means (production control device 70) is configured to detect the line light emission unit (winning line light emission unit 112) based on the fact that the opening detection means (game control device 50) does not detect the opening of the front door (front frame 2). ) Is terminated.

(Door opening handling process)
FIG. 64 shows a modification of the door opening handling process shown in FIG. In the following description, the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly changed portions will be described. In this door opening handling process, the processes of steps S651 and S652 are performed instead of the processes of steps S633 to S636. In addition, the process of step S653 is performed instead of the process of step S640.

  That is, the manual symbol alignment assist is performed even if the door is not opened for the first time after the power is turned on. Further, the light emission line setting switch 112a is not provided, and lighting of the winning line light emission unit 112 at a preset position (middle stage) is set (step S652). Further, when the front frame 2 is opened, the current emission state of the pay line light emitting unit 112 is stored (step S651), and when the front frame 2 is closed, the light emission state of the pay line light emitting unit 112 is determined based on the stored information. It is made to return (step S653). As a result, the manual symbol alignment assist can be performed without any problems even after the game is played after the power is turned on (for example, during business).

  When a game is won and a winning is achieved, the winning line light emitting unit 112 along the effective line in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning are arranged is turned on to notify the winning. When the front frame 2 is opened in this state, the light emission state of the winning line light emitting unit 112 along the effective line in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the winnings are aligned is stored to finish the light emission, and the winning line light emission corresponding to the middle line is performed. The part 112 lights up. When the front frame 2 is closed, the winning line light emitting unit 112 corresponding to the middle line is turned off, and the winning line light emitting unit 112 is turned on in the stored light emitting state. The positioning unit 113 may be provided only at a position corresponding to the symbol stop line corresponding to the winning line light emitting unit 112 that emits light when the front frame 2 is opened.

  That is, the light emission control means (effect control device 70) stores the light emission state of the line light emission portion (winning line light emission portion 112) before the front door (front frame 2) is opened (effect control device 70). When the front door is opened, only the line light emitting portion corresponding to the specific symbol stop line among the plurality of symbol stop lines is caused to emit light, and the light emission state stored in the light emission state storage means when the front door is closed. It is supposed to be restored.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the slot machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The part will be described. The slot machine of this modification is configured so that freeze effects can be distributed and executed in the game.

[Reel rotation start processing]
In the slot machine of this modification, the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 65 is performed instead of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation start process, the process from step S661 to S663 is performed instead of the normal freeze process (step S65).

  When it is not the operation-intermediate freeze (step S64; N), it is determined whether it is a short freeze (step S661). Here, the short freeze is a freeze effect with a freeze time of less than 60 seconds. If it is this short freeze (step S661; Y), short freeze processing is performed (step S662), and when the short freeze ends, the number of reel rotation steps is set to infinity (reel rotation start is set) (step S67). ). The short freeze process (step S662) is the same process as the normal freeze process (step S65).

  On the other hand, if it is not a short freeze (step S661; N), a long freeze process is performed (step S663), and when the long freeze ends, the reel rotation step number is set to infinity (reel rotation start is set) (step S67). ). In the long freeze process (step S663), a process related to the dispersion of freeze effects is performed. In this way, it is possible to distribute the freeze effect only in the case of the long freeze, so the annoyance can be reduced for the freeze effect that is executed over a period longer than the length that the player feels annoyed. A short freeze production will allow the player to have a solid experience.

  FIG. 66 shows a break in the freeze time for the long freeze effect. The period from the start of the freeze time to a predetermined time (t1 to t4) is a dispersible period (first half freeze period). This period is a period during which the player can make a selection to distribute the freeze effect in the game by performing a predetermined selection operation. In this dispersible period, three periods of a first period (t1 to t2), a second period (t2 to t3), and a third period (t3 to t4) are determined, and the player can perform a predetermined selection operation. The dispersion mode (dispersion freeze setting) of the freeze effect is made different depending on the period of time.

  The predetermined selection operation may be, for example, an operation of an operation unit input to the game control device 50 such as the start lever 21, the max bet button 17, the reel stop button 24, etc. It is preferable that That is, since the start lever 21 and the reel stop button 24 may be continuously operated for the progress of the game, the freeze effect is dispersed even when the player does not intend to use these inputs as predetermined selection operations. There is a possibility that. However, if the operation input of the Max Bet button 17 where the game does not proceed even if operated during the game is a predetermined selection operation, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the freeze effect is unintentionally dispersed. .

  Further, the period from the end of the dispersible period to the end of the freeze time (t4 to t5) is a non-dispersible period (second half freeze period), and the dispersion of the freeze effect cannot be selected during this period. In this modified example, it is possible to select the distribution of the freeze effect in the immediate freeze in which the freeze effect is performed in the game in which the freeze effect is determined, and the game after several games from the game in which the freeze effect is determined to be executed. In the case of a freeze effect in the case of a stand-by freeze that performs a freeze effect (excluding the operation-mediated freeze effect here), the selection of dispersion cannot be made (all periods cannot be dispersed). Of course, in the case of standby freeze, it is also possible to select a dispersion of freeze effects.

[Long freeze treatment]
FIG. 67 shows a long freeze process in the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. In this long freeze process, first, a reel effect operation process (step S671) for effecting the reel 6 in a predetermined rotation mode (low speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) in the selected freeze effect is performed. That is, the game control device 50 serves as an effect variation display means capable of causing the variation display unit (reel 6) to perform a predetermined effect variation display while the freeze state is occurring. And it is determined whether it is during the dispersible period which can accept predetermined | prescribed selection operation of the player for distributing a freezing effect (step S672).

  If it is not during this dispersible period (step S672; N), it is determined whether the value of the freeze timer for managing the freeze time is 0, that is, whether the freeze time has expired (step S689). If the value of the freeze timer is not 0 (step S689; N), the process returns to step S671. If the value of the freeze timer is 0 (step S689; Y), a freeze end command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S690), and the process proceeds to step S684.

  On the other hand, if it is during the dispersible period (step S672; Y), an operation instruction command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S673). In the effect control device 70, based on the reception of the operation instruction command, the image display device 3 performs an effect such as a display for prompting a predetermined selection operation. Thereafter, it is determined whether the dispersible period has ended (step S674). If the dispersible period has ended (step S674; Y), the process proceeds to step S689. If the distributable period has not ended (step S674; N), it is determined whether there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation (step S675).

  If there is no operation input based on the predetermined selection operation (step S675; N), the process returns to step S671. Further, when there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation (step S675; Y), it is determined whether or not it is in the first period (step S676). If it is during the first period (step S676; Y), the first dispersion freeze is set as the dispersion freeze setting, which is the dispersion mode of the freeze effect, and the suspension timer until the freeze suspension is set (step S677), and step S681 is performed. Migrate to If it is not during the first period (step S676; N), it is determined whether it is during the second period (step S678).

  If it is during the second period (step S678; Y), the second dispersion freeze is set as the dispersion freeze setting, an interruption timer until the freeze interruption is set (step S679), and the process proceeds to step S681. Further, when it is not during the second period (step S678; N), that is, when it is during the third period, the third dispersion freeze is set as the dispersion freeze setting, and the suspension timer until the suspension of the freeze is set (step S680). Then, a reel effect operation process is performed in which the reel 6 is effected in a predetermined rotation manner in the dispersed manner of the selected freeze effect (step S681).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the interruption timer has reached 0, that is, the freeze interruption timing has come (step S682). Note that the value of the interruption timer is updated by -1 in the timer update process (step S28). If the value of the interruption timer is not 0 (step S682; N), the process returns to the reel effect operation process (step S681). When the value of the interruption timer becomes 0 (step S682; Y), a freeze effect switching command corresponding to the dispersion freeze setting is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S683). Then, the reel effect operation is stopped (step S684), and the long freeze processing is ended.

  Thereby, the effect variation display of the reel 6 is finished, and the normal variation display is set (S67 in FIG. 65). Thereafter, the stop operation becomes valid and a stop valid command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (S69 in FIG. 65). In this way, when the freeze state is interrupted, the effect change display is ended, so that it is possible to prevent obstructing the pressing operation of the reel 6 for which the stop operation is effective.

[Reel rotation stop processing]
Further, a reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. 68 is performed instead of the reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation stop process, steps S691 to S695 are performed as a process related to the dispersion of the freeze effect. Note that the processing of steps S100 to S107 and S109 to S111 regarding the penalty freeze is not performed, but the processing regarding the penalty freeze may be performed.

  After transmitting a reel stop command corresponding to the reel stop information (step S99), it is determined whether there is a dispersion freeze setting (step S691). If there is no distributed freeze setting (step S691; N), it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). When there is a dispersion freeze setting (step S691; Y), it is determined whether it is a stop invalidation timing for resuming the freeze effect (step S692).

  If it is not stop invalidation timing (step S692; N), it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). If it is the stop invalidation timing (step S692; Y), an invalid timer corresponding to the distributed freeze setting and the reel stop information is set (step S693), and it is determined whether the invalid timer has become 0 (step S694). ).

  As a result, the freeze effect can be resumed with the stop operation, and the freeze state can be fully experienced by restarting the freeze effect in this way. In addition, in the resumed freeze effect, the effect variation display (such as low-speed rotation and reverse rotation) of the reel 6 is not performed, and it is difficult to visually recognize the stop symbol due to the second variation of the reel 6 once stopped. I am trying not to. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the subsequent game progress is delayed. Furthermore, the time to confirm the stopped symbol can be secured by putting the reel 6 once stopped into the frozen state in the stopped state. However, the effect variation display may be performed on the reels 6 other than the reel 6 stopped by the stop operation.

  A value corresponding to the freeze time of the resumed freeze effect is set in the invalid timer, the value is updated by −1 in the timer update process (step S28), and the invalid timer value becomes zero. Until the next stop operation is invalid. Thereafter, when the invalid timer becomes 0 (step S694; Y), a distributed delimiter command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S695), and it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). ). If the reels are not completely stopped (step S108; N), the process returns to step S91. If the reels are all stopped (step S108; Y), the reel rotation stop process is terminated.

  In FIG. 69, the execution mode of the freeze effect at each dispersion freeze setting is shown. FIG. 69A shows an example in which the dispersion of the freeze effect is not selected. When the game is started with the game start operation, a freeze effect is started, and a dispersible period in which the dispersion of the freeze effect can be selected is started (t11). If the player does not perform a predetermined selection operation during this dispersible period (t11 to t12), the dispersion of the freeze effect is not set, and the freeze effect continues until the second half of the freeze period elapses (t13). Is done. Then, the stop operation can be performed at the end of the second half freeze period (t13), and the game is ended by performing the first stop operation (t14), the second stop operation (t15), and the third stop operation (t16).

  FIG. 69B shows a case where there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect during the first period. When the game is started with the game start operation, the freeze effect is started, and a dispersible period in which the dispersion of the freeze effect can be selected is started (t21). In the first period (t21 to t23) of the dispersible period, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect and there is an operation input based on this (t22), the dispersion freeze setting is set. A first dispersion freeze is selected.

  In the first dispersion freeze, the freeze effect is continued until the first period elapses (t23), and the first stop operation becomes effective after the first period elapses (t23). And if a player performs stop operation, the dispersion | distribution freeze production period 1-1 which is the freeze production of predetermined time will be started (t24). When this distributed freeze effect period 1-1 elapses, the second stop operation becomes possible (t25).

  When the player performs a stop operation, a distributed freeze effect period 1-2, which is a freeze effect for a predetermined time, is started (t26). Thereafter, when the distributed freeze effect period 1-2 elapses, the third stop operation becomes possible (t27), and when the player performs a stop operation, the distributed freeze effect period 1-3, which is a freeze effect for a predetermined time, is started ( t28). When the distributed freeze effect period 1-3 elapses, the game ends (t29).

  It should be noted that the total value of the freeze effect time set in the first dispersion freeze, that is, the first period (t21 to t23), the dispersion freeze effect period 1-1 (t24 to t25), the dispersion freeze effect period 1-2 ( The total value of the times of t26 to t27) and the dispersion freeze effect period 1-3 (t28 to t29) is the same as the time of the freeze effect (t11 to t13) when the freeze effect is not dispersed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing faster when the freeze state is interrupted, and to provide a player with a fair game.

  FIG. 69 (c) shows a case where there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect during the second period. When the game is started with the game start operation, the freeze effect is started, and a dispersible period in which the dispersion of the freeze effect can be selected is started (t31). In the second period (t32 to t34), the player performs a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect, and when there is an operation input based on this (t33), the dispersion freeze setting is set. A second dispersion freeze is selected.

  In the second dispersion freeze, the freeze effect is continued until the second period elapses (t34), and the first stop operation becomes effective after the second period elapses (t34). And if a player performs stop operation, the dispersion | distribution freeze production period 2-1 which is the freeze production of predetermined time will be started (t35). When this distributed freeze effect period 2-1 elapses, the second stop operation becomes possible (t36), and when the player performs a stop operation, a distributed freeze effect period 2-2 that is a freeze effect for a predetermined time is started ( t37). Thereafter, when the distributed freeze effect period 2-2 elapses, the third stop operation becomes possible (t38), and when the player performs the stop operation, the game ends (t39).

  It should be noted that the total value of the freeze effect time set in the second dispersion freeze, that is, the first period and the second period (t31 to t34), the dispersion freeze effect period 2-1 (t35 to t36) and the dispersion freeze effect period The total value of time 2-2 (t37 to t38) is the same as the time (t11 to t13) of the freeze effect when the freeze effect is not dispersed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing faster when the freeze state is interrupted, and to provide a player with a fair game.

  FIG. 69D shows a case where there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect during the third period. When the game is started with the game start operation, the freeze effect is started, and a dispersible period in which the dispersion of the freeze effect can be selected is started (t41). In the third period (t42 to t44) of the dispersible period, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect and there is an operation input based on this (t43), the dispersion freeze setting is set. A third dispersion freeze is selected.

  In the third dispersion freeze, the freeze effect is continued until the elapse of the third period (t44), and when the third period elapses, the first to third stop operations become effective (t44). When the player performs the first stop operation (t45), the second stop operation (t46), and the third stop operation (t47), the distributed freeze effect period 3 that is a freeze effect for a predetermined time is started (t47). ) When this distributed freeze effect period 3 elapses, the game ends (t48).

  In addition, the total value of the time of the freeze effect set in the third dispersion freeze, that is, the time of the first period, the second period and the third period (t41 to t44) and the time of the dispersion freeze effect period 3 (t47 to t48) The total value is the same as the time (t11 to t13) of the freeze effect when the freeze effect is not dispersed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing faster when the freeze state is interrupted, and to provide a player with a fair game.

  As described above, the freeze state is interrupted by an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation, and the change display can be stopped, so that the player feels bothered by the occurrence of the freeze state. This can be prevented. Further, by setting the dispersion mode of the freeze effect according to the period during which the predetermined selection operation has been performed, it becomes possible to select the distribution mode according to the player's preference. In addition, by dividing the dispersible period into the first to third periods, and allowing the stop operation after waiting for the end of the period during which the predetermined selection operation was performed, the dispersion freeze effect period set thereafter Time values and effect data can be set in advance, and the control burden can be reduced. By setting a dispersible period during which the freeze state can be interrupted, game characteristics are imparted to the interruption, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In addition, it is good also as a dispersion | distribution aspect according to the said timing which interrupts a freezing effect at the arbitrary timings which there existed operation input, without dividing | segmenting a dispersible period into the 1st-3rd period. For example, the remaining time of the freeze effect is equally divided into two or three so as to be performed for each stop operation, or the remaining freeze effect is executed after all stop operations are completed. Further, the freeze effect may be terminated when there is an operation input.

  That is, the game control device 50 serves as a freeze state interruption means that can interrupt the freeze state based on a predetermined operation input during the occurrence of the freeze state. Further, the game control device 50 serves as an operation validation means for validating the stop operation based on the suspension of the freeze state.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display sections (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and a lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with a variation display. In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of variable display units so that a symbol combination mode according to the result of the internal lottery can be derived based on the stop operation of the variable display, the stop operation is predetermined based on the result of the internal lottery Freeze state generation means (game control device 50) capable of generating a freeze state that is invalid for a period of time, and the freeze state is interrupted based on a predetermined operation input during the generation of the freeze state Freeze state interrupting means (game control device 50) that can be made to operate, and operation enabling means (game control device) that makes the stop operation effective based on the interruption of the freeze state So that the includes a 50), the.

  Here, the predetermined operation input is an operation of the start lever 21, the bet button (max bet button 17), the stop button (reel stop button 24), or the like.

  The freeze state generating means (game control device 50) is configured to resume the interrupted freeze state based on the fact that the stop operation that has been enabled by the operation enabling means (game control device 50) has been performed. Will be.

  Further, the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) is the same as the case where the freeze state period is not interrupted even when the freeze state is interrupted by the freeze state interrupting means (game control device 50). The freeze state is resumed so as to reach the period.

  In addition, the freeze state interruption means (game control device 50) is configured to interrupt the freeze state when an operation input is made within a preset valid period in the freeze state.

  In addition, it is provided with effect change display means (game control device 50) capable of causing the change display section (reel 6) to perform predetermined effect change display during occurrence of the freeze state. When the freeze state is interrupted by the means (the game control device 50), the effect variation display is ended to shift to the normal variation display.

  Further, the effect change display means (game control device 50) is configured not to restart the effect change display even when the freeze state is restarted.

  The freeze state generating means (game control device 50) can generate a plurality of types of freeze states having different lengths, and the freeze state interrupting means (game control device 50) has a freeze state longer than a predetermined length. If this occurs, the freeze state can be interrupted.

[Freeze production process]
The effect control device 70 performs a freeze effect process shown in FIG. 70 in place of the freeze effect process shown in FIG. In this freeze effect process, if it is not an operation-freeze freeze (step S244), it is determined whether it is a short freeze (step S701). Here, the short freeze is a freeze effect with a freeze time of less than 60 seconds.

  If this is a short freeze (step S701; Y), a short freeze effect process is performed (step S702), and the freeze effect process is terminated. The short freeze effect process (step S702) is the same process as the normal freeze effect process (step S245). On the other hand, when it is not a short freeze (step S701; N), a long freeze effect process is performed (step S703), and a freeze effect process is complete | finished. In the long freeze effect process (step S703), a process related to the setting of the effect accompanying the dispersion of the freeze effect is performed.

[Long freeze production processing]
FIG. 71 shows a long freeze effect process in the freeze effect process shown in FIG. In this long freeze effect process, first, it is determined whether or not an operation suggestion command transmitted in the dispersible period has been received (step S711). If this operation suggestion command has not been received (step S711; N), the process proceeds to step S713.

  When an operation suggestion command is received (step S711; Y), an operation suggestion notification is executed (step S712). The operation suggestion notification is, for example, a display for prompting a predetermined selection operation for dispersing the freeze effect on the image display device 3 or a display for notifying which of the first to third periods is performed. It is.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a freeze switching command including information related to the set distributed freeze setting and transmitted at the timing of interrupting the freeze effect from the start of the game has been received (step S713). When this freeze switching command is received (step S713; Y), the dispersion freeze effect corresponding to the set dispersion freeze setting is set (step S714), the freeze effect is terminated (step S716), and the long freeze effect is set. The process ends. That is, a special display effect that is a display effect that can be executed in the freeze effect is interrupted when the freeze state is interrupted.

  On the other hand, if the freeze switching command has not been received (step S713; N), it is determined whether a freeze end command transmitted at the end of the freeze effect has been received (step S715). If the freeze end command has not been received (step S715; N), the process returns to step S711. When the freeze end command is received (step S715; Y), the freeze effect is ended (step S716), and the long freeze effect process is ended.

  FIG. 72 shows an execution pattern of a 60-second freeze effect in the slot machine of this modification. Four types of freeze effects A to D are prepared for the 60-second freeze effect. Freeze effects A to C can be selected as immediate freeze that performs freeze effects in a game for which execution of freeze effects has been determined, and freeze effect D can be selected as a game several games after the game for which execution of freeze effects has been determined. This is a freeze effect that can be selected only in a standby freeze (where the operation-mediated freeze effect is excluded).

  Also, the freeze effect A can be selected only in the normal game state, and the freeze effect B can be selected only in the specific game state. These are effects that do not involve the action of the accessory (movable effect device 8). The freeze effects C and D can be selected in either the normal game state or the specific game state, and are effects accompanied by the action of the accessory (movable effect device 8).

  In the freeze effects A to C, four types of patterns are prepared according to the dispersion freeze setting. In the case of standby freeze, since the dispersion of the freeze effect cannot be selected, the freeze effect D has only one type of pattern. Pattern 1 is an execution pattern when the distributed freeze setting is not performed, and pattern 2 is an execution pattern when the first distributed freeze is set. Pattern 3 is an execution pattern when the second distributed freeze is set, and pattern 4 is an execution pattern when the third distributed freeze is set.

  In FIG. 73, the execution mode of the freeze effect in each execution pattern in the freeze effect C is shown. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), in the pattern 1, a character A viewpoint movie that is an effect mainly of the character A is displayed in the first period in the dispersible period, and the character B is mainly used in the second period. A character B viewpoint movie that is an effect is displayed, and a character C viewpoint movie that is an effect mainly of the character C in the third period is displayed. Thereafter, in the non-distributable period (second half freeze period), the mixed movies of characters A, B, and C in which characters A to C appear are displayed.

  This pattern 1 is set at the start of the freeze effect. Then, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation in the first period in which the character A viewpoint movie is displayed, a first dispersion freeze is set, and a process of setting a dispersion freeze effect corresponding to the set dispersion freeze setting ( In step S714), the transition to the execution pattern of pattern 2 is set. Further, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation during the second period in which the character B viewpoint movie is displayed, the second distributed freeze is set and the transition to the execution pattern of pattern 3 is set. Furthermore, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation in the third period in which the character C viewpoint movie is displayed, the third distributed freeze is set and the transition to the execution pattern of the pattern 4 is set. The freeze effect C is an effect accompanied by the action of the accessory (movable effect device 8), but the action of the accessory is performed in the final effect period regardless of the pattern. .

  As shown in FIGS. 73 (b) to 73 (d), in patterns 2 to 4, the player makes a predetermined selection during the production period that is performed after the period during which the predetermined selection operation has been performed, with the stop effective period in between. An effect corresponding to the character that was the main character during the operation period is performed. That is, by selecting a period during which the player performs a predetermined selection operation in the dispersible period, it is possible to select the contents of the effect of the subsequent freeze effect.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to show a special display effect of a different effect pattern between when the freeze state is not interrupted and when it is interrupted, thereby improving the interest of the game. Moreover, since the special effect pattern changes according to the timing of interruption of the freeze state, game characteristics are given to the interruption, and the interest of the game is improved.

  That is, the display effect in pattern 1 is a normal effect pattern that is executed when the freeze state is not interrupted, and the display effect that is performed in each of the distributed freeze effect periods in patterns 2 to 4 is resumed after the freeze state is interrupted. A special performance pattern that is executed when the Further, the special effect patterns are different in the contents of the effects, and either one is selected according to the timing when the freeze state is interrupted.

  Similarly, freeze effects A and B display a character A viewpoint movie in the first period, a character B viewpoint movie in the second period, and a character C viewpoint movie in the third period. Then, the character A, B, C mixed movie is displayed in the non-dispersible period (second half freeze period) in pattern 1. Further, in patterns 2 to 4, after the period in which the predetermined selection operation was performed, in the effect period performed with the stop effective period in between, the player was mainly in the period in which the player performed the predetermined selection operation. An effect corresponding to the character is performed. As described above, the types of characters that can be selected are the same in freeze effects A to C, but the contents of effects such as stories are different. Of course, the selectable characters for the freeze effects A to C may be different.

  In addition, as described above, the dispersible period is divided into the first to third periods, and after the end of the period when the predetermined selection operation has been performed, the stop operation can be performed and then set. It is possible to set the time value of the distributed freeze effect period in advance, and it is sufficient to prepare single video data as a movie for each effect period, and the control burden can be reduced.

[AT standby processing]
Further, the AT standby processing shown in FIG. 74 is performed instead of the AT standby processing shown in FIG. In this AT standby process, after the reel stop information is updated (step S353), it is determined whether there is a distributed freeze effect setting (step S721). If there is no distributed freeze effect setting (step S721; N), The game effect is updated based on the stop information (step S354).

  If there is a distributed freeze effect setting (step S721; Y), it is determined whether it is a stop invalidation timing for restarting the freeze effect (step S722), and if it is not a stop invalidation timing (step S722; N). Then, the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S354). If it is the stop invalidation timing (step S722; Y), the corresponding distributed freeze effect is set (step S723), the distributed freeze effect is updated (step S724), and the distributed freeze effect period ends. It is determined whether or not the distributed delimiter command transmitted to is received (step S725). That is, a special display effect that is a display effect that can be executed in the freeze effect is resumed based on the restart of the freeze state. Thereby, it can prevent that the presentation effect in the resumed frozen state falls.

  If the distributed delimiter command has not been received (step S725; N), the process returns to the process of updating the distributed freeze effect (step S724). Further, when the distribution break command is received (step S725; Y), the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S354).

  It should be noted that the normal / precursor processing shown in FIG. 35, the promotion / rush-in AT processing shown in FIG. 40, the extra AT processing shown in FIG. 42, the repair AT processing shown in FIG. 45, and the processing shown in FIG. Also in the transition chance processing, the processing shown in steps S721 to S724 is performed after the reel stop information is updated. If an irregular stop operation occurs during normal / precursor processing, or if there is an assist violation during promotion / rush-in AT processing, extra AT processing, or relief AT processing, the progress of distributed freeze production stops Or output a warning sound or display a warning.

  FIG. 75 shows an example of the effect when the predetermined selection operation is performed in the second period in the freeze effect in which the freeze effect C is selected and the second dispersion freeze is set. As shown in FIG. 75A, when the start operation is performed from the state in which the previous game is finished and a predetermined background image is displayed, the game is started and a freeze effect is produced as shown in FIG. It is started and the stop operation is disabled.

  When the freeze effect is started, first, the first period of the dispersible period is started and the character A viewpoint movie is displayed. In this character A viewpoint movie, an effect image mainly composed of the character A is displayed, and it is notified that an effect mainly composed of the character A can be selected as a distributed freeze effect by performing a predetermined operation input.

  When the first period elapses and the second period is reached, the character B viewpoint movie is displayed as shown in FIG. In this character B viewpoint movie, an effect image mainly composed of the character B is displayed, and it is informed that an effect mainly composed of the character B can be selected as a distributed freeze effect by performing a predetermined operation input. Here, the player performs a predetermined operation input in the second period, and based on this, the second distributed freeze is set, and the stop operation becomes effective after the second period elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (d), in the period in which the stop operation is valid, the corresponding character B movie distributed joint images are displayed as the effects connecting the preceding and succeeding effects. And if a player performs 1st stop operation, the dispersion | distribution freeze production period 2-1 will be started and stop operation will become invalid. As shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and 75 (f), in this distributed freeze effect period 2-1, the character B main movie 1 mainly composed of the character B is displayed and stopped when the distributed freeze effect period 2-1 has elapsed. The operation becomes valid.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (g), the corresponding character B movie distributed continuous image is displayed as an effect that connects the preceding and succeeding effects even during the period when the stop operation is valid. Then, when the player performs the second stop operation, the distributed freeze effect period 2-2 is started and the stop operation becomes invalid. As shown in FIGS. 75 (h) and 75 (i), the character B main movie 2 mainly composed of the character B is displayed in the distributed freeze effect period 2-2. In addition, since the dispersion freeze effect period 2-2 is the final effect period, an effect by the operation of the movable effect device 8 is performed as shown in FIG. 75 (i).

  Then, when the dispersion freeze effect period 2-2 elapses, the stop operation becomes effective, and as shown in FIG. 75 (j), it is notified that the character B has won the special prize by indicating that the character B has won the battle as the final effect. Is done. When the player performs the third stop operation, it is clearly notified that the game is over and that the player has won a special prize as shown in FIG. 75 (k).

  From the above, a plurality of variation display sections (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and a lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with a variation display. In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of variable display units so that a symbol combination mode according to the result of the internal lottery can be derived based on the stop operation of the variable display, the stop operation is predetermined based on the result of the internal lottery Freeze state generating means (game control device 50) capable of generating a freeze state that is invalidated over a period of time, a predetermined display effect can be performed during the execution of the game, and the occurrence of the freeze state Display effect means (effect control device 70) capable of performing a special display effect, and the freeze state based on the presence of a predetermined operation input during the occurrence of the freeze state Freeze state interruption means (game control device 50) that can be interrupted, and operation validation means (game control device 50) that validates the stop operation based on the interruption of the freeze state. It will be.

  Here, the predetermined operation input is an operation of the start lever 21, the bet button (max bet button 17), the stop button (reel stop button 24), or the like.

  Further, the display effect means (effect control device 70) interrupts the special display effect based on the freeze state being interrupted, and resumes the special display effect based on the restart of the freeze state. Will be.

  The display effect means (effect control device 70) executes a special display effect in the normal effect pattern when the freeze state is not interrupted, and switches to the special effect pattern when the freeze state is interrupted and resumed. The special display effect is resumed.

  Further, a plurality of special effect patterns are set so that the contents of the effects are different, and the display effect means (effect control device 70) selects any of the plurality of special effect patterns according to the timing when the freeze state is interrupted. The special display effect is resumed with the selected special effect pattern.

  In addition, a progress operation unit for advancing the game is provided, and the progress operation unit includes a bet number operation unit (max bet button 17) for setting the bet number on the game and a start operation unit for starting the game. Including a (start lever 21) and a stop operation unit (reel stop button 24) for performing a stop operation. The freeze state interruption means (game control device 50) operates the betting number operation unit in the progress operation unit. The freeze state is interrupted based on the input.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the slot machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The part will be described. The slot machine of this modification can automatically stop the reel 6 when no stop operation is performed for a predetermined period.

[Reel rotation stop processing]
In the slot machine 1 of this modification, a reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. 76 is performed instead of the reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation stop process, if there is no stop button operation (step S91; N), an automatic stop control process (step S731) is performed. Note that the processing of steps S100 to S107 and S109 to S111 regarding the penalty freeze is not performed, but the processing regarding the penalty freeze may be performed.

[Automatic stop control processing]
FIG. 77 shows an automatic stop control process in the reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. In this automatic stop control process, first, it is determined whether the automatic stop period has elapsed. The passage of the automatic stop period means that a predetermined time (period) started from the previous effective operation for the start lever 21 or the reel stop button 24 has elapsed. If the automatic stop period has not elapsed (step S741; N), the automatic stop control process ends. If the automatic stop period has elapsed (step S741; Y), it is determined whether the RT state (RT state 1 or 2) is in progress (step S742).

  If it is in the RT state (step S742; Y), a stop prompting command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S748), and the automatic stop control process is terminated. In this case, the automatic stop is not performed because the automatic stop may cause a fall condition to be disadvantageous to the player, or a rush replay winning may be established to be advantageous to the player. In the production control device 70, for example, based on the reception of the stop urging command, a display for urging the reel 6 to stop is performed on the image display device 3, for example.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT state (step S742; N), it is determined whether the result of the internal lottery is a loss (pure loss) (step S743). When the result of the internal lottery is a loss (step S743; Y), a lost stop mode is set based on the reel stop information (step S750), and the changing reel stop process (stopping one changing reel 6) (step S750). Step S751) is performed. In the case of losing, even if the game is automatically stopped so as to be lost, there is no disadvantage to the player, and the game can be smoothly advanced by the automatic stop.

  If the result of the internal lottery is not lost (step S743; N), it is determined whether the winning combination is won (step S744). A missed winning combination is a winning combination other than a normal replay winning, a middle bell winning (Bell G) and an upper bell winning (three-piece F) that are final winnings that are established regardless of the player's stop operation mode. Thus, it indicates a non-determined winning combination in which no winning is achieved depending on the stop operation mode of the player. When the winning winning combination is won (step S744; Y), reel stop information is acquired (step S745), and it is determined whether the winning decision stop state is set (step S746). The winning confirmed stop state is a state in which a winning is confirmed regardless of the stopping order and stopping symbols of the reel 6 that is changing, for example, a one-piece role A winning composed of a combination of ANY, cherry, and ANY symbols. Is the case where the internal reel 6b has already stopped in a state where the cherry is led out.

  If it is not in the winning fixed stop state (step S746; N), a lost stop mode is set based on the reel stop information (step S750), and a changing reel stop process for stopping one changing reel 6 (step S751). )I do. In the process of setting the loss stop mode based on the reel stop information (step S750), the stop order and stop timing (stop symbol) of the reel 6 are set, and the game result is set to be lost. In other words, for non-determined winning combinations that may be missed, the player will not be overly dissatisfied even if it is automatically stopped so that it will not win, so that it will not be realized, so It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding smoothly.

  Here, an irregular stop operation is performed when the left reel 6a is not first stopped. Therefore, when all reels 6 are changing, the stop order is set to the left, middle, and right so that the irregular stop operation (abnormal order) does not occur. In this order (so-called forward pressing), the stop timing is set to a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a penalty state occurs due to the automatic stop. However, when the push order bell winning established by forward pressing is won, the stop order is left, right, and middle (so-called scissors pressing) so that the bell winning is not established.

  Further, when the left reel 6a has already stopped, the stop order is set to middle and right so as to be pushed forward, and the stop timing is set to a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. However, if you have won the push order bell winning that is established by forward push, the stop order will be right and middle so that the scissors push. If the middle reel 6b has already stopped, the stop order is left and right, and the stop timing is a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. However, in this stop order, if a push order bell prize is established, the stop order is set to the right and left. If the right reel 6c has already stopped, the stop order is left and middle, and the stop timing is a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. However, in this stop order, if a push order bell winning is established, the stop order is set to middle and left. In addition, you may set a stop order so that it may become scissors pushing fundamentally.

  On the other hand, if the winning decision stop state is set (step S746; Y) or if the winning combination is not won (step S744; N), it is determined whether the state transition replay is won (step S747). The state transition replay is a promotion replay prize, a fall replay prize, and a rush replay prize.

  When this state transition replay is won (step S747; Y), a stop prompting command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S748), and the automatic stop control process is terminated. In this case, the automatic stop is not performed because the automatic stop may be disadvantageous or advantageous to the player. This prevents a situation in which a promotion role does not shift to a specific gaming state without winning a prize due to an automatic stop, or a situation in which a demoted role wins and demotes to a normal gaming state. be able to.

  If the state transition replay is not won (step S747; N), the winning stop mode corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the reel stop information (step S749), and one reel 6 that is changing is stopped. A changing reel stop process (step S751) is performed. In other words, since there is no possibility of a transition of the gaming state unintended by the player, even if the automatic stop, the interest of the game will not be attenuated, and if the final winning combination is won, By automatically stopping the final winning combination so that the player can win, it is possible to smoothly advance the game without any disadvantage to the player.

  In the process of setting the winning stop mode corresponding to the winning combination based on the reel stop information (step S749), the stop order of the reels 6 is sequentially pushed (left, middle, right) in order to avoid an irregular stop operation. Set as follows. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a penalty state occurs due to the automatic stop. Further, when the left reel 6a has already stopped, the stop order is set to middle and right so as to be pushed forward, and when the middle reel 6b has already stopped, the stop order is set to left and right, and the right reel If 6c has already stopped, the stop order is left and middle. Here, since it is a stop state where a winning combination that has not been missed is won or the winning is confirmed, it is not necessary to set the stop timing (stop symbol). Further, the stop order may be scissors push (left, right, middle). In addition, in the state where it is already determined that the operation is an irregular stop operation, the stop order may be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, an automatic reel stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S752), and it is determined whether there is a reel that is changing (step S753). If there is a changing reel (step S753; Y), the process returns to the changing reel stop process (step S751). If there is no reel that is changing (step S753; N), the automatic stop control process is terminated. That is, the game control device 50 can automatically stop the variation display unit (reel 6) during the variation display based on the fact that the stop operation is not performed for a predetermined period during the execution of the game. Make. By performing such automatic stop, it is possible to perform automatic stop so that the player does not feel excessive dissatisfaction, and the game progresses smoothly. Moreover, it becomes possible to suggest the result of an internal lottery by not performing an automatic stop.

  Although the automatic stop is not performed when the state transition replay is won, the presence / absence of the automatic stop may be determined according to the type of replay winning that has been established. For example, the automatic stop may not be performed when the promotion combination for switching to the gaming state advantageous to the player is won, and the automatic stop may be performed in other cases. On the contrary, the automatic stop may not be performed when the demotion combination to switch to the gaming state disadvantageous to the player is won, and the automatic stop may be performed in other cases.

  Furthermore, when a transition combination in which the game state is shifted is won, it may be automatically stopped so as to be advantageous to the player. For example, if you are elected to a promotion role that switches to a gaming state advantageous to the player, you are automatically stopped so that the promotion role is established, and you are elected to a relegation role that switches to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player May be automatically stopped when the relegation combination is not established.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display units (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and a lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with the variation display. When the result of the game stopped based on the variable display stop operation becomes a symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery, in the slot machine where the winning combination of the winning combination is established, during a predetermined period during the game execution Based on the fact that the stop operation is not performed for a long time, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) capable of automatically stopping the fluctuation display portion during the fluctuation display and the predetermined winning combination winning combination are established. Based on the game state switching means (game control device 50, effect control device 70) capable of switching the game state between a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, For example, the automatic stopping means, so that you have to determine whether to perform the automatic stop on the basis of the result and the game state of the internal lottery.

  Here, the normal gaming state is, for example, an AT state in which assistance information for establishing a small role is provided, an RT state in which the winning probability of replay winning is increased, or an ART state in which these are combined. The state is, for example, an AT state, an RT state, or an ART state. However, it is sufficient that the specific game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the normal game state and the specific game are targeted only for the occurrence of any one of the AT state, the RT state, or the ART state. You may make it distinguish a state.

  The transitional combination includes a promotion combination for switching the gaming state to the specific gaming state and a demoted combination for switching the gaming state to the normal gaming state. The automatic stop means (game control device 50) In the gaming state, when the promotion combination is won, automatic stop is not performed.

  In addition, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) performs automatic stop when it is in the normal gaming state and the transition combination is not won.

  In addition, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) is in the normal gaming state, and when the final winning combination in which a winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the player is won, As a result, an automatic stop is performed.

  In addition, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) is in the normal gaming state, and when the non-determined winning combination that is not established depending on the stop operation mode of the player is won, An automatic stop is made so as not to win a prize.

  The transitional combination includes a promotion combination for switching the gaming state to the specific gaming state and a demoted combination for switching the gaming state to the normal gaming state. The automatic stop means (game control device 50) In the gaming state, when the demoted combination is elected, automatic stop is not performed.

  In addition, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) performs automatic stop so as to be in the lost symbol combination mode when winning is lost regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state. It will be like that.

  Further, an irregular stop operation determining means (game control device 50) for determining occurrence of an irregular stop operation in which a plurality of variation display units stop in a predetermined irregular order, and a disadvantage to the player based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation. Penalty state generating means (production control device 70) capable of generating a penalty state over a plurality of games, and the automatic stop means (game control device 50) in an order that does not become an irregular order. This means that the fluctuation display section during fluctuation display is automatically stopped.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modification of the slot machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the second modified example, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine of this modification can be automatically stopped even in the RT state.

[Automatic stop control processing]
In the slot machine 1 of this modification, an automatic stop control process shown in FIG. 78 is performed instead of the automatic stop control process shown in FIG. In this automatic stop control process, when not in the RT state (step S742; N), the normal automatic stop process is performed, and the automatic stop control process ends. This normal automatic stop processing is the processing of steps S743 to S753 in FIG. That is, when not in the RT state, the same processing as that in FIG. 77 is performed. If it is in the RT state (step S742; Y), an automatic stop process during RT (step S761) is performed, and the automatic stop control process ends.

[Automatic stop processing during RT]
FIG. 79 shows an automatic stop process during RT in the automatic stop control process shown in FIG. In the automatic stop process during RT, first, it is determined whether the result of the internal lottery is a loss (pure loss) (step S771). If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (step S771; Y), the stop mode of the loss is set based on the reel stop information (step S772), and the changing reel stop process for stopping one changing reel 6 (Step S778) is performed. If the result of the internal lottery is not lost (step S771; N), it is determined whether a penalty target combination is being won (step S773).

  A penalty-winning combination is a winning combination in which a falling condition is established in which an RT state or an AT state is terminated by being established or missed. Here, a falling replay winning and a SIN winning in which a falling condition is established by winning Then, it is a push order bell prize where the falling condition is established by missing. When this penalty target combination is being won (step S773; Y), a stop prompting command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S781), and the RT automatic stop process is terminated. In this case, the automatic stop is not performed because the fall condition may be satisfied by the automatic stop, which may be disadvantageous to the player. By this. It can be prevented that the gaming state is shifted in a state not intended by the player and the interest of the game is attenuated. In the production control device 70, for example, based on the reception of the stop urging command, a display for urging the reel 6 to stop is performed on the image display device 3, for example.

  On the other hand, if the winning combination is not being won (step S773; N), reel stop information is acquired (step S774), and it is determined whether the winning decision stop state is set (step S775). The winning confirmed stop state is a state in which a winning is confirmed regardless of the stopping order and stopping symbols of the reel 6 that is changing, for example, a one-piece role A winning composed of a combination of ANY, cherry, and ANY symbols. Is the case where the internal reel 6b has already stopped in a state where the cherry is led out. In addition, since the winning is always established when the normal replay winning, middle bell winning (bell G) and upper bell winning (three-piece F) are won, the winning is confirmed even if all reels 6 are changing. Set to the stop state.

  If it is not in the winning fixed stop state (step S775; N), a lost stop mode is set based on the reel stop information (step S777), and the changing reel stop process for stopping one changing reel 6 (step S778). )I do. In the process of setting the loss stop mode based on the reel stop information (step S777), the reel 6 stop order and stop timing (stop symbol) are set, and the game result is set to be lost.

  Since there is no irregular stop operation here, any stop order may be used. However, when all reels 6 are changing, the stop order is left, middle, and right (so-called forward pressing), and the stop timing corresponds to winning. The timing when the symbol combination to be formed cannot be formed. Further, when the left reel 6a has already stopped, the stop order is set to middle and right so as to be pushed forward, and the stop timing is set to a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed.

  If the middle reel 6b has already stopped, the stop order is left and right, and the stop timing is a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. If the right reel 6c has already stopped, the stop order is left and middle, and the stop timing is a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed.

  On the other hand, if the winning decision stop state is set (step S775; Y), a winning stop mode corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the reel stop information (step S776), and the change of stopping one reel 6 being changed is stopped. A middle reel stop process (step S778) is performed. In the process of setting the winning stop mode corresponding to the winning combination based on the reel stop information (step S778), the reels 6 are set so that the stop order of the reels 6 is forward (left, middle, right). Further, when the left reel 6a has already stopped, the stop order is set to middle and right so as to be pushed forward, and when the middle reel 6b has already stopped, the stop order is set to left and right, and the right reel If 6c has already stopped, the stop order is left and middle. Since there is no irregular stop operation here, another stop order may be used.

  Thereafter, an automatic reel stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S779), and it is determined whether there is a reel that is changing (step S780). If there is a changing reel (step S780; Y), the process returns to the changing reel stop process (step S778). If there is no reel that is changing (step S780; N), the automatic stop process during RT ends. Note that even when the push order wins a prize as a penalty target combination is won, the two reels are already stopped according to the push order, and if the winning is confirmed, automatic stop may be performed.

  From the above, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) prevents automatic stop when the transition combination is won regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state or the specific game state. It will be.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the second embodiment will be described. Basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations and the description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described. To do. The slot machine of this embodiment includes a game effect device 120 that performs effects related to games.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the game effect device 120 is located above the plurality of reels 6 located above the plurality of reel stop buttons 24 and below the image display device 3 (the symbol display window 5 and the image). Between the display devices 3). The game effect device 120 includes a base member 121 fixed to the front frame 2, and three effect units 130 are attached to the base member 121 so as to be arranged in the left-right direction.

  The arrangement positions of the production units 130 are arranged at positions above the reels 6 so as to correspond to the three reels 6, respectively. That is, the left effect unit 130a is arranged above the left reel 6a corresponding to the left reel 6a, the middle effect unit 130b is arranged above the middle reel 6b corresponding to the middle reel 6b, and the right reel 6c is arranged. Correspondingly, a right effect unit 130c is arranged above the right reel 6c.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the game effect device 120 is covered with a clear panel 115 made of a transparent material (synthetic resin) together with the image display device 3, so that the player cannot touch it. Note that the movable effect device 8 also appears in front of the image display device 3 within the area covered by the clear panel 115. The clear panel 115 may also cover the front side of the reel 6 so as to serve as the front panel 9 and the image display window 5.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the effect unit 130 includes a drive mechanism 131 fixed to the base member 121 and a movable effect member 135 disposed on the front surface of the drive mechanism 131 and operated up and down by the drive mechanism 131. Prepare. A drive mechanism including a motor, a link mechanism, and the like for operating the movable effect member 135 is disposed inside the drive mechanism 131, and one end of the link mechanism is connected to the back surface of the movable effect member 135, and the motor operation Thus, the movable effect member 135 can be operated via the link mechanism.

  Further, a slide guide groove 132 that is a groove portion extending vertically is formed on the front surface of the drive mechanism portion 131. A guided portion formed so as to protrude rearward from the back surface of the movable effect member 135 is slidably engaged with the slide guide groove 132 and guided along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the movable effect member 135 can be operated in the vertical direction between the lower end position shown in FIG. 82 (a) and the upper end position shown in FIG. 82 (b) by operating the drive mechanism. It has become. That is, the lower end position shown in FIG. 82 (a) is the first position close to the reel 6 (symbol display window 5), and the upper end position shown in FIG. 82 (b) is far from the reel 6 (of the image display device 3). That is, the movable effect member 135 is movable between the first position and the second position. Note that all or part (upper part) of the movable effect member 135 may overlap the front of the screen of the image display device 3 at the second position.

  On the front surface of the movable effect member 135, a decorative light emitting unit 136 that can be decorated with light is provided. The decorative light emitting unit 136 includes a lens member 136a capable of transmitting light, and a light emitting member (LED substrate) such as an LED disposed behind the lens member 136a and inside the movable effect member 135. . In the decorative light emitting unit 136, the light from the light emitting member is visible through the lens member 136a, and the light is illuminated, blinked, and the color of the emitted light is changed to perform decoration. It is also possible to change the brightness of the light emitting member. For example, the brightness can be changed in multiple steps, such as low brightness with low brightness, medium brightness with higher brightness than low brightness, and high brightness with higher brightness than medium brightness. It is possible.

  Further, the display portion of the 7-segment display 137 faces the center of the front surface of the movable effect member 135. The display on the 7-segment display 137 is also made visible through the lens member 136a, and various notifications and effects can be performed by the display on the 7-segment display 137. .

  Such a game production device 120 provides notification and production of various information regarding the game according to an operation mode along the vertical direction, a light emission mode at the decorative light emitting unit 136, and a display mode at the 7-segment display 137 as a predetermined performance operation. Is possible.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 83, the gaming state is indicated by the initial position (operation standby position) of the movable effect member 135. The initial position (operation standby position) is a position where the user is staying in a state where no notification or production is performed depending on the operation or position of the movable production member 135. In the normal gaming state ST10, as shown in FIG. 83A, the initial position (operation standby position) of the movable effect member 135 is the first position (position close to the reel 6) which is the lower end position of the operation range. It is arranged to become. Further, in the case of the specific game state ST30, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the second position (the position far from the reel 6) where the initial position (operation standby position) of the movable effect member 135 is the position of the upper end of the operation range. ).

  Thus, by changing the initial position (operation standby position) of the movable effect member 135 according to the gaming state, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the gaming state. Further, as described later, in the specific game state ST30, the push order is notified by moving the movable effect member 135 from the second position (position far from the reel 6) to the first position (position close to the reel 6). Since the initial position is set to the second position (a position far from the reel 6), it is not necessary to move the movable effect member 135 to the second position.

  The initial position (operation standby position) is not limited to this arrangement, and the initial position (operation standby position) of the movable effect member 135 may be different between the normal gaming state ST10 and the specific gaming state ST30. Further, particularly in the normal gaming state ST10, the initial position (operation) of the movable effect member 135 according to the winning probability in the AT right acquisition lottery (probability of AT right acquisition; low accuracy, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy). The standby position may be different.

  In the special gaming state ST20, the movable effect member 135 repeats the up and down movement as shown in FIG. 83 (c). The operation at this time may be such that the three movable effect members 135 move up and down at regular intervals in a horizontal row or move up and down without regularity in a horizontal row, or move up and down separately. Also good.

  In addition, using the game effect device 120, notifications are also made about information related to the results of the internal lottery and information related to the freeze effect. FIG. 89 shows the possibility of overlapping winning of each special prize (PB prize, BB1 prize, BB2 prize, RB prize) and each small role prize in the slot machine of this embodiment. In the figure, “○” indicates that there is a possibility of duplicate winning, and “×” indicates that there is no possibility of overlapping winning in the special winning, but there is a possibility of overlapping winning with other special winnings. "-" Indicates that there is no possibility of all special winnings and duplicate winnings. In addition, each special prize can be a single prize in addition to a duplicate prize with a small part prize.

  For example, for the PB winning, there is a possibility that the winning combination with the three-piece combination C, the three-piece combination E and the single-piece combination B marked with “◯” is possible. In addition, there is no possibility of overlapping winning with the three-piece combination A, B, D and one-piece combination B marked with “×”, but these small combination winnings may be redundant with other special winnings. is there. Then, there is no possibility of overlapping winning with the small prize winning with “-”, and there is no possibility of overlapping winning with other special winnings.

  FIG. 90 shows the contents of the freeze execution determination table used in the normal gaming state ST10 in the freeze effect setting process shown in FIG. In this freeze execution determination table, types and generation conditions of freeze effects that can be selected according to the gaming state are set. For example, execution of a 5-second freeze effect is selected at 1/50 when a single winning combination A is won. Further, execution of a 5-second freeze effect or a 10-second freeze effect is selected at 1/50 when the three-piece combination B is won alone.

  As described above, a condition for generating an immediate freeze for performing a freeze effect in a game in which execution of the freeze effect is determined has a special condition, and the special condition is a predetermined combination (in this case, a three-piece combination C, E). , A rare combination except for one-piece combination B) may be established if it is won.

  In addition, 1 game as a stand-by freeze in which a 60 second freeze effect is performed after 1, 2, or 3 games after the game in which the execution of the freeze effect is determined in 1/5 when the three-player combination C and the PB winning are duplicated. The execution of either the 60 second freezing effect after 2 games, the 60 second freezing effect after 2 games, or the 60 second freezing effect after 3 games is selected. Thus, there is a possibility that the condition for generating the standby freeze is a specific condition, and the specific condition may be satisfied when a specific combination (in this case, three combination C, E, one single combination B) is won in the internal lottery. There will be.

  When execution of the standby freeze is determined, execution of the freeze state in the immediate freeze is not selected (restricted) until the game in which the freeze state in the standby freeze ends. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether the generated freeze state is immediate freeze or standby freeze, and the fun of the game is improved. In addition, although FIG. 90 shows the freeze execution determination table in the normal gaming state, a freeze execution determination table with the same setting may be used in other gaming states, or freeze execution with different settings may be used. A determination table may be used.

  That is, the game control device 50 constitutes a freeze state generating means capable of generating a freeze state that invalidates (regulates) a predetermined operation (stop operation) for a predetermined period based on the result of the internal lottery. . In addition, the game control device 50 serves as a specific condition establishment determination unit capable of determining whether or not a predetermined condition (condition for generating a standby freeze) established as a result of the internal lottery is satisfied, and the specific condition On the basis of the determination that is established, a standby freeze means is provided that can generate a freeze state in a game after the established game of the specific condition.

  In addition, when the game control device 50 satisfies a special condition (a condition for generating an immediate freeze) determined in advance as a result of the internal lottery, an immediate freeze that can generate a freeze state in a game that satisfies the special condition is established. Make a means. In addition, the game control device 50 serves as a freeze restricting means capable of restricting the occurrence of the freeze state by the immediate freeze means from the establishment of the specific condition (condition for generating the standby freeze) to the occurrence of the freeze state. .

  FIG. 91 shows the contents of notification by display on the 7-segment display 137. In addition, what is shown here is a display when the reel 6 is stopped by forward pressing in the normal gaming state ST10. The 7-segment display 137 can display numbers 1 to 9 as symbols. When the corresponding reel 6 is in a variable display, the variable display is performed in which the numbers 1 to 9 are sequentially displayed. When stopped, any symbol is stopped and displayed. And the result of the internal lottery is suggested by the stop display symbols on the three 7-segment indicators 137. It should be noted that a pressing order other than the forward pressing may be used, and in this case as well, the symbols are stopped and displayed on the three 7-segment displays 137 in the order of the middle left and right for each stop operation, as in the case of the forward pressing.

  Here, the winning of the rare role and the winning of the special prize are notified. In the case of the internal winning of the three-piece combination A, D and the one-piece combination A, which are rare, an odd number of the same number of symbols is displayed on the 7-segment display 137 of the middle production units 130a, 130b, and the reach symbol ( Reach combination mode), and the 7-segment display 137 of the right effect unit 130c displays a symbol two before or two symbols ahead of the symbol constituting the reach symbol. For example, “113” or “118”.

  In addition, when the three-piece combination B, C, E, Bell G and the one-piece combination B, which are rare, are won internally, the left and middle production units 130a and 130b have the same number of symbols on the 7-segment display 137. Is displayed and a reach symbol (reach combination mode) is configured, and the 7-segment display 137 of the right effect unit 130c displays a symbol one before or one symbol ahead of the symbol constituting the reach symbol. For example, “112” or “119”. In the case of a three-piece combination C, it is any one of “332”, “334”, “776”, and “778”.

  In addition, when a rare combination is won, the above stop symbol is displayed regardless of whether or not a special winning combination is duplicated. In this way, by changing the stop symbol on the 7-segment display 137 depending on the type of rare role, in addition to being able to notify the type of rare role, there is a high possibility of double winning with special winnings and AT rights acquisition The high possibility of this will be notified.

  When a special winning BB1 winning, BB2 winning, or RB winning is independently won and the winning is not established, “135”, “357”, “579”, or “753” is displayed. Is done. That is, these displays form a reach display (winning confirmation combination mode) indicating that a special prize is won. When the BB winning is established, either “333” or “555” is displayed, and when the RB winning is established, either “111” or “999” is displayed.

  In addition, when the internal winning is made independently for the PB winning which is the special winning and the winning is not established, either “357” or “753” is displayed. In other words, these displays form a reach-eye display (winning confirmation combination mode) indicating the winning of the special prize. When the PB winning is established, “777” is displayed. Note that the above reach indication is displayed for a game that has been selected for a special prize, but the above reach indication is also displayed for a game in which the winning flag for a special prize after a single winning or a double winning game is carried over. Is displayed. In addition, when a rare combination or a special prize is not won, a stop symbol other than the above is displayed on the 7-segment display 137.

[Timer interrupt processing]
In the slot machine of this embodiment, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 92 is performed instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this timer interrupt process, a game effect device control process (step S800) related to the control of the game effect device 120 is performed.

[Game production device control processing]
FIG. 93 shows a game effect device control process in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this game effect device control process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal game state ST10 is in effect (step S801). If it is in the normal game state (step S801; Y), the operation of the game effect device 120 in the normal game state is determined. A normal game effect process to be controlled is performed (step S802), and the game effect device control process is terminated. If the game state is not the normal game state (step S801; N), it is determined whether the game state is the specific game state ST30 (step S803).

  When it is in the specific game state (step S803; Y), a specific game time effect process for controlling the operation of the game effect device 120 in the specific game state is performed (step S804), and the game effect device control process is ended. If it is not in the specific gaming state (step S803; N), it is determined whether it is in the special gaming state ST20 (step S805).

  When it is in the special game state (step S805; Y), the special game state effect process for controlling the operation of the game effect device 120 in the special game state is performed (step S806), and the game effect device control process is ended. If it is not in the special game state (step S805; N), the game effect device control process is terminated.

[Normal game processing]
FIG. 94 shows a normal game effect process in the game effect device control process shown in FIG. In the normal game time effect control process, first, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command transmitted from the game control device 50 at the start of the game has been received (step S811). If this lottery result command has not been received (step S811; N), it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S816). When the lottery result command is received (step S811; Y), it is determined whether the bonus winning is being carried over, that is, whether the special winning flag is being carried over (step S812).

  When the bonus is not carried over (step S812; N), the 7-segment stop event (stop result mode) corresponding to the lottery result is determined (step S813), and the 7-segment change start is set for all the movable performance members (step S813). Step S815). If the bonus is being carried over (step S812; Y), the 7-segment stop event (stop result mode) corresponding to the bonus being carried over is determined (step S814), and the 7-segment of all the movable effect members is determined. The fluctuation start is set (step S815). As a result, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display 137 of each movable effect member are determined, and variable display for sequentially displaying a plurality of symbols is started.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S816). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S816; N), it is determined whether a game result command including information on the winning determination result has been received (step S818). When the reel stop command is received (step S816; Y), the determined outcome is displayed on the 7th segment of the movable effect member corresponding to the stop reel (step S817), and information on the winning determination result is included. It is determined whether a game result command has been received (step S818). Thus, the symbols are stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display 137 of the corresponding movable effect member 135 as the reel 6 is stopped (stop operation).

  When the game result command has not been received (step S818; N), the normal game effect processing is terminated. If a game result command is received (step S818; Y), a game end process (step S819) is performed, and the normal game effect process ends.

[Process at the end of the game]
FIG. 95 shows a game end process in the normal game effect process shown in FIG. In this game end process, first, it is determined whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (step S821). When the game state does not shift to the specific game state (step S821; N), it is determined whether a bonus winning (special winning) has been established (step S823).

  If the bonus winning is not established (step S823; N), it is determined whether or not the standby freeze target combination (specific combination) has won (step S824). The stand-by freeze target combination here is a three-piece combination C, E and a one-piece combination B. If the stand-by freeze target combination wins (step S824; Y), the upward movement of the movable effect member corresponding to the winning combination is set (step S825).

  Each of the three movable performance members 135 is associated one-to-one with the three roles that make up the standby freeze target role, and winning or winning is achieved by operating the movable performance member 135 corresponding to the winning combination. The winning combination that has been established is shown. Since the default position of the movable effect member 135 is the first position at the lower end of the operation range in the normal game state, the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the winning combination is moved upward, that is, the default position (first position in the normal game state). ) To a different position (second position), it is possible to notify the type of winning combination in which winning or winning is established. This operation is a lottery result notification operation.

  In this way, when there is a possibility that the standby freeze may occur, the rendering operation of the game effect device 120 is performed, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the standby freeze. In addition, since the movable effect member 135 is associated one-on-one with the three roles that are subject to the standby freeze, the result of the internal lottery can be suggested by the operation of the movable effect member 135, and the game effect device 120. The production effect by can be enhanced.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (4) indicating a period during which the standby freeze may be executed is set in the maintenance counter corresponding to the winning combination (step S826), and the value of the maintenance counter that is not 0 is updated by -1 (step S826). S827). Also, if the stand-by freeze target combination has not won (step S824; N), the value of the maintenance counter that is not 0 is updated by -1 (step S827). Note that the maintenance counter is set for each of the stand-by freeze target combinations (three-piece combination C, three-piece combination E, and one-piece combination B), for example, the value of the maintenance counter set for winning of one winning combination In the case where is not 0 and another winning combination wins, an initial value is set in a separate maintenance counter, and when the value of the maintenance counter is updated, both maintenance counters are updated respectively.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a maintenance counter that has become 0 (step S828). If there is no maintenance counter that has become 0 (step S828; N), the game end process is terminated. If there is a maintenance counter that is 0 (step S828; Y), the corresponding movable effect member is returned to the default position in the normal gaming state (here, the lower end position in the operation range) (step S829), End the game process.

  That is, when there is the movable effect member 135 moved to the second position (the upper end position in the operation range), during the period (3 games) in which the freeze effect due to the standby freeze may be executed, the movable effect member 135 is moved. It keeps moving to the 2nd position (the upper end position in the operation range), does not return to the 1st position (the lower end position in the operation range), and continues the lottery result notification operation. As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the standby freeze will occur. Then, when the period during which the freezing effect due to the standby freezing is likely to be executed has ended, the first position is returned, and the lottery result notifying operation is ended.

  On the other hand, when shifting to the specific game state (step S821; Y), the movable effect member is moved to the default position (here, the upper end position in the operation range) in the specific game state (step S822), and the non-zero maintenance counter. Is cleared to 0 (step S832), and the game end process is terminated. When transitioning to the specific gaming state, the setting of the standby freeze is cleared and the freeze effect is not performed, so the lottery result notifying operation is terminated.

  If a bonus winning is established (step S823; Y), the 7-segment stop result corresponding to the winning bonus is displayed (step S830), and the movable effect member is moved to the default position in the special game state ( Step S831). Note that the default position in the special gaming state is an intermediate position in the operation range (between the first position and the second position), and each movable effect member 135 moves up and down once moved to this default position. It is like that.

  Then, the value of the maintenance counter that is not 0 is cleared to 0 (step S832), and the game end process is ended. When the special gaming state occurs, the setting of the standby freeze is cleared and the freeze effect is not performed, so the lottery result notifying operation is terminated. That is, the effect control device 70 constitutes a game effect control means that can control the game effect device 120. In addition, the production control device 70 has production execution means capable of executing the production that can grasp the cause of occurrence of the freeze state by the standby freeze means (game control device 50), and the specific condition is established as the production. The notification which can specify the result of the internal lottery of the game is performed.

  The lottery result notifying operation is performed when the stand-by freeze target combination wins, but the lottery result notifying operation may be performed based on the internal winning of the stand-by freeze target combination. The start timing of the lottery result notification operation at this time may be at the start or end of the game, but if it is at the start, the result of the internal lottery can be notified. Further, the lottery result notifying operation may be performed when the stand-by freeze target combination does not win (when it is missed). Further, each movable effect member 135 does not have a corresponding relationship with the target object for standby freeze, and the one or more movable effect members 135 are operated based on the fact that the target object for standby freeze is won or won. You may make it continue operation | movement over the period when a state may generate | occur | produce.

  Further, when the movable effect member 135 is raised as the lottery result notification operation, the raised movable effect member 135 may be made to stand out by swinging up and down. Further, in the lottery result notification operation, the position of the movable effect member 135 may be changed according to the value of the maintenance counter. For example, it may be first raised to the upper end position in the operating range, lowered step by step every time the maintenance counter is subtracted, and finally returned to the lower end position (default position) in the operating range. Alternatively, the movable effect member 135 may be lowered or raised step by step every time the maintenance counter is subtracted.

  Here, the position at the lower end of the operating range is the first position and the position at the upper end of the operating range is the second position, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that at least the first position and the second position are different, and the vertical relationship between the first position and the second position can be arbitrarily set. For example, the intermediate position may be included in the second position, and the range above the first position may be the second position.

  As described above, the game effect device 120 capable of performing a predetermined effect operation and the game effect control means (effect control device 70) capable of controlling the game effect device 120 are provided, and the specific condition is The game effect control means may cause the game effect device 120 to perform an effect operation based on the fact that the specified role is won or won in the internal lottery. Will be. Therefore, when the standby freeze may occur, the rendering operation of the game effect device 120 is performed, so that the player's expectation for the occurrence of the standby freeze can be increased.

  Further, the game effect device 120 can perform an effect operation by moving the movable effect member 135 from the first position to the second position, and the game effect control means (the effect control device 70) is an internal lottery. The movable effect member 135 is moved to the second position based on the fact that the specific role is won or won, and the movable effect member 135 is controlled not to return to the first position during a period in which the freeze state may occur. Will be doing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the standby freeze will occur.

  In addition, a plurality of specific combinations are set, and a plurality of movable effect members 135 are provided, and each movable effect member 135 is associated with one of the specific combinations, and a game effect control means (effect control device) 70), the movable effect member 135 associated with the specific combination that has won or won is moved to the second position. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery can be suggested, and the effect of the game effect device 120 is enhanced.

[Normal freeze production processing]
FIG. 96 shows a normal freeze effect process in the freeze effect process shown in FIG. In the normal freeze effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect is started in the standby freeze (step S841). When it is the start of the freeze effect in the standby freeze (step S841; Y), the operation mode of the movable effect member according to the trigger of the standby freeze is set (step S842).

  The operation mode of the movable effect member according to the trigger of the stand-by freeze, for example, takes over the correspondence between each winning combination and the moveable effect member 135 in the lottery result notification operation, and the freeze effect (stand-by freeze) during the freeze effect. It is the operation | movement which moves the movable production | presentation member 135 corresponding to the combination which became an opportunity up and down. This operation is one of the special effects that makes it possible to grasp the cause of the freeze state, and provides notification that can identify the result of the internal lottery of the game that satisfies the specific condition. This makes it possible to grasp the factor that activated the standby freeze function, that is, the result of the internal lottery of the game that activated the standby freeze function, so that the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the movable effect member (step S843). If it is the operation timing (step S843; Y), the movable effect member is operated (moved) according to the set operation mode ( Step S844), it is determined whether the standby freeze has ended (Step S845).

  If the standby freeze has not ended (step S845; N), the process returns to the determination (step S843) as to whether or not it is the operation timing of the movable effect member. When the standby freeze is finished (step S845; Y), that is, when a freeze end command is received, the value of the maintenance counter that is not 0 is cleared to 0 (step S846), and the movable effect member is set to the default in the normal gaming state. The position is moved to the position (here, the position of the lower end in the operation range) (step S851), and the normal freeze effect process is terminated.

  That is, the effect control device 70 serves as a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that enables the cause of the freeze state to be grasped while the freeze state is generated by the standby freeze means (game control device 50). .

  On the other hand, if it is not the start of the freeze effect in the standby freeze (step S841; N), that is, if it is the start of the freeze effect in the immediate freeze, a 7-segment display mode corresponding to the type of immediate freeze is set (step S847). ). The 7-segment display mode corresponding to the type of immediate freeze is executed, for example, from a series of displays set so that the display changes every 5, 10, and 15 seconds after the start of the freeze effect. The display up to the time according to the time of the freeze effect is set. As a result, the display on the 7-segment display 137 changes to the same display form from the start regardless of the time of the freeze effect, and the length of the freeze effect is immediately known in the display mode of the 7-segment display 137. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the freeze effect will continue when 5, 10, 15 seconds elapse.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the display switching timing of the 7-segment display 137 (step S848), and if it is the switching timing (step S848; Y), the 7-segment display is switched according to the set display mode. (Step S849), it is determined whether the immediate freeze has ended (Step S850).

  If the immediate freeze has not ended (step S850; N), the process returns to the determination of whether it is the switching timing of the 7-segment display 137 (step S847). When the immediate freeze is ended (step S850; Y), that is, when the freeze end command is received, the movable effect member is moved to the default position in the normal gaming state (here, the lower end position in the operation range). (Step S851), the normal freeze effect process is terminated.

  As described above, in the game effect device 120, since the effect operation in the freeze effect based on the standby freeze and the operation in the freeze effect based on the immediate freeze are different, it is possible to determine which freeze effect the player was in. As a result, the interest of the game is improved. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as a freeze effect executing means capable of executing a freeze effect so that the type of the freeze state can be specified during the occurrence of the freeze state.

  Based on the above, the symbol combination mode according to the result of the internal lottery based on the player's stop operation by performing the internal lottery of the combination based on the start operation by the player and executing the game with the variable display of the reels 6 In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of reels 6 so that can be derived, specific condition satisfaction determination means (game control) that can determine whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied as a result of the internal lottery Device 50), standby freezing means (game control device 50) capable of generating a freeze state in a game later than a game that satisfies the specific condition based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied; Special effect execution means (game) capable of executing a special effect that enables the cause of the freeze state to be grasped while the freeze state is generated by the standby freeze means Control apparatus 50, and that it comprises a performance control unit 70), the. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the factor that activated the standby freeze function, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In addition, an internal lottery of the combination is performed based on the start operation by the player to execute a game with a variable display of the reels 6, and a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is derived based on the stop operation of the player. In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of reels 6 so as to obtain, when a predetermined special condition is satisfied as a result of the internal lottery, an immediate freeze that can generate a freeze state in a game that satisfies the special condition Means (game control device 50) and a standby freeze means (when a specific condition predetermined as a result of the internal lottery is satisfied, a freezing state can be generated in a game after the game that satisfies the specific condition) The game control device 50) and a freezing effect that can execute a freezing effect so that the type of the freezing state can be specified during the freezing state. 'S demonstration execution unit (the effect control device 70), and that it comprises a. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the generated freeze state is an immediate freeze state or a standby freeze state, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In addition, an internal lottery of the combination is performed based on the start operation by the player to execute a game with a variable display of the reels 6, and a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is derived based on the stop operation of the player. In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of reels 6 so as to obtain, when a predetermined special condition is satisfied as a result of the internal lottery, an immediate freeze that can generate a freeze state in a game that satisfies the special condition Means (game control device 50) and a standby freeze means (when a specific condition predetermined as a result of the internal lottery is satisfied, a freezing state can be generated in a game after the game that satisfies the specific condition) The game control device 50) and the occurrence of the freeze state by the immediate freeze means between the establishment of the specific condition and the occurrence of the freeze state are regulated. Freeze control means (game control device 50) that can be played, and freeze effect execution means (effect control device) that can execute a freeze effect so that the type of the freeze state can be specified during the occurrence of the freeze state 70). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the generated freeze state is an immediate freeze state or a standby freeze state, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Here, the freeze state is a state in which a gaming value (medal) betting operation (betting number setting function) and a reel stopping operation (reel stopping function) are invalidated for a predetermined period. It should be noted that a predetermined period of invalidating a gaming value (medal) betting operation or reel stopping operation based on a predetermined operation (betting operation or stopping operation) may be terminated. However, it is preferable that processing (betting number setting processing or reel stop processing) corresponding to the operation (betting operation or stop operation) in this case is not executed.

  Further, the special effect execution means (game control device 50, effect control device 70) performs notification that can specify the result of the internal lottery of the game in which the specific condition is established as the special effect. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the game in which the standby freeze function is activated can be grasped, and the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction.

  FIG. 97 shows an example of a lottery result notification operation in the case where a strong cherry (three-piece combination B) win is established in the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the state where the lottery result notifying operation is not performed in the normal gaming state, each movable effect member 135 is the default position (operation standby position), which is the lower end position in the operation range. Arranged at one position. Then, based on the operation of the start lever 21, the display of fluctuation of the reel 6 is started, and the display of fluctuation on the 7-segment display 137 is also started.

  Further, here, the strong cherry is won by an internal lottery performed based on the operation of the start lever 21, and a winning announcement effect indicating the winning is displayed on the image display device 3. Furthermore, “cherry” is displayed above the left effect unit 130a and “watermelon” is displayed above the middle effect unit 130b as a display for showing the movable effect member 135 that operates corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery result notification operation. "Is displayed, and" Chance "is displayed above the right effect unit 130c.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the player operates the left reel stop button 24a to stop the left reel 6a, the 7-segment display of the movable effect member 135 provided in the left effect unit 130a is displayed. The change display in the device 137 is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the player operates the middle reel stop button 24b to stop the middle reel 6b, the 7-segment display of the movable effect member 135 provided in the middle effect unit 130b is displayed. The change display in the device 137 is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 97 (d), as the player operates the right reel stop button 24c to stop the right reel 6c, the 7-segment display of the movable effect member 135 provided in the right effect unit 130c is displayed. The change display in the device 137 is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. Here, since the strong cherry is won, the stop symbol of the three 7-segment indicators 137 is “334”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 97 (e), when all reels stop and a strong cherry win is established, a lottery result notifying operation for moving the movable effect member 135 of the left effect unit 130a corresponding to the winning combination is performed. . As shown in FIG. 97 (f), this lottery result notification operation is continued in the next game, and the end of the standby freeze effect, the execution of the three games (the standby freeze effect may be performed). Until the end of the period), the occurrence of a special prize, or the transition to a specific gaming state is achieved.

  Although the lottery result notification operation is performed regardless of whether or not the execution of the standby freeze is determined, when the execution of the standby freeze is determined, the lottery result notification operation is performed with a high probability (for example, a probability of 100%). If the execution of the standby freeze is not determined, the lottery result notification operation may be performed with a low probability (for example, a probability of 20%). In this case, the winning probability in the execution lottery of the lottery result notification operation may be changed according to the type of the target combination.

  In addition, regarding the maintenance in the game after the lottery result notification operation, when the execution of the standby freeze is determined, the lottery result notification operation is maintained with a high probability (for example, 100% probability), and the execution of the standby freeze is determined. If not, the lottery result notification operation may be maintained with a low probability (for example, a probability of 20%). Also in this case, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery of the lottery result notification operation may be changed according to the type of the target combination.

  FIG. 98 shows an example in which the probability of maintaining the lottery result notification operation varies depending on whether or not the standby freeze is performed. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when all the reels are stopped and a strong cherry win is established, a lottery result notifying operation for raising the movable effect member 135 of the left effect unit 130a corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

  When the execution of the standby freeze is determined or when the execution of the standby freeze is not determined and the maintenance lottery is won (for example, 20% is won), as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the next game However, the lottery result notification operation is continued. Among these, when the execution of the standby freeze is determined, the lottery result notification operation is maintained until the freeze effect based on the standby freeze is generated as shown in FIG. 98 (c). If the execution of the standby freeze has not been determined, the lottery result notification operation is terminated after the lottery result notification operation is maintained from the winning of the standby freeze trigger until the third game as shown in FIG. 98 (e). To do.

  On the other hand, when the execution of the standby freeze is not decided and the maintenance lottery is not won (for example, 80% is not won), the first game or the second game from the win of the standby freeze trigger is shown in FIG. 98 (d). As shown, the lottery result notification operation is terminated. By doing in this way, in addition to the expectation that the freeze effect is executed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for maintaining the lottery result notification operation, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Note that the movable effect member 135 may be lowered or raised step by step for each subtraction of the maintenance counter.

  If you win a rare role, you may get AT rights. In other words, the lottery result notifying operation suggests the possibility of winning a special prize and also suggests the possibility of acquiring the AT right. Here, in the normal game state ST10, the first stop operation that is the first effective stop operation in the game is an operation that is not for the left reel 6a as an irregular stop operation. Regarding the occurrence of (including the ART state), the player is in a disadvantageous penalty state (a state in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed), but if this irregular stop operation is performed, the lottery result The notification operation may not be performed. This is because the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed in this case. Further, the lottery result notifying operation may not be performed even in the penalty state.

  That is, a stop operation part (reel stop button 24) for performing a stop operation corresponding to each of the plurality of reels 6 is provided, and based on the fact that the stop operation was performed in a predetermined irregular operation order, When a penalty state generating means (effect control device 70) capable of generating a penalty state unfavorable to the player is provided, and the game effect control means (effect control device 70) is stopped in the irregular operation order In other words, even if the specific combination is won or won, the game effect device 120 may not perform the effect operation. Therefore, the player can be conscious of not performing an irregular stop operation that may cause a penalty state.

  Here, the penalty state unfavorable to the player is, for example, the acquisition of the right to shift to a state where the progress of the game is invalidated for a predetermined period or the assist information regarding the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. Anything may be used such that the lottery is not performed over a predetermined number of games.

  Next, the effect by the game effect device 120 in the specific game state ST30 will be described. The specific gaming state ST30 is a state in which when a special combination that is not established unless it is a predetermined push order is won internally, the push order is notified to assist the derivation of the special combination. Here, as special roles, promotion replays A to F, inrush replays A to F, extra name play, additional middle replays, fall replays A to F and bells A to F are set. The order can be notified.

  For example, the transition to the specific gaming state ST30 is achieved by acquiring the AT right that is the right to transition to the AT state in the normal gaming state ST10, and the transition control is performed by the effect control device 70. It has become. In other words, the effect control device 70 serves as a specific game generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the stop order of the reels in which the special winning combination is established is notified based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the normal game state. . Note that the game control device 50 may control the transition, or the game control device 50 and the effect control device 70 may cooperate to perform the transition control.

  In the specific game state ST30, the winning suggestion image 141 shown in FIG. 84 is displayed on the image display device 3 to notify or suggest the winning combination, and as shown in FIG. 85, the movable effect member 135 of the game effect device 120 is displayed. To notify the push order. The state shown in FIG. 85 shows a notification state in a state where none of the reels 6 is stopped after the game is started.

  For example, the pattern 1 notifies that the pressing order is left, middle, and right. The movable effect member 135 of the left effect unit 130a corresponding to the first left reel 6a in the pushing order is arranged at the lower end position of the operation range and the number of “1” is displayed on the 7-segment display 137, The light emitting unit 136 has the highest luminance.

  Further, the movable effect member 135 of the middle effect unit 130b corresponding to the second middle reel 6b in the pushing order is arranged at the center position of the operation range and the number “2” is displayed on the 7-segment display 137. The brightness of the decorative light emitting unit 136 is set to a medium level. Further, the movable effect member 135 of the right effect unit 130c corresponding to the third right reel 6c in the pressing order is arranged at the upper end position of the operation range and the number “3” is displayed on the 7-segment display 137. The decorative light emitting unit 136 has the lowest luminance. The luminance of the decorative light emitting unit 136 is assumed to increase in the order of low luminance, medium luminance, and high luminance.

  Similarly, in the other patterns, the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 with the first pushing order is the maximum operation with respect to the position at the upper end of the operation range which is the default position (operation standby position) in the specific gaming state. As the order information (push order navigation display) corresponding to the stop order of the reels 6 on the 7-segment display 137, it is arranged at the position at the lower end of the motion range that constitutes the maximum motion position, which is the position. The number “1” is displayed, and the decorative light emitting unit 136 has the highest luminance.

  In addition, the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 with the second pushing order is disposed at the center position of the movement range serving as the intermediate movement position (push order navigation operation), and the reel 6 on the 7-segment display 137. The number “2” is displayed as the order information corresponding to the stop order (push order navigation display), and the brightness of the decorative light emitting unit 136 is set to a medium brightness.

  In addition, the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 with the third pushing order is positioned at the upper end of the operating range (the minimum operating position that is the minimum operating position relative to the upper end of the operating range that is the default position). Here, the number “3” is displayed on the 7-segment display 137 as the order information (push order navigation display) corresponding to the stop order of the reels 6. Thus, the luminance of the decorative light emitting unit 136 is the lowest and the lowest.

  Since the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 that is the earliest pushing order is arranged at the first position at the lower end of the operation range, this movable effect member 135 is more than the other movable effect members 135. It is arranged at a position close to the reel 6, and the change in the appearance is larger than the notification by simply displaying it, and it is easier for the player to understand that it is the earliest push order and can be notified effectively. .

  Further, the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 that is the next pushing order is arranged at the intermediate operation position, and the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 that is the next pushing order is arranged at the minimum operation position. Further, the change in the appearance of the subsequent pressing order is larger than that in which notification is simply made by display, and it is easier for the player to understand and effective notification can be made. In this way, by notifying the push order by the operation of the movable effect member 135, it becomes possible to provide an informative notification that cannot be achieved by a simple display notification.

  That is, the movable effect member 135 of the effect unit 130 corresponding to the reel 6 to be stopped is sequentially moved from the second position at the upper end of the operation range and far from the reel 6 in the order of stop, and from the reel 6 at the lower end of the operation range. By controlling to move to a close first position, the stop order of the reels 6 in which a special combination winning is established is notified. In addition to this, by displaying the order information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 6 on the 7-segment display 137, or by changing the brightness of the decorative light emitting unit 136, the player can win a special role. The stop order of the reels 6 can be accurately understood.

  In addition, the notification mode of the push order by arrangement | positioning of each movable effect member 135 is not restricted to this. For example, the position of the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 that is the earliest pushing order is not relative to the first position that is the lower end of the operation range, but relative to the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the other reel 6. It may be arranged only at a position close to the reel 6. In addition, the position of the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 that is the earliest pushing order is not limited to this, and the player can grasp the position of the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the other reels 6 relatively. And the position of the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 that is the earliest pushing order may not be a position relatively closer to the reel 6 than the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the other reels 6. .

  The movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 on which the stop operation has been performed is configured to return to the default position (operation standby position) in the specific gaming state. That is, the movable effect member 135 of the effect unit 130 corresponding to the reel 6 on which the stop operation has been performed is moved from the first position to the second position. Then, the display on the 7-segment display 137 of the movable effect member 135 is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off, and the light emission of the decorative light emitting unit 136 is also terminated. Thereby, the player can immediately understand that the reel 6 corresponding to the movable effect member 135 is removed from the stop target. In addition, the state of the movable effect member 135 is a state before the game is started, and the movable effect member 135 is sequentially returned to the state before the game start by the stop operation, so that the next game is started. The push order can be notified promptly.

  Each time the stop operation is performed, the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 that is the next pushing order is moved to the position of the lower end of the operating range that is the maximum operating position, and the reel that becomes the next pushing order. The movable effect member 135 corresponding to 6 is moved to the center position of the operation range which is the intermediate operation position. As a result, the reel 6 to be stopped next can be effectively notified. Further, each time the stop operation is performed, the brightness of the decorative light emitting portion 136 of the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 that is the next pushing order is made high, and the reel 6 that is the next pushing order The brightness of the decorative light emitting unit 136 of the corresponding movable effect member 135 is set to medium brightness. This also effectively notifies the reel 6 to be stopped next.

  That is, when the movable effect member 135 of the effect unit 130 corresponding to the reel 6 to be stopped next is arranged at the maximum operation position and the brightness of the decorative light emitting unit 136 is set to a high luminance, the reel 6 to be stopped next is determined. A predetermined operation for notification is performed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner the reel stop order in which the special combination winning is established.

  FIG. 86 shows a notification mode in the case where the left, middle and right push order bells are won in the ART state ST35. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), before the start of the game, all the movable effect members 135 are arranged at the upper end of the operation range. This position is a default position (operation standby position) of the movable effect member 135 in the specific game state ST30. Further, the 7-segment display 137 is turned off.

  Then, when the game is started by operating the start lever 21, an effect is displayed on the image display device 3 where the wizard character summons the character forming the winning suggestion image 141 corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. Here, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the character corresponding to the push order bell is displayed. In addition, the winning suggestion image 141 is displayed above each effect unit 130 corresponding to each reel 6. Furthermore, the movable effect member 135 operates so as to be in the state of pattern 1 in FIG. 85 to indicate that the pressing order is left, middle, and right, and the display of the 7-segment display 137 and the decoration light-emitting unit 136. Light emission starts.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the player performs the stop operation of the left reel 6a in the pressing order, the movable effect member 135 of the corresponding left effect unit 130a moves to the upper end position (default position) of the operation range. At the same time, the 7-segment display 137 is fully lit. Note that the 7-segment display 137 maintains a fully lit state for a predetermined time, and then turns off completely. Accordingly, the decorative light emitting unit 136 is also turned off. Further, in the image display device 3, in accordance with the operation of the movable effect member 135 of the left effect unit 130a, an effect that the character forming the winning suggestion image 141 displayed above the left effect unit 130a explodes and disappears is displayed. The

  Further, in accordance with the operation of the movable effect member 135 of the left effect unit 130a, the movable effect member 135 of the middle effect unit 130b corresponding to the middle reel 6b that is the next pushing order moves to the lower end of the operation range, and the decorative light emission is performed. The luminance of the unit 136 is changed from medium luminance to high luminance. In addition, the movable effect member 135 of the right effect unit 130c corresponding to the right reel 6c to be pushed next moves to the center of the operation range, and the brightness of the decorative light emitting unit 136 is changed from low brightness to medium brightness. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (d), when the player performs a stop operation of the middle reel 6b in the pressing order, the movable effect member 135 of the corresponding middle effect unit 130b is located at the upper end position (default position) of the operation range. And the 7-segment display 137 is fully lit. Note that the 7-segment display 137 maintains a fully lit state for a predetermined time, and then turns off completely. Accordingly, the decorative light emitting unit 136 is also turned off. Further, in the image display device 3, in accordance with the operation of the movable effect member 135 of the medium effect unit 130b, an effect that the character forming the winning suggestion image 141 displayed above the medium effect unit 130b explodes and disappears is displayed. The

  Further, in accordance with the operation of the movable effect member 135 of the middle effect unit 130b, the movable effect member 135 of the right effect unit 130c corresponding to the right reel 6c to be pushed next moves to the lower end of the operation range, and the decorative light emission is performed. The luminance of the unit 136 is changed from medium luminance to high luminance.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (e), when the player performs a stop operation of the right reel 6c according to the pressing order, the movable effect member 135 of the corresponding right effect unit 130c is at the upper end position (default position) of the operation range. And the 7-segment display 137 is fully lit. The 7-segment display 137 maintains a state in which it is fully lit for a predetermined time, and then is in a state in which it is completely turned off. Accordingly, the decorative light emitting unit 136 is also turned off. Further, in the image display device 3, in accordance with the operation of the movable effect member 135 of the right effect unit 130c, an effect in which the character forming the winning suggestion image 141 displayed above the right effect unit 130c explodes and disappears is displayed. The

  When the 7-segment display 137 of the right effect unit 130c is completely turned off and the decorative light emitting unit 136 is also turned off, all the movable effect members 135 are returned to the state before the game. Then, by starting the next game, the effect shown in FIG. 86 (a) is started again. In addition, although the push order is not notified in the winning suggestion image 141, the push order information may be added to the winning suggestion image 141.

  FIG. 87 shows an example when the notified pressing order is not followed. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the game is started by operating the start lever 21, and as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the reels 6 are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right, and the bell winning is established. You will be informed that you have won the order bell.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), when the player first stops the middle reel 6b without following the pressing order, the notification of the stop order is stopped and the operation warning effect is performed. As this operation warning effect, as an operation warning notification operation for notifying that the pressing order is wrong, all the movable effect members 135 are placed at the upper end position of the operation range which is the default position (operation standby position) in the specific gaming state. Moving. In addition, “Err (error meaning)” is displayed as an operation warning notification display for notifying that the pressing order of the three movable effect members 135 on the 7-segment display 137 has ended and the pressing order is incorrect. Is done. Further, “Warning !!” is displayed on the image display device 3 as a warning display 142 for notifying that the pressing order is wrong, and a warning sound is emitted from the speaker 4.

  Further, the progress of the effect on the image display device 3 is stopped, and the effect that the winning suggestion image 141 accompanying the stop of the reel 6 disappears is not performed. The “Err” operation warning notification display on the 7-segment display 137 of the movable effect member 135 and the “warning !!” warning display 142 on the image display device 3 are continued until the end of the game. Yes. Further, a warning sound is emitted each time the player stops the reel 6 as shown in FIGS. 87 (d) and 87 (e).

  Although the stop of the first reel was in the order of pressing, if the pressing order was incorrect when the second reel was stopped, the progress of the production on the image display device 3 was stopped at that time, and a similar operation warning was issued. Operation warning effects such as notification operation, operation warning notification display, warning display 142, and output of warning sound are performed. By performing such an operation warning effect, it is possible to immediately understand that the player has performed a stop operation ignoring the notification of the stop order.

[Specified game effect processing]
FIG. 88 shows a specific game effect process in the game effect device control process shown in FIG. In the specific game time effect process, first, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command transmitted from the game control device 50 at the start of the game has been received (step S861). If this lottery result command has not been received (step S861; N), it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 has stopped is received (step S868). If a lottery result command has been received (step S861; Y), it is determined whether the assist target state is in effect (step S862).

  The assist target state is the specific game state ST30, which is not the preparation AT state ST34 and the transition chance state ST31. If it is in the assist target state (step S862; Y), it is determined whether or not the assist target combination is won (step S863). The assist target combination is a combination that cannot be established unless it is in a predetermined order. That is, it is a special combination in which a winning is achieved by stopping a plurality of reels 6 in a predetermined stop order.

  When the winning combination is won (step S863; Y), the push order information corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on 7 segments of each movable effect member (step S864). As a result, any one of the numbers “1”, “2”, and “3” is displayed on the 7-segment display 137 as a push order navigation display indicating the push order. Next, each movable effect member is operated (moved) according to the pressing order information (step S865), and it is determined whether a reel stop command has been received (step S868). Thereby, the push order navigation operation in which the movable effect member 135 moves to the position corresponding to the push order is performed, and the movable effect member 135 is in any one of the patterns shown in FIG. That is, the unit control means (production control device 70) can notify the stop order of the reels in which the special combination winning is established by operating a plurality of production units in a predetermined manner in the special combination winning game. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the assist target state (step S862; N) or when the assist target combination is not won (step S863; N), the 7-segment stop event (stop display mode) corresponding to the lottery result is determined. (Step S866), the 7-segment change start in all the movable effect members is set (Step S867), and it is determined whether the reel stop command is received (Step S868). In this case, the 7-segment display 137 of the movable effect member 135 performs the same operation as in the normal gaming state ST10.

  If the reel stop command has not been received (step S868; N), it is determined whether a game result command including information on the winning determination result has been received (step S875). If a reel stop command is received (step S868; Y), it is checked whether the stop operation is appropriate for the pressing order information (step S869).

  If the stop operation is appropriate (step S870; Y), stop information is temporarily displayed on the 7-segment of the movable effect member corresponding to the stop reel (step S871). As a result, the 7-segment display 137 is completely turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Then, each movable effect member is moved according to the pressing order information and the stop state (step S872), and it is determined whether a game result command is received (step S875). As a result, the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the reel 6 in the next push order moves to the lower end position of the operation range which is the maximum operation position, and the movable effect member corresponding to the reel 6 in the next push order. 135 moves to the center position of the operation range which is the intermediate operation position.

  On the other hand, if the stop operation is not appropriate (step S870; N), warning (error) information is displayed on the 7 segments of each movable effect member (step S873), and all the movable effect members are set to the default positions in the specific gaming state. It moves (returns) (step S874) and determines whether a game result command has been received (step S875). As a result, the notification of the stop order is stopped and all the movable effect members 135 are moved to the upper end position of the operation range which is the default position, and “Err (error)” is displayed on the 7-segment display 137 as an operation warning notification display. "Is displayed. Note that a process of displaying “Warning !!” as a warning display on the image display device 3 and a process of generating a warning sound from the speaker 4 are also performed separately.

  When the game result command has not been received (step S875; N), the specific game time effect process ends. Further, when a game result command is received (step S875; Y), it is determined whether or not to shift to the normal gaming state (step S876), and when shifting (step S876; Y), the movable effect member is moved to the normal gaming state. It moves to the default position in the middle (position at the lower end of the motion range) (step S877), and the specific game time effect process is terminated.

  If the game state does not shift to the normal gaming state (step S876; N), it is determined whether a bonus winning (special winning) has been established (step S878). When the bonus winning is not established (step S878; N), the specific game time effect process is terminated. If the bonus winning is established (step S878; Y), the movable effect member is moved to the default position in the special game state (step S879), and the specific game effect processing is terminated. Note that the default position in the special game state is an intermediate position in the operation range, and each movable effect member 135 is moved up and down once moved to the default position.

  From the above, a plurality of reels 6 that can display a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, a lottery means (game control device 50) that performs an internal lottery for each execution of a game involving a variable display of the plurality of reels 6, and a plurality of reels 6 A plurality of stop operation sections (reel stop buttons 24) for individually stopping and displaying the reels 6, and the result of the game stopped and displayed by the operation of the plurality of stop operation sections is a winning combination in the internal lottery In the corresponding stop symbol form, in the slot machine where the winning combination is established, a plurality of effect units 130 that can operate in a predetermined manner and a unit control that can control the plurality of effect units 130 Means (production control device 70), and the winning combination in the internal lottery includes a special combination in which a winning is achieved by stopping the reels 6 in a predetermined stopping order. DOO control means, by operating in a predetermined manner a plurality of rendering units 130 in winning game special role, and thus winning the special combination is capable notifying the stop order of the reels 6 to be satisfied. Therefore, by using a plurality of effect units 130 that can be operated, it is possible to provide an interesting notification of the operation sequence of the stop operation unit, which cannot be achieved simply by display notification.

  In addition, the plurality of effect units 130 are disposed above the plurality of stop operation units (reel stop buttons 24) disposed below the plurality of reels 6. Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize the plurality of effect units 130 from the player, and the effect of notification and effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the plurality of effect units 130 are disposed above the plurality of reels 6 disposed above the plurality of stop operation units (reel stop buttons 24). Therefore, it becomes easy for the surrounding players to visually recognize the operation of the effect unit 130, and it is possible to attract interest to the slot machine.

  Further, the plurality of effect units 130 are set to the same number as the plurality of reels 6 and are respectively disposed at positions corresponding to the plurality of reels 6, and unit control means (effect control device 70) By causing the effect unit 130 corresponding to the reel 6 to be stopped to perform a predetermined operation, the stop order of the reels 6 in which the special combination winning is established is notified. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the stop order of the reels 6 in which the special combination winning is established in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The effect unit 130 can be moved between a movable effect member 135 movably provided, and a movable effect member 135 between a first position closer to the reel 6 and a second position farther from the reel 6 than the first position. And a unit control means (production control device 70) sequentially moves the movable production member 135 of the production unit 130 corresponding to the reel 6 to be stopped from the second position to the first position. By controlling so as to be moved to the position, the stop order of the reels 6 in which the special combination winning is established is notified. Therefore, the change in the appearance is increased by the movement of the movable effect member, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the stop order of the reels 6.

  Further, the unit control means (effect control device 70) moves the movable effect member 135 of the effect unit 130 corresponding to the reel 6 on which the stop operation has been performed from the first position to the second position. . Therefore, it can be immediately understood that the reel 6 corresponding to the movable effect member 135 moved to the second position by the player has been removed from the stop target.

  Further, the unit control means (the effect control device 70) is configured to stop the notification of the stop order by the effect unit 130 when the stop operation of the reel 6 is performed in an order different from the notified stop order. It becomes. Therefore, it can be immediately understood that the player has performed the stop operation ignoring the notification of the stop order.

  Further, a specific game generating means (effect control device 70) capable of generating a specific game state in which a stop order of the reels 6 in which a special combination winning is established is informed based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during the normal game state. The unit control means (the effect control device 70) sets the initial position of the movable effect member 135 as the first position when the normal game state is occurring, while the specific game state is occurring. In other words, the initial position of the movable effect member 135 is set to the second position. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the gaming state based on the position of the movable effect member 135. Further, when the stop order is notified in the specific gaming state, it is not necessary to move the movable effect member 135 to the second position.

  Further, the effect unit 130 includes a display unit (7-segment display 137) that can display predetermined information, and the unit control means (effect control device 70) wins a special role for the display unit of the effect unit 130. It is possible to display order information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 6 in which Therefore, it is possible to accurately understand the stop order of the reels 6 in which the player wins the special combination.

  Further, the unit control means (production control device 70) displays warning information on the display unit (7-segment display 137) of the production unit 130 when the reel 6 is stopped in an order different from the notified stop order. Can be displayed. Therefore, it can be immediately understood that the player has performed the stop operation ignoring the notification of the stop order.

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
Next, a modification of the slot machine of the second embodiment will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, the description thereof is omitted, and different portions are mainly described. To do. In the slot machine of this modification, the movable effect member 135 of the game effect device 120 can be rotated in addition to the vertical movement as shown in FIG.

  The movable effect member 135 of this modification is configured by a rear part and a front part 138 disposed so as to overlap the front side of the rear part. The rear part is connected to one end of the link mechanism of the drive mechanism part 131 and includes a guided part that is slidably engaged with the slide guide groove 132 so that it moves up and down as the drive mechanism part 131 operates. It has become.

  The front portion 138 includes a decorative light emitting portion 136, a 7-segment display 137, and the like, and is arranged so as to overlap the front side of the rear portion so that the player can visually recognize it. The front portion 138 is connected to the rear portion via a rotation shaft 139 along the front-rear direction. By driving a drive unit provided in the movable effect member 135, the front portion 138 is centered on the rotation shaft 139. As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), it is rotatable with respect to the rear part. That is, the front part 138 can move up and down together with the rear part and can rotate with respect to the rear part, so that the movable effect member 135 can move up and down and turn from the player. Looks like.

  In this modification, by using such a movable effect member 135, the swing operation realized by repeating the rotation operation shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b) is set as the lottery result notification operation. It has been suggested to make a selection of a rare role that has the possibility of overlapping with a special prize, or to acquire AT rights, or a special prize. FIG. 100 shows the types of the subject combination and the movable effect member 135 to be swayed and the ratio of the swaying motion.

  If the three-piece combination A, D or the single-piece combination A is won, the swinging operation of the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the first stop reel is performed at a rate of 30%. When the three-piece combination B, E, the bell G or the single-piece combination B is won, the swinging operation of the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the first and second stop reels is performed at a ratio of 75%. In addition, when the three-piece combination C or the special prize is won, the swing operation of the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the first, second, and third stop reels is performed at a rate of 100%.

  FIG. 101 shows an example in which the swing action is performed by winning the three-piece combination A (weak cherry) in the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the state where the lottery result notifying operation is not performed in the normal gaming state, each movable effect member 135 is arranged as the default position at the first position which is the lower end position in the operation range. The Then, based on the operation of the start lever 21, the display of fluctuation of the reel 6 is started, and the display of fluctuation on the 7-segment display 137 is also started.

  Here, a weak cherry is won by an internal lottery performed based on the operation of the start lever 21, and a winning announcement effect indicating the winning is displayed on the image display device 3. In this case, it has already been determined to perform the swinging operation by internal lottery. Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the player operates the left reel stop button 24a as the first stop to stop the left reel 6a, the movable effect member 135 provided in the left effect unit 130a. Starts swinging motion. This swinging operation is continued until the end of the game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the player operates the middle reel stop button 24b as the second stop to stop the middle reel 6b, the movable effect member provided in the middle effect unit 130b. The swing operation 135 is not performed. Thereafter, even when the player operates the right reel stop button 24c to stop the right reel 6c, the swing operation of the movable effect member 135 provided in the right effect unit 130c is not performed.

  In this example, the left reel 6a is stopped at the timing when the cherry winning is established as the first stopping operation, so it can be seen that the cherry winning is won, and further, the swing motion is performed during the second stopping operation. Since it is not broken, it can be determined that the cherry is weak at this point. In addition, if the left reel 6a is stopped at a timing at which a cherry prize cannot be established as the first stop operation, the swinging motion is not performed at the time of the second stop operation. It is possible to discriminate between the weak watermelon and the chance eye A. In this example, the winning combination is suggested by the 7-segment display 137, but this may not be performed.

  FIG. 102 shows an example in which a swing action is performed by winning three-piece combination B (strong cherry) in the normal gaming state. The processes up to FIGS. 102A and 102B are the same as those in FIGS. 102A and 102B described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), as the player operates the middle reel stop button 24b as the second stop to stop the middle reel 6b, the movable effect member 135 provided in the middle effect unit 130b. Starts swinging motion. This swinging operation is continued until the end of the game. When the player operates the right reel stop button 24c to stop the right reel 6c, the swing operation of the movable effect member 135 provided in the right effect unit 130c is not performed.

  In this example, the left reel 6a is stopped at the timing when the cherry winning is established as the first stopping operation, so it can be seen that the cherry winning is won, and further, the swing motion is performed during the second stopping operation. Therefore, it can be determined that the cherry is a strong cherry at this point. Also, if the left reel 6a is stopped at a timing at which a cherry winning cannot be established as the first stop operation, the swinging motion is not performed at the time of the third stop operation. The strong watermelon, the middle bell, or the chance eye B can be discriminated. In this example, the winning combination is also suggested by the 7-segment display 137, but this may not be performed.

  In addition, although the ratio of performing the swing motion is set according to the type of winning combination, the presence / absence of a special winning combination may be considered. For example, the swing operation is performed at a higher rate in the case of overlapping winning with a special prize than in the case of not winning overlappingly. Further, the swing motion may be performed in any of the normal gaming state ST10 and the specific gaming state ST30, or may be performed only in one gaming state.

  In the normal game state ST10, the first stop operation, which is the first effective stop operation in the game, is an operation that is not for the left reel 6a, and the abnormal stop operation is performed. The player is in a disadvantageous penalty state (a state in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed) with respect to the occurrence of the ART state), but if this irregular stop operation is performed, the swing motion You may not perform.

  Further, although the winning combination is suggested by the number of movable effect members to be swung, the winning combination may be suggested by a swinging mode such as a swinging width and a swinging manner. In this case, all the movable effect members 135 may always be swung. In addition, the swing mode may be changed according to the degree of expectation such as the high possibility of duplicate winning for the winning combination and the possibility of acquiring the AT right. Increase the rate of increase of the swing width. Moreover, although the thing which the movable production | presentation member 135 rotates was demonstrated, even if it does not rotate, the same alert | report can also be performed by performing the operation | movement which repeats a vertical motion and shakes.

  FIG. 103 shows an example of a push order effect that is a predetermined chance effect that is executed in a game that may acquire the AT right. In this modified example, when the entry replay is won in the transition chance state ST31, a push order effect is performed. It should be noted that the push order effect may be executed when the entry replay is won in a game state other than the transition chance state ST31.

  In the transition chance state ST31 of this modification, the display on the image display device 3, the initial position of the movable effect member 135, and the like are the same as in the normal gaming state ST10. In this case, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the internal lottery performed based on the operation of the start lever 21, the middle, left, and right entry replays are won.

  As a push order application effect, the image display device 3 performs an effect display that prompts the user to apply the push order. In this effect display, a guidance effect window 143 for displaying characters and an operation result display 144 corresponding to each reel 6 are displayed. Further, the movable effect member 135 rises from the initial position and moves to the center of the movable range, and the swinging operation is performed at this position, and the decorative light emitting unit 136 and the 7-segment display 137 are blinked. This swinging operation and the blinking display of the decorative light emitting unit 136 and the 7-segment display 137 are performed until the corresponding reel 6 is stopped. The decorative light emitting unit 136 and the 7-segment display 137 are blinked.

  When the player stops the middle reel 6b that matches the pushing order as the first stop operation, the movable effect member 135 of the corresponding medium effect unit 130b rises to the second position and is maintained, as shown in FIG. 103 (b). At the same time, the blinking display of the decorative light emitting unit 136 and the 7-segment display 137 is terminated. Further, the correct answer “ping-pong” is output from the speaker 4, and the operation result display 144 corresponding to the middle reel 6 b of the image display device 3 changes from “?” To “◯”.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the left reel 6a that matches the pressing order as the second stop operation, the movable effect member 135 of the corresponding left effect unit 130a rises to the second position as shown in FIG. 103 (c). And the blinking display of the decorative light emitting unit 136 and the 7-segment display 137 is terminated. Further, the correct answer sound is output from the speaker 4, and the operation result display 144 corresponding to the left reel 6 a of the image display device 3 changes from “?” To “◯”.

  When the player stops the right reel 6c that matches the pressing order as the third stop operation, the movable effect member 135 of the corresponding right effect unit 130c is raised to the second position and maintained, and the decorative light emitting unit 136 is also maintained. And the blinking display of the 7-segment display 137 ends. Further, the correct answer sound is output from the speaker 4, and the operation result display 144 corresponding to the right reel 6 c of the image display device 3 changes from “?” To “◯”. As a result, a rush replay winning is established, and the state shifts to the ART state ST35. It should be noted that the second position where the movable effect member 135 is maintained when the pressing order is correct in each stop operation is the initial position in the ART state ST35, and the transition to the ART state is smoothly performed by such movement. It can be carried out.

  On the other hand, when a stop operation that does not match the push order is performed, the movable effect member 135 of the corresponding medium effect unit 130b is raised to the second position as shown in FIG. 103 (d), and the decorative light emitting parts 136 and 7-segment display are displayed. The blinking display of the device 137 ends. In addition, the incorrect answer sound “BOO” is output from the speaker 4, and the operation result display 144 corresponding to the reel 6 b in the image display device 3 changes from “?” To “X”.

  Since it is determined that the rush replay is not established at this time, the swing operation of all the movable effect members 135 is finished, and the first position, which is the initial position, is lowered. The blinking display of the decorative light emitting unit 136 and the 7-segment display 137 corresponding to the reel 6 on which the stop operation has been performed ends, and the decorative light-emitting unit 136 and 7 segment corresponding to the reel 6 on which the stop operation has not yet been performed. The blinking display on the display 137 is continued. Further, in the image display device 3, the display is darkened, the characters “sorry ~!” Are displayed in the guidance effect window 143 for displaying characters, and the operation result display 144 corresponding to each reel 6 is ended.

  Even when the first stop operation is a stop operation that matches the pressing order, but the second stop operation is a stop operation that does not match the pressing order, the same operation is performed at that time. In addition, when a stop operation that does not match the push order is performed, a freeze state in which the stop operation is invalidated may be generated for a time required for the movable effect member 135 to descend to the first position ( Short freeze state).

  Further, here, since it is understood that the winning replay is won, the internal lottery result is not notified by the outcome of the 7-segment display 137, but it may be performed. Moreover, although the thing which the movable production | presentation member 135 rotates was demonstrated, even if it does not rotate, the same alert | report can also be performed by performing the operation | movement which repeats a vertical motion and shakes.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, the description thereof is omitted, and different portions are mainly described. To do. In the slot machine of the present embodiment, the reel 6 is movable along the rotation axis direction.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the variable display device 100 of the present embodiment includes a light emitting base member 110 provided in the slot machine of the first embodiment and a backlight 111 that illuminates the reel 6 from the rear (inner circumference side). A reel moving mechanism unit 150 and a hidden effect device 160 are provided instead of the winning line light emitting unit 112 indicating the winning and the positioning unit 113 for manually aligning the symbols of the reel 6. Note that the backlight 111 and the like may be left as they are.

  In the concave chamber-like space 102 of the reel base member 101, three reel units 103 including a reel 6, a reel motor 64, and the like, a left reel unit 103a, a middle reel unit 103b, and a right reel unit 103c are arranged side by side. It is arranged with. The rotation axis of each reel 6 provided in each reel unit 103 is arranged along one straight line along the left-right direction.

  In the left reel unit 103a, a drive mechanism such as a reel motor 64 is supported by a left reel moving mechanism 151 attached to a left inner wall 102a that forms a concave chamber-like space 102 of the reel base member 101. The left reel 6a rotates with respect to the left reel moving mechanism 151, that is, with respect to the reel base member 101. The left reel moving mechanism 151 can move the left reel 6a to the left and right between the middle reel 6b and the left inner wall 102a forming the concave chamber-like space 102.

  The right reel unit 103c has a driving mechanism such as a reel motor 64 supported by a right reel moving mechanism 152 attached to a right inner wall 102c forming a concave chamber-like space 102 of the reel base member 101. The right reel 6c rotates with respect to the right reel moving mechanism 152, that is, with respect to the reel base member 101. The right reel moving mechanism 152 can move the right reel 6c to the left and right between the middle reel 6b and the right inner wall 102c forming the concave space 102.

  Further, the middle reel unit 103b has a drive mechanism such as a reel motor 64 supported by a reel support portion attached to an inner wall forming a concave chamber-like space 102 of the reel base member 101. The middle reel 6b It rotates with respect to the reel support portion, that is, with respect to the reel base member 101. Furthermore, a first hidden effect device 161 is disposed at the left position of the middle reel 6b, and a second hidden effect device 162 is disposed at the right position of the middle reel 6b. These hidden effect devices 160 are supported by a reel support portion that supports the middle reel unit 103b. Note that the symbol display window 5 of the front frame 2 is sized so that all the reels 6 can always be seen by the player even if the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c move to the left and right. Even if it moves, the visual recognition of the symbol is not hindered. Note that the movement range of the symbol display window 5 and the reel 6 may be configured so that the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c move to the outside of the symbol display window 5 when moving to the left and right.

  The left reel 6a is provided with an accommodation space that is open in the circumferential direction between the outer peripheral surface around which the sheet 6d on which the design is drawn is wound and the rotation shaft, and faces the middle reel 6b. The hidden effect device 161 can be accommodated in the accommodation space 171.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), in a state where the left reel 6a is in the storage position that is the position of the end on the middle reel 6b side in the left and right operation range, the first hidden effect device 161 is stored in the left reel 6a. It is accommodated in the space 171 and a part thereof is visible from between the left reel 6a and the middle reel 6b. In this state, the first hidden effect device 161 does not perform the effect operation. Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), in the state where the left reel 6a is in the effect position which is the position of the left inner wall 102a side in the left and right operation range, the first hidden effect device 161 is the left reel. The entire space can be visually recognized between the left reel 6a and the middle reel 6b by being completely exposed from the housing space 171 in the 6a. The first hidden effect device 161 performs an effect operation in this state.

  That is, a region including the accommodation space 171 inside the left reel 6a and the space between the left reel 6a and the middle reel 6b constitutes a first effect space 172 in which the first effect device 161 is disposed. The 1 effect device 161 performs an effect operation in the first effect space 172. Further, the reel 6 moves so as to widen the interval between the adjacent reels 6, so that the hidden effect device 160 that performs the effect operation in the effect space 170 can be easily recognized. It can be said that the production spaces 171 and 172 are provided inside the reel 6 so as to face between the adjacent reels 6.

  Similarly, the right reel 6c is provided with an accommodation space 173 that opens in the direction facing the middle reel 6b along the circumferential direction between the outer peripheral surface around which the sheet 6d on which the design is drawn is wound and the rotation shaft. The second hidden effect device 162 can be accommodated in the accommodation space 173.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), in a state where the right reel 6c is in the storage position which is the position of the end on the middle reel 6b side in the left and right operation range, the second hidden effect device 162 is stored in the right reel 6c. It is accommodated in the space 173 and a part of the space is visible from between the right reel 6c and the middle reel 6b. Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the second hidden rendering device 162 is on the right in the rendering state where the right reel 6c is in the rendering position that is the position of the right inner wall 102c side in the left and right motion range. The entire space (at least the main portion of the level meter) is visible between the right reel 6c and the middle reel 6b by being completely exposed from the accommodation space 173 in the reel 6c.

  That is, a region including the accommodation space 173 inside the right reel 6c and the space between the right reel 6c and the middle reel 6b constitutes a second effect space 174 in which the second effect device 162 is disposed. The 2 effect device 162 performs an effect operation in the second effect space 174.

  The first hidden effect device 161 includes a movable part 163 that can move up and down and includes a 7-segment display 164 that forms a light emitting member on the front surface, and the movable part 163 along the rotation direction of the reel 6 (variable display direction). A drive unit 165 that operates up and down is provided, and effects are provided by the manner in which the movable unit 163 moves up and down and the display mode on the 7-segment display 164. Since the movable section 163 includes the 7-segment display 164, the movable section 163 that performs the rendering operation in the first rendering space 172 can be made conspicuous and various information can be notified.

  In addition, the second hidden effect device 162 is similar to a level meter in which a plurality of LEDs 166 forming a light emitting member are arranged along the vertical direction that is the rotation direction of the reel 6 (variable display direction). This is a light emitting effect device that notifies the height of expectation by the number of LEDs 166 that emit light sequentially from the lower side.

  When the right reel 6c is in the storage position, the second hidden effect device 162 does not perform an effect by light emission or performs an effect by light emission with a luminance lower than the normal luminance, and the right reel 6c is at the effect position. In this case, an effect by light emission is performed with normal luminance. In this way, by changing the effect mode according to the position of the right reel 6c, the effect due to the light emission when the right reel 6c moves becomes noticeable, and the effect effect is improved. Since the first hidden effect device 161 and the second hidden effect device 162 that make up the hidden effect device 160 perform light emission and operation in this way, it is easier for the player to visually recognize and an effective effect can be performed. .

  Note that the reel moving mechanism 150 may move only the reel 6 left and right, or the reel unit 103 may move left and right. Moreover, when the position of the reel 6 to be operated is in the storage position, the first hidden rendering device 161 and the second hidden rendering device 162 may be completely stored in the storage spaces 171 and 172. The reel 6b, the left reel 6a, and the right reel 6c are arranged so as to be in close contact with each other, and the arrangement positions of the first hidden effect device 161 and the second hidden effect device 162 are set in the accommodation spaces 171 and 172 at the accommodation position. The position may be such that it is completely accommodated.

  Further, the hidden effect device 160 may be provided between the left reel 6a and the left inner wall 102a, or between the right reel 6c and the right inner wall 102c. Further, the middle reel 6b may be operable left and right along the rotation axis direction. Further, although the hidden effect device 160 performs a predetermined effect operation, it may be one that does not perform the operation.

  Further, although the reel 6 is operated in the direction of the rotation axis, the reel 6 may be operated in other directions. For example, it can be operated in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the reel 6 such as the front-rear direction, the up-down direction, or a combination of these, or the rotation axis of the reel 6 arranged along the left-right direction can be Alternatively, it may be operated so as to be inclined obliquely. Since each reel 6 is independently supported by the reel base member 101, each reel can be independently operated freely.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described left / right movement of the reel 6 and the effect by the hidden effect device 160 are performed in the freeze effect. FIG. 105 shows operation modes in special effects performed using the reel 6 and the hidden effect device 160 in various freeze effects. The operation control is performed by the effect control device 70.

  In the 5-second freeze effect, since the time to enter the freeze state is short, only the left and right reel swinging operation that moves the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c finely to the left and right is performed, and the effect in the hidden effect device 160 is not performed. In the 10-second freeze effect, after the left and right reel swinging operation, the left reel 6a is moved to the effect position, the effect of the first hidden effect device 161 is performed for a predetermined time, and then the left effect operation of returning the left reel 6a to the accommodation position is performed. Do.

  In the 15-second freeze effect, after the left and right reel swinging operation, the right reel 6c is moved to the effect position, the right hidden effect device 162 performs the effect for a predetermined time, and then the right reel 6c is returned to the accommodation position. Do. In the 60-second freeze effect, after the left and right reel swinging operation, the left effect operation is performed, the right effect operation is performed, and the left effect operation and the right effect operation are performed simultaneously. In the freeze effect based on the stand-by freeze, a left-right effect operation is performed, and one of two patterns of effects is performed in which a left effect operation and a right effect operation are performed.

  FIG. 106 shows the relationship between the result of the internal lottery and the rendering mode in the hidden rendering device 160. There are four types of effects in the hidden effect device 160: a weak effect, a medium effect, a strong effect, and a confirmed effect, which differ to the extent that the player can identify each. For example, in the first hidden effect device 161, the up and down movement of the movable part 163 is large in the order of a weak effect, a medium effect, a strong effect, and a final effect, and the display on the 7-segment display 164 is also different. Further, in the second hidden effect device 162, the number of light emission of the LED 166 from the lower side is increased in the order of the weak effect, the medium effect, the strong effect, and the final effect.

  Such a production mode is a case where a rare role is won alone and there is no overlap with a special prize, or a case where a special prize is won alone, a non-overlapping prize, a rare role and a special prize (excluding a PB prize) In the three cases of overlapping winning that is won in duplicate and PB winning that is won in the PB prize, selection is made according to a selection ratio determined respectively. This selection ratio is set to indicate that the player is likely to be advantageous in the order of weak production, medium production, strong production, and finalized production (high expectation). It is an effect that informs definitely that it is a special prize.

  FIG. 107 shows the reel change start order in the freeze effect based on the standby freeze. In this embodiment, the role that triggered the freeze effect (standby freeze) is indicated by the change start order of the reels 6 in the freeze effect. The game control device 50 controls this operation.

  For example, when the combination that triggered the freeze effect is the three-piece combination C, the variation starts in the order of the left reel 6a, the middle reel 6b, and the right reel 6c in the freeze effect. Thereby, the presentation effect in the frozen state can be enhanced while suggesting the result of the internal lottery. Note that the reel 6 that starts to fluctuate first for each standby freeze opportunity takes over the correspondence in the lottery result notification operation shown in FIG. 97, and is also the name of the standby freeze opportunity role displayed on the image display device 3. Together, it makes it easier for players to understand the role of standby freeze.

  Control related to the rotation of the reel 6 such as the control of the change start order and the control of the special effect that is the effect of the rotation of the reel 6 during the freeze effect is the normal freeze process in the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. Done. That is, the game control device 50 serves as a special effect execution means that can perform a special effect by variably displaying the reel 6 in a predetermined variable display mode while the freeze state is occurring.

[Normal freeze production processing]
In order to perform the above-described effect, the normal freeze effect process shown in FIG. 108 is performed instead of the normal freeze effect process shown in FIG. In the normal freeze effect process, first, an effect operation mode (see FIG. 105) corresponding to the type of freeze is acquired (step S881), and it is determined whether the effect is a 60-second freeze effect (step S882). In addition, although there are a case of immediate freeze and a case of standby freeze in the 60-second freeze effect, both are included here.

  If the 60 second freeze is not an effect (step S882; N), the effect mode of the hidden effect device is acquired at the selection rate (see FIG. 106) at the time of non-overlapping winning (step S883), and it is determined whether it is a bonus overlapping winning. (Step S884). When it is not a bonus overlapping winning (step S884; N), it is determined whether it is the reel swing timing in the left and right reel swing operation (step S887). When the bonus overlap win is selected (step S884; Y), the effect mode of the hidden effect device is acquired at the selection rate (see FIG. 106) at the time of overlap win (step S885), and the reel swing in the left and right reel swing operation is acquired. It is determined whether it is a moving timing (step S887).

  On the other hand, when the effect is a 60-second freeze (step S882; Y), that is, when the PB winning is won, the effect mode of the hidden effect device is acquired with the selection rate at the time of PB winning (see FIG. 106) ( Step S886), it is determined whether it is the reel swing timing in the left and right reel swing operation (step S887). Here, the definite effect operation is selected.

  And the control according to the acquired production | presentation operation | movement aspect and presentation aspect is performed. If it is the reel swing timing in the left and right reel swing operation (step S887; Y), the left and right reels are set to swing for a predetermined time (step S888), and it is determined whether it is the reel movement timing. (Step S889). If it is not the reel swing timing in the left and right reel swing operation (step S887; N), it is determined whether it is the reel movement timing (step S889).

  If it is the reel movement timing (step S889; Y), the reel movement is set in a mode corresponding to the acquired performance operation mode (step S890), and it is determined whether it is the production switching timing (step S891). . Thereby, either or both of the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c move from the accommodation position to the production position or from the production position to the accommodation position in accordance with the production operation mode and timing. If it is not the reel movement timing (step S889; N), it is determined whether it is the effect switching timing (step S891).

  When it is the effect switching timing (step S891; Y), the effect (light emission or operation) of the hidden effect device in a mode corresponding to the acquired effect mode is set (step S892), and whether the freeze effect is finished. Determination is made (step S893). As a result, either or both of the first hidden effect device 161 and the second hidden effect device 162 are operated according to the effect operation mode and timing. If it is not the effect switching timing (step S891; N), it is determined whether the freeze effect has ended (step S893).

  If the freeze effect has not ended (step S893; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not it is the reel swing timing (step S887). Further, when the freeze effect is finished (step S893; Y), the normal freeze effect process is finished. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as an effect control means capable of controlling the effect operation device (the hidden effect device 160).

  FIG. 109 shows an example of an effect operation when a 10-second freeze effect is performed during the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), before the start of the game, the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c are arranged in the storage position that is the position of the end on the middle reel 6b side in the operation range, and the first hidden effect device 161 and the second hidden effect device 162 are in a state where no effect operation is performed.

  By operating the start lever 21 from this state, the game is started and an internal lottery is performed. Here, as a result of the internal lottery, a 10-second freeze effect is selected as a selectable role, and execution of the 10-second freeze effect is selected, and the freeze effect is started as shown in FIG. 109 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the 10-second freeze effect, first, a left / right reel swinging operation is performed, and the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c are finely moved left and right. Further, the 7-segment display 137 of the movable effect member 135 is in a blinking state. At this stage, it is the same effect as other freeze effects with different freeze times, and it cannot be determined which freeze effect is made, so that the player can have a sense of expectation. For example, in the case of a 5-second freeze effect, the freeze effect ends after this left / right reel swing operation.

  Then, after performing the left and right reel swinging operation, the left side rendering operation is started. As shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the left effect operation, first, the left reel 6a is moved to the effect position to expose the first hidden effect device 161. Next, as shown in FIGS. 109D to 109F, an effect operation by the rotation of the reel 6 and an effect by the first hidden effect device 161 are performed.

  In this effect, first, as the reel 6 rotates in the reverse direction (upward) as shown in FIG. 109 (d), the movable portion 163 moves upward. Then, once the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped, the reel 6 rotates in the forward direction (downward) and the movable portion 163 moves downward as shown in FIG. 109 (e). Further, once the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped, the reel 6 rotates in the reverse direction and the movable portion 163 moves upward as shown in FIG. 109 (f).

  That is, the movable portion 163 operates in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel 6, and once the rotation of the reel 6 stops, the effect that the reel 6 and the movable portion 163 operate in a different direction from before the stop is repeated a predetermined number of times. Thus, by moving the movable part 163 so as to synchronize with the special effect by the reel 6, the operation effect of the reel 6 and the operation of the movable part 163 can be interlocked to enhance the effect effect during the freeze state.

  It should be noted that the movable section 163 is configured such that the 7-segment display 164, which is a light emitting member, does not emit light when the production operation is not performed, and the 7-segment display 164 emits light when the production operation is performed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly show that the rendering operation of the movable portion 163 is performed, and it is possible to improve the rendering effect by the movable portion 163.

  Further, the operation of the movable portion 163 and the display on the 7-segment display 164 are different depending on the weak, medium, strong, and finalized effects, and suggest the winning expectation degree of the special prize. The number of times the rotation direction of the reel 6 is changed, the number of reels 6 to be rotated, the rotation speed, and the like may be changed depending on the weak, medium, strong, and finalized effects. Further, the operation of the movable effect member 135 and the display change of the 7-segment display 137 may be accompanied, and the expectation degree of the special prize may be suggested by these.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (g), the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped, the left reel 6a returns to the storage position, and the effect on the first hidden effect device 161 ends, and the left effect operation ends. At this time, since it is the same production operation as the 60-second freeze effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that it is a 60-second freeze effect. Here, since it is a 10-second freeze effect, the freeze effect ends here. In addition, it can prevent that the moving operation | movement of the reel 6 obstructs the eye-pushing (stop operation) of the reel 6 by the reel 6 returning to an accommodation position by the end of a freeze production. Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (h), the reel 6 starts to rotate in the forward direction and can be stopped.

  FIG. 110 shows an example of an effect operation when a 15-second freeze effect is performed in the normal gaming state. Similarly to FIG. 109 (a), before the start of the game, the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c are arranged in the storage position that is the position of the end on the middle reel 6b side in the operation range, and the first hidden effect device 161 and the second hidden effect device 162 are in a state where no effect operation is performed.

  By operating the start lever 21 from this state, the game is started and an internal lottery is performed. Here, as a result of the internal lottery, a 15-second freeze effect is selected as a selectable role, and execution of the 15-second freeze effect is selected, and the freeze effect is started as shown in FIG. 110 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), in the 15-second freeze effect, first, the left and right reel swinging operations are performed, and the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c are finely moved left and right. Further, the 7-segment display 137 of the movable effect member 135 is in a blinking state. At this stage, it is the same effect as other freeze effects with different freeze times, and it cannot be determined which freeze effect is made, so that the player can have a sense of expectation.

  Then, after the left and right reel swinging operation is performed, the right effect operation is started. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), in this right effect operation, the right reel 6c is first moved to the effect position to expose the second hidden effect device 162. Next, as shown in FIGS. 110C to 110G, an effect operation by the rotation of the reel 6 and an effect by the second hidden effect device 162 are performed.

  In this effect, first, as the right reel 6c rotates in the reverse direction (upward) as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the LED 166 of the second hidden effect device 162 is interlocked with the rotation direction of the reel 6. Light up sequentially from the bottom. Thus, by changing the light emission mode so as to synchronize with the special effect by the reel 6, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect during the frozen state.

  The number of rotating reels 6 and the increasing speed and increasing number of lighting numbers are proportional. Here, since there is only one rotating reel 6, the increasing number of lightings is slow and increases beyond a certain number of lightings. It is supposed not to. Furthermore, when the middle reel 6b starts to rotate in the reverse direction as shown in FIG. 110 (d), the number of lighting of the LED 166 in the second hidden effect device 162 is accelerated as compared with the case of FIG. 110 (c). The number that can be lit increases.

  Thereafter, once the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped, the reel 6 rotates in the forward direction (downward) as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the LEDs 166 of the second hidden effect device 162 are sequentially turned off from the top in conjunction with the rotation direction of the reel 6.

  Then, once the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped, the reel 6 rotates in the reverse direction (upward) as shown in FIG. 110 (f), and the LED 166 of the second hidden rendering device 162 moves in the rotation direction of the reel 6. It lights up sequentially from the bottom in conjunction. Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (g), when all the reels 6 start to rotate in the reverse direction, the number of lighting of the LED 166 in the second hidden effect device 162 is accelerated as compared with the case of FIG. 110 (f). At the same time, the number of lights that can be turned on increases, and all the LEDs 166 can be turned on.

  That is, the lighting number of the LED 166 is increased / decreased in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel 6, and after the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped once, an effect in which the lighting number of the reel 6 and the LED 166 is different from that before the stop is performed a predetermined number of times. repeat. The number of rotating reels 6 varies depending on the weak, medium, strong, and finalized effects, and suggests the degree of expectation of a special prize together with the number of LEDs 166 lit in the second hidden effect device 162. In other words, the second hidden rendering device 162 that forms a level meter indicating the degree of expectation indicates that the more the number of lights from the lower side of the plurality of LEDs 166 is provided, the higher the degree of expectation is. The numbers are increased in the order of weak, medium, strong, and finalized effects.

  The number of times the rotation direction of the reel 6 is changed, the number of reels 6 to be rotated, the rotation speed, and the like may be changed depending on the weak, medium, strong, and finalized effects. Further, the operation of the movable effect member 135 and the display change of the 7-segment display 137 may be accompanied, and the expectation degree of the special prize may be suggested by these.

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped and the right reel 6c returns to the storage position, and the effect on the second hidden effect device 162 is ended, whereby the right effect operation is ended and the freeze effect is ended. Thus, by returning the reel 6 to the accommodation position before the end of the freeze effect, it is possible to prevent the moving operation of the reel 6 from hindering the eye-pushing (stop operation) of the reel 6. Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (h), the reel 6 starts to rotate in the forward direction and can be stopped.

  FIG. 111 shows an example of the effect operation in the case where the stand-by freeze is selected during the normal gaming state and the freeze effect based on the stand-by freeze is performed. Similarly to FIG. 109 (a), before the start of the game, the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c are arranged in the storage position that is the position of the end on the middle reel 6b side in the operation range, and the first hidden effect device 161 and the second hidden effect device 162 are in a state where no effect operation is performed.

  By operating the start lever 21 from this state, the game is started and an internal lottery is performed. Here, the standby freeze is selected in the game before the game, and it is selected to perform the freeze effect in the game, and the freeze effect is started.

  As shown in FIGS. 111 (a) to 111 (c), at the start of this freeze production, by changing the variation start order as shown in FIG. 107 depending on the standby freeze generating role that triggered the freeze production, An effect indicating the standby freeze occurrence role is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), when the stand-by freeze generating combination is the three-piece combination C (middle cherry), the reel 6 is rotated in the reverse direction (upward) in the order of left, middle, and right. Is started.

  In addition, the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the standby freeze opportunity role is located at the second position as the lottery result notification operation from the winning of the standby freeze opportunity role, but other movable effect members 135 in the first position are As the reel 6 starts to rotate, the reel 6 moves to the second position. The timing of this movement may be such that when the corresponding reel 6 starts rotating, it rises from the first position to the second position, or simultaneously rises to the second position at a predetermined timing. Also good.

  Thereafter, the left and right effect operations shown in FIGS. 111 (d) to (h) are started. In this left / right effect operation, first, as shown in FIG. 111 (d), the rotation of each reel 6 in the reverse direction is stopped, and the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c are moved from the storage position to the effect position, thereby causing the first hidden effect. The device 161 and the second hidden rendering device 162 are exposed. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (e), the reel 6 starts to rotate in the forward direction (downward), and the movable effect member 135 is moved from the second position to the first position so as to be in the same direction as the rotation of the reel 6. Move downwards. Furthermore, the 7-segment display 164 blinks in the first hidden effect device 161, and the LED 166 emits light so that the second hidden effect device 162 appears to flow in the same direction as the rotation of the reel 6.

  Thereafter, once the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped, the reel 6 rotates in the reverse direction (upward) as shown in FIG. 111 (f). Along with this, the movable effect member 135 moves upward from the first position to the second position so as to be in the same direction as the rotation of the reel 6. Furthermore, the 7-segment display 164 blinks in the first hidden effect device 161, and the LED 166 emits light so that the second hidden effect device 162 appears to flow in the same direction as the rotation of the reel 6. Then, once the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 111 (g), the same effect as in FIG. 111 (e) is performed.

  That is, the movable effect member 135 operates so as to be in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel 6, the LED 166 of the second hidden effect device 162 is lit, and the 7-segment display 164 of the first hidden effect device 161 blinks. Done. The movable part 163 of the first hidden effect device 161 may be operated in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel 6. Only the movable effect member 135 corresponding to the standby freeze trigger may be moved up and down. Then, once the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped, an effect in which the rotation direction of the reel 6 is different from the direction before the stop is repeated a predetermined number of times.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (h), the rotation of the reel 6 is stopped and the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c are returned to the storage positions, and the effects in the first hidden effect device 161 and the second hidden effect device 162 are ended. By doing so, the left-right production operation is completed. Then, the left effect operation and the right effect operation are performed to complete the freeze effect, and the reel 6 starts to rotate in the forward direction and can be stopped. Also in this case, the reel 6 is returned to the accommodation position by the end of the freeze effect, and the movement operation of the reel 6 is prevented from obstructing the pushing (stopping operation) of the reel 6.

  In this way, by making it possible to execute an effect by the operation of the reel 6 in the direction of the rotation axis, which is not conventional, it is possible to perform an effect related to the game around the reel 6 that the player pays the most attention. Will improve.

  Although the slot machine has been described in the present embodiment, a plurality of reels 6 capable of executing a game in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed are provided, and the plurality of reels 6 are arranged in parallel so that the rotation axes are positioned on the same line. It can also be applied to pachinko machines, arranged ball machines, and sparrow ball machines. Further, in the production, the rotation of the reel 6 is controlled by the game control device 50, and other than this, the production control device 50 controls, but in the production, all of the game control device 50 or the production control device 70 is controlled. You may make it control by.

  From the above, in a gaming machine that includes a plurality of reels 6 that can execute a game that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and that the reels 6 are arranged in parallel so that their rotation axes are located on the same line, An effect space 170 provided between the reel 6 and the adjacent reel 6, and an effect operation device (first hidden effect device 161) provided in the effect space 170 and capable of performing a predetermined effect operation. ) And. Therefore, it is possible to produce a game-related effect around the reel 6 that is most watched by the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Here, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine, an arrangement ball gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like.

  In addition, reel moving means (reel moving mechanism unit 150, effect control device 70) capable of widening the interval between the adjacent reels 6 by moving at least one of the adjacent reels 6 in the rotation axis direction is provided. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the effect operation device that performs the effect operation in the effect space 170.

  In addition, the production operation device (first hidden production device 161) includes a movable unit 163 capable of performing the production operation, a drive unit 165 capable of causing the movable unit 163 to perform the production operation, and the movable unit 163. And a light emitting member (7-segment display 164) that can be illuminated or light-emitted. Therefore, the movable part 163 that performs the rendering operation in the rendering space 170 can be conspicuous.

  In addition, when the production control device (production control device 70) capable of controlling the production operation device (first hidden production device 161) is provided and the production control unit does not cause the movable unit 163 to perform the production operation, In the case where the light emitting member (7-segment display 164) is not caused to emit light and the movable portion 163 performs an effect operation, the light emitting member is caused to emit light. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show that the production operation is performed, and the production effect by the movable portion 163 is improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine performs an internal lottery to determine whether or not to win a prize based on a start operation by the player, executes a game with a variable display of the plurality of reels 6, and performs a plurality of stop operations by the player. A slot machine 1 for stopping the variable display of the reel 6, and a freeze state generating means (game control device) capable of generating a freeze state for rendering that makes the stop operation invalid for a predetermined period during the execution of the game 50), and the reel moving means (the reel moving mechanism unit 150 and the effect control device 70) moves the reel 6 during the occurrence of the freeze state, and moves the reel 6 moved by the end of the freeze state to the original state. It is supposed to return to the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the reel 6 from hindering the pressing (stopping operation) of the reel 6.

  In addition, special effect execution means (game control device 50) capable of performing a special effect by variably displaying the reel 6 in a predetermined variable display mode during the occurrence of the freeze state is provided, and the drive unit 165 includes a movable unit 163. Can be moved along the change display direction of the reel 6, and the effect control means performs an effect operation of moving the movable portion 163 so as to synchronize with the change display of the reel 6 during the special effect. Will be. Therefore, since the movable part 163 moves so as to synchronize with the special effect by the reel 6, the effect in the freeze state is enhanced.

  Here, moving the movable part so as to synchronize is, for example, operating in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel 6.

  The front panel 9 is provided with a symbol display window 5 that is disposed in front of the plurality of reels 6 and allows the plurality of reels 6 to be seen through. The symbol display window 5 includes reel moving means (reel moving mechanism unit). 150, the effect control device 70) is set to such a size that the symbol of the reel 6 is visible even if the reel 6 is moved. Therefore, even if the reel 6 moves, visual recognition of the symbol is not hindered. The front panel 9 may be a transmissive display.

  In addition, in a gaming machine that includes a plurality of reels 6 that can execute a game that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and that the plurality of reels 6 are arranged in parallel so that the rotation axes are located on the same line, the reel 6 An effect space 170 provided between the reel 6 and the adjacent reel 6, and a light emission effect device (second hidden effect device 162) provided inside the effect space 170 and capable of performing a predetermined light emission effect; It will be equipped with. Therefore, it is possible to produce a game-related effect around the reel 6 that is most watched by the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Here, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine, an arrangement ball gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like.

  In addition, an effect control means (effect control apparatus 70) capable of controlling the light emission effect device (second hidden effect device 162) is provided, and the effect control means is a reel moving means (reel moving mechanism 150, effect control device). 70), when the reel 6 does not move, the light emitting effect is not performed or the light emitting effect is performed at a luminance lower than the normal luminance. On the other hand, when the reel 6 is moved by the reel moving means, the normal luminance is applied. A light emission effect is performed. Therefore, the light emission effect when the reel 6 moves is conspicuous and the effect is improved.

  In addition, special effect execution means (game control device 50) capable of performing a special effect by variably displaying the reel 6 in a predetermined variable display mode during the occurrence of the freeze state is provided, and a light emission effect device (second hidden effect) is provided. In the device 162), a plurality of light emitting units (LEDs 166) are provided along the variable display direction of the reel 6, and the effect control means (effect control device 70) is synchronized with the variable display of the reel 6 during the special effect. The light emission effect that changes the light emission mode is performed. Therefore, since the light emission mode changes so as to synchronize with the special production by the reel 6, the production effect during the freeze state is enhanced.

  Here, changing the light emission mode so as to synchronize means changing the number of light emitting units that emit light by sequentially turning on or off the light emitting units in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel 6, for example.

  Further, the special effect execution means (game control device 50, effect control device 70) can display the reel 6 in any one of a plurality of variable display modes while the freeze state is generated, and is specified as the special effect. The reel 6 is variably displayed in a variable display manner associated with the result of the internal lottery of the game that satisfies the condition. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect during the freeze state while suggesting the result of the internal lottery.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described first, second, or third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. Mainly different parts will be described. The slot machine of this embodiment can move an operation unit that can be operated by a player.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, an effect button 10, a select button 202, and an enter button 203 capable of performing operations related to effects are provided on the inclined base part 14 on the front surface of the slot machine. The button unit 200 is provided. The button unit 200 can be moved in the left-right direction on the inclined base part 14.

  The button unit 200 includes a slide member 201 that is slidably attached to the inclined base portion 14, and an effect button 10, a selection button 202, and an enter button 203 are provided on the upper surface of the slide member 201. A guided portion that is slidably engaged with a slide groove 205 formed in the inclined base portion 14 is formed on the lower surface of the slide member 201, whereby the button unit 200 moves along the left-right direction. It will be attached to the front frame 2 in a possible state.

  The tilting base part 14 is provided with a moving mechanism part 204 over a range in which the button unit 200 can move. In the moving mechanism 204, two slide grooves 205, which are grooves extending in the left-right direction, are formed in parallel in the front-rear direction. At least one of the slide grooves 205 penetrates the inside of the front frame 2, and the wiring from the sensor that detects the operation of the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203 provided on the button unit 200 is provided. In the state of passing through the inside of the guided portion, the inside of the front frame 2 is inserted through the slide groove 205. It should be noted that signals output based on operations of the effect button 10, the selection button 202 and the determination button 203 are input to the effect control device 70.

  With such a configuration, the player can manually move the button unit 200 to an arbitrary position within the left and right movable ranges where the moving mechanism unit 204 is provided, and the player can easily operate. Since the button unit 200 can be arranged at the position, the difficulty of operation can be eliminated, and the game can be advanced efficiently (the reel stop button 24 is erroneously operated when the effect button 10 is operated). Can also be avoided). That is, the button unit 200 and the moving mechanism unit 204 form an arrangement changing mechanism that can change the arrangement of the operation unit manually.

  Although the arrangement changing mechanism is configured by the button unit 200 and the moving mechanism unit 204, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the operation unit can be moved along the front surface of the front frame. It can be anything. For example, the moving range does not have to be on the inclined platform 14, and the moving direction is not limited to the left-right direction, and can be arbitrarily set.

  In addition, although operations related to effects such as the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the decision button 203 can be moved, for example, operations related to games such as the start lever 21, the max bet button 17, and the reel stop button 24 are performed. It may be movable about what to do. In addition, the moving mechanism unit 204 is provided with a provisional fixing means that allows the arrangement of the button unit 200 to be changed (in a stepwise manner) to any of a plurality of arranged arrangement points and that temporarily fixes the button unit 200 at the arrangement point. May be. Moreover, you may provide the temporary fixing means which can temporarily fix the button unit 200 not only at an arrangement | positioning point but in arbitrary positions.

  In addition, the button unit 200 is provided with the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203 so that the button unit can be moved. However, the button unit 200 is provided with only the effect button 10, and can be moved. 203 may be fixed at a predetermined position of the front frame 2. Although the slot machine has been described here, it can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  As described above, the operation unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203) that can be operated by the player is provided, and predetermined processing can be performed based on the operation of the operation unit. Such a gaming machine is provided with an arrangement changing mechanism (button unit 200, moving mechanism part 204) that can change the arrangement of the operation unit manually. Therefore, since the arrangement of the operation unit can be changed manually, it is possible to eliminate difficulty in operating the operation input unit.

  Here, the operation unit is, for example, a button or a touch panel. For example, a start lever 21, a bet button (max bet button 17), a reel stop button 24 in the slot machine 1 is used in addition to an operation related to the effect such as the effect button 10. Such as those that perform operations related to games. Further, the gaming machines include pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, slot machines and the like.

[First Modification of Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 1st modification of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. Basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations and the description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described. To do. The slot machine of this modification is configured to select an effect mode based on the arrangement of the operation unit.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 113, the movement range of the button unit 200 having an operation unit that can be operated by the player is divided into three areas: a left area 211, a middle area 212, and a right area 213. The production mode is selected in accordance with the area where is located. Here, effect modes 1 and 2 having different contents of effects such as display on the image display device 3 are prepared as effect modes.

  When the button unit 200 is in the left area 211, the effect mode 1 is selected, when the button unit 200 is in the right area 213, the effect mode 2 is selected, and when the button unit 200 is in the middle area 212, the effect mode 1 is selected. And 2 are selected at random. As described above, the production mode is set according to the arrangement of the button unit 200, so that an unprecedented selection method that enables the production mode to be selected by mechanical operation can be realized, and the interest of the game is improved. can do. In addition, since the player can select whether the effect mode is fixedly set or randomly set, the interest of the game can be improved.

  An arrangement point 214 for arranging the button unit 200 is set at the center of each area. The moving mechanism unit 204 urges the button unit 200 toward the arrangement point 214 set at the center from the boundary of the region, thereby arranging the button unit 200 at any one of the arrangement points 214 (step). And a temporary fixing means for temporarily fixing the button unit 200 at the arrangement point 214.

  Thereby, since the arrangement of the button unit 200 becomes stepwise, the player can easily switch the arrangement. Further, by temporarily fixing at the arrangement point 214, the button unit 200 can be prevented from moving at the arrangement point 214, the positioning of the button unit 200 can be facilitated, and the operability of the button unit 200 is improved. To do. It should be noted that a mechanism for transmitting a click feeling when the button unit 200 reaches the arrangement point 214 may be provided so that the player can easily understand that the arrangement point 214 has been reached.

  Further, the movement mechanism unit 204 is provided with an arrangement sensor that detects at which arrangement point 214 the button unit 200 exists, and a detection signal from the arrangement sensor is input to the effect control device 70. Furthermore, in the portion of the movement mechanism unit 204 that is visible from the player, effect mode information 215 that indicates the effect mode associated with the arrangement point 214 is displayed. Note that the player may arbitrarily set (customize) the setting of the method of selecting the production mode corresponding to each of the areas 211 to 213.

[Direction mode update process]
In the present modification, the process shown in FIG. 114 is performed in the effect mode update process (step S216) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this effect mode update process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the arrangement of the effect buttons based on input information from the arrangement sensor (step S901). Here, the arrangement change is a change from the arrangement in the previous effect mode update process.

  If there is no change in the placement of the production buttons (step S901; N), it is determined whether the production buttons are in the middle region (step S905). If there is a change in the arrangement of the effect buttons (step S901; Y), it is determined whether the change is to the middle region (step S902).

  If it is a change to the middle region (step S902; Y), the production mode is determined at random, the decided production mode (1or2) is set (step S903), and it is determined whether the production button is in the middle region. (Step S905). If it is not a change to the middle region (step S902; N), the production mode (1or2) corresponding to the placement of the production button is set (step S904), and it is determined whether the production button is in the middle region ( Step S905).

  If the effect button is in the middle region (step S905; Y), it is determined whether the mode change condition is satisfied (step S906). The mode change condition is, for example, execution of a predetermined number of games, elapse of a predetermined time, or winning of a predetermined combination since the previous change of the production mode, and can be arbitrarily set. If this mode change condition is satisfied (step S906; Y), an effect mode different from the currently set effect mode is set (step S907), and display (background) mode update processing is performed (step S907). S908), the effect mode update process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the effect button is not in the middle region (step S905; N) or when the mode change condition is not satisfied (step S906; N), display (background) mode update processing is performed (step S908). The mode update process ends. In the display (background) mode update process (step S908), the background corresponding to the game state command and the AT lottery mode (low accuracy, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy) is set from the background display data corresponding to the set production mode. Perform the process.

  That is, the arrangement sensor and effect control device 70 constitutes an arrangement detection unit that can detect the arrangement of the operation unit. Further, the effect control device 70 constitutes an effect mode setting means that can select and set one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes.

  If the mode change condition is that the first condition such as execution of a predetermined number of games, elapse of a predetermined time, winning of a predetermined combination, etc. is satisfied, and the second condition for winning the change lottery is satisfied. , Irregularity can be given to the change of the production mode. Further, in place of the process of setting an effect mode different from the currently set effect mode (step S907), even if the process of selecting and setting the effect mode by lottery is performed, the change of the effect mode is irregular. Can have sex. In this case, if the number of production modes is three or more, irregularity can be provided, and it can be prevented that the player gets bored with the game.

  In addition, since the control of the change of the effect mode accompanying the movement of the button unit 200 is performed by the effect mode update process, the effect mode in the next game is set depending on the position of the button unit 200 at the end of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in control burden and difficulty in understanding the production due to frequent switching of the production mode during one game.

  On the other hand, the production mode may be changed at another timing. For example, in the timer interrupt process in the effect control device 70, the change of the effect mode accompanying the movement of the button unit 200 as described above is controlled, and there is a change from the arrangement of the button unit 200 at the time of the previous interrupt. If the production mode is changed in this case, the production mode can be changed immediately as the button unit 200 moves. In this way, it is possible to change the production mode even in the customer waiting state.

  In addition, the presentation mode is changed with the movement of the button unit 200, but whether or not the change of the presentation mode is enabled by the movement of the button unit 200 can be switched by operating the selection button 202 or the determination button 203. You may do it. In this way, the button unit 200 can be moved to a position where the player can easily operate without changing the production mode. Although the button unit 200 can be moved stepwise by the temporary fixing means, the button unit 200 may be arranged so that it can be moved continuously without providing the temporary fixing means.

  Further, although the mechanical buttons have been described as an example, the operation area displayed on the touch panel screen as the movable operation input unit may be movable. In this case, the effect control device 70 that controls the display content of the screen moves the operation region by performing control so as to change the display position of the operation region on the screen based on the player's operation. That is, the production control device 70 serves as an arrangement changing unit that enables the arrangement of the operation input unit to be changed along the front surface of the gaming machine. Then, the effect mode is changed according to the position where the operation area has moved.

  From the above, the arrangement changing mechanism (the button unit 200, the moving mechanism unit 204) arranges the operation unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the decision button 203) at any one of the plurality of arrangement points (in stages). ) Temporary fixing means for temporarily changing the operation unit at each arrangement point is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation unit from moving at the movement destination and facilitate positioning of the operation unit, and the operability of the operation unit is improved.

  In addition, an arrangement detection means (arrangement sensor, production control device 70) capable of detecting the arrangement of the operation unit (production button 10, selection button 202, and decision button 203) and one production mode from a plurality of production modes. Effect mode setting means (effect control device 70) that can be selected and set, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode according to the arrangement of the operation unit detected by the arrangement detection means. Will be. Therefore, since the effect mode is set according to the arrangement of the operation unit, the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, when the operation unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203) is in the first arrangement, the effect mode setting means (the effect control device 70) sets the effect mode fixedly, When the operation unit is in the second arrangement, the effect mode is set at random. Therefore, the player can select the setting method of the production mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, when the operation unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203) is in the second arrangement, the effect mode setting means (the effect control device 70) is set whenever a predetermined change condition is satisfied. The production mode is changed. Therefore, since the presentation mode is randomly changed by setting the operation unit in the second arrangement, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  In addition, as a specific effect to be executed over a plurality of games such as a continuous notice and a sign effect, effects associated with each effect mode are prepared, and the effect control device 70 provides a continuous notice corresponding to the effect mode. And the sign production is selected and executed. That is, the production control device 70 serves as a specific production execution unit capable of executing a specific production associated with the production mode set by the production mode setting unit over a plurality of times. During the execution of the specific effects such as the continuous notice and the warning effect, the effect mode is not set (changed) even if the arrangement of the button unit 200 is changed. Change).

  In the case of such control, in the effect mode update process shown in FIG. 114, it is first determined whether a specific effect such as a continuous notice or a sign effect is being executed. If it is being executed, the effect mode update process is terminated, and if it is not being executed, the process from step S901 is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the effect mode is changed during the specific effect.

  In addition, a movement restriction mechanism that can switch between a state in which the movement of the button unit 200 and a state in which the movement of the button unit 200 is restricted is controlled at each arrangement point 214 in the movement mechanism unit 204 by the control of the effect control device 70. You may make it prepare. As such a movement restriction mechanism, for example, a mechanism capable of switching between a state in which movement is restricted by engaging the guided portion of the button unit 200 and a state in which movement is permitted by releasing the engagement can be cited. Further, a movement restriction mechanism that can switch between a state in which movement is restricted by engaging the movement mechanism unit 204 on the button unit 200 side and a state in which movement is permitted by releasing the engagement may be provided.

  Then, during the execution of the specific effect, the effect control device 70 controls the movement restriction mechanism so as to restrict the movement of the button unit 200 by the movement restriction mechanism. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as a movement restricting unit capable of restricting the movement of the operation unit during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing unit. This also makes it possible to prevent inconvenience that the effect mode is changed during the specific effect.

  From the above, it is configured to be able to execute a game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and to give a predetermined game value based on the result of the game. Specific effect execution means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a specific effect associated with the effect mode set by the mode setting means (effect control device 70) over a plurality of games is provided. When the arrangement of the operation unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the decision button 203) is changed during execution of the specific effect, the means sets the effect mode after the end of the specific effect. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the effect mode is changed during the specific effect.

  Further, it is configured to execute a game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and to give a predetermined game value based on the result of the game. A specific effect executing means (effect control apparatus 70) capable of executing a specific effect associated with the effect mode set by the (effect control device 70) over a plurality of games, and a specific effect by the specific effect executing means Movement control means (production control device 70) capable of regulating the movement of the operation unit (the production button 10, the selection button 202, and the decision button 203) during the execution of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the effect mode is changed during the specific effect.

[Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. Basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations and the description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described. To do. The slot machine of this modification can move the operation unit under the control of the control device.

  In this modification, the moving mechanism unit 204 includes a drive source that slides the button unit 200. As such a drive source, for example, one that can drive a belt wound around pulleys provided at both ends of the moving range of the button unit 200 by a motor. The button unit 200 is provided with a connecting portion that is connected to the belt, and the button unit 200 moves as the belt is driven.

  The drive source is controlled by the effect control device 70, and the effect control device 70 moves the button unit 200 to a predetermined position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In other words, the moving mechanism unit 204 serves as a layout changing unit that enables the layout of the operation input unit to be changed along the front surface of the gaming machine, and the effect control device 70 controls the layout changing unit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition to operate. An arrangement change control means capable of changing the arrangement of the input unit is provided. In this way, the arrangement of the operation input unit can be automatically moved along the front of the gaming machine, so that the interest regarding the operation of the operation input unit is improved and the willingness to actively operate the operation input unit is promoted. It becomes possible to do.

  The drive source may be provided on the button unit 200 side, for example, a rack is provided in the moving mechanism unit 204 over the movement range of the button unit 200, and a pinion that is driven by a motor and meshes with the rack is provided on the button unit 200 side. The button unit 200 may be moved by driving the motor.

  A plurality of arrangement points 214 corresponding to the gaming state are set in the movement mechanism unit 204, and the effect control device 70 controls the movement amount of the button unit 200 according to the gaming state (gaming mode) to set a predetermined arrangement point 214. The game state is suggested and notified by the position of the button unit 200.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the arrangement points 214 corresponding to the gaming state correspond to the specific gaming state ST30, the ultra-high probability state ST13, the high probability state ST12, the low probability state ST11, and the special gaming state ST20 (bonus state). As the arrangement points, a specific game position 214a, an ultra-high-accuracy position 214b, a high-accuracy position 214d, a low-accuracy position 214f, and a special game position 214g are set. Mode information 215 indicating a game mode corresponding to these arrangement points is displayed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player on the inclined base part 14. Since the mode information 215 is displayed in this way, the player can clearly grasp the current game mode.

  In addition, a first ambiguous position 214e is set between the low-accuracy position 214f and the high-accuracy position 214d as an arrangement point indicating the low-accuracy state or the high-accuracy state. In addition, a second ambiguous position 214c is set between the high-accuracy position 214d and the ultra-high accuracy position 214b as an arrangement point indicating the high-accuracy state or the ultra-high accuracy state. Mode information 215 indicating that these arrangement points are present is displayed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player on the inclined base part 14.

  In addition, the special game position 214g which is the arrangement point 214 corresponding to the special game state can accommodate the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the decision button 203 covering the button unit 200 located at the arrangement point 214. An accommodating portion 216 is provided. Thereby, in the special game state, the operation of the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203 becomes impossible. Thus, since there is a state in which the operation input unit is accommodated (cannot be operated) in the accommodation unit 216, it is possible to improve the willingness to operate the operation input unit in a state where it is not accommodated.

  The movement of the button unit 200 is performed when the game mode is changed, when a predetermined winning combination is won, or when the arrangement change condition such as the execution of a predetermined number of games or the elapse of a predetermined time since the previous arrangement change condition is established. It has come to be. In this way, by changing the arrangement of the operation input unit when the game mode is changed, it is possible to notify the player that the game mode has changed, and the current game mode can be grasped by the arrangement of the operation input unit. Become. In addition, it can be suggested that the game mode may have changed by including the possibility that the game mode such as winning of a predetermined role may be changed as the arrangement change condition, The fun of gaming can be improved.

  Note that an arrangement point 214 indicating a gaming state other than the above may be provided as the arrangement point. For example, an arrangement point 214 indicating that the customer is waiting may be provided. Further, the special gaming position 214g may serve as the arrangement point 214 in the waiting state for customers. Further, the effect button 10 or the like may be operated even in the special game state without providing the storage portion 216. Further, although the button unit 200 is provided with the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203, the button unit 200 can be moved. However, the button unit 200 is provided with only the effect button 10, and can be moved. The button 203 may be fixed at a predetermined position on the front frame 2.

  Further, the arrangement points 214 in the specific game state ST30 may be classified in more detail. For example, an arrangement point 214 in the ART state ST35 and other arrangement points 214 may be provided. Furthermore, an arrangement point 214 (low-accuracy position, high-accuracy position, or ultra-high-accuracy position) corresponding to the probability of acquiring the AT right in the specific gaming state ST30 may be provided.

  FIG. 116 shows another example of the configuration of the moving mechanism unit 204. The moving mechanism unit 204 is provided with a button cover member 220 that allows button operation only when located at the arrangement point 214, and the button unit 200 moves in the left-right direction within an area covered by the button cover member 220. It is possible. Here, only the effect button 10 is provided in the button unit 200, and an operation opening 221 for exposing the effect button 10 is exposed at a position corresponding to the arrangement point 214 in the button cover member 220 as shown in FIG. Is formed. Thereby, when the button unit 200 is located at the arrangement point 214, the operation button 10 can be operated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), an operation restricting portion 222 that disables the operation of the effect button 10 during movement to the arrangement point 214 is formed between the operation openings 221. The player is prevented from touching the effect button 10 to prevent failure. That is, the button cover member 220 serves as an operation restricting means for restricting the operation of the operation input unit during the change of the arrangement of the operation input unit.

  Here, the high-accuracy state and the ultra-high-accuracy state are indicated by the same arrangement point 214 as the high-accuracy / ultra-high-accuracy position 214h, and the ambiguous position 214i is an ultra-high-accuracy state, a high-accuracy state, or a low-accuracy state. The arrangement point 214 is shown. The effect button 10 can also be operated at the special game position 214g, and this special game position 214g also serves as a customer waiting position which is the arrangement point 214 in the customer waiting state. By providing the customer waiting position, the game mode is not known in the empty state, and the entertainment at the time of selection of the gaming machine can be enhanced. In the case of the customer waiting position, for example, the player moves to the placement point 214 corresponding to the game mode based on the game-related operations such as insertion of medals, operation of the max bet button 17 and operation of the start lever 21.

  In addition, on the left and right of the effect button 10 in the button unit 200, a band-shaped opening closing member 230 that closes the operation opening 221 where the effect button 10 does not exist is provided. The opening closing member 230 is a crawler-shaped member (caterpillar shape) in which plate-shaped small pieces are arranged in the left-right direction and connected so as to be bent. One end is connected to the side end of the button unit 200 and the other end side is the moving mechanism unit 204. It is accommodated in the inside of the front frame 2 through an insertion hole formed in the side end.

  Only a necessary portion of the opening closing member 230 faces the moving mechanism unit 204 from the insertion hole in accordance with the left / right movement of the button unit 200. Further, the opening closing member 230 indicates that the effect button 10 cannot be operated in the operation opening 221 at a position facing the other operation opening 221 in a state where the effect button 10 is positioned in the operation opening 221. no "is displayed.

[Direction mode update process]
In this modification, the effect mode update process shown in FIG. 117 is performed instead of the effect mode update process shown in FIG. In this effect mode update process, first, the effect mode corresponding to the game mode is set and the corresponding background is set based on the game state command and the AT lottery mode (low accuracy, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy). Display (background) mode update processing is performed (step S911). That is, the effect control device 70 constitutes a game mode control means that can control to any one of a plurality of game modes each time a predetermined change condition is satisfied.

  Next, it is checked whether or not an effect button layout change condition is satisfied (step S912). The arrangement change condition is, for example, when a game mode is changed, winning a predetermined combination, executing a predetermined number of games or elapse of a predetermined time since the previous arrangement change condition was established, and can be arbitrarily set. When this arrangement change condition is not satisfied (step S913; N), the effect mode change process is terminated.

  When the arrangement change condition is satisfied (step S913; Y), an arrangement position corresponding to the internal state and the distribution ratio is determined (step S914), and the arrangement position after the determination is different from the current arrangement position. Is checked (step S915).

  When the current arrangement position and the determined arrangement position are not different (step S916; N), the effect mode update process is terminated. If the current arrangement position is different from the determined arrangement position (step S916; Y), the effect button is moved to the determined arrangement position (step S917), and the effect mode update process ends.

  FIG. 118 shows the distribution ratio when the moving mechanism unit 204 shown in FIG. 115 is used. For example, in the normal gaming state and the low probability state, the low probability position 214f is selected at a rate of 30%, and the first ambiguous position 214e is selected at a rate of 70%. Further, in the normal gaming state and the high probability state, the first ambiguous position 214e is selected at a rate of 30%, the high probability position 214d is selected at a rate of 50%, and the second at a rate of 20%. The ambiguous position 214c is selected.

  FIG. 119 shows the distribution ratio when the moving mechanism unit 204 shown in FIG. 116 is used. For example, in the normal gaming state and the low probability state, the low probability position 214f is selected at a rate of 30%, and the ambiguous position 214i is selected at a rate of 70%. Further, in the normal gaming state and the super-high accuracy state, the ambiguous position 214i is selected at a rate of 30%, and the high-accuracy / ultra-high accuracy location 214h is selected at a rate of 70%.

  In the process of determining the arrangement position according to the internal state and the distribution ratio (step S914), the arrangement position may be determined in consideration of the current arrangement position. In addition, when there are a plurality of ambiguous positions as the arrangement point 214 as in the configuration of FIG. 115, the AT right acquisition notified by the current arrangement position when a rare role is elected that may increase the probability of AT right acquisition. It is also possible to move to an ambiguous position that suggests a higher probability than

  In addition, the button unit 200 is operated to suggest the game mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button unit 200 is operated, and information related to the game is suggested and notified by the position and operation mode. good. For example, the result of the internal lottery or the result of the game may be suggested or notified, or the high expectation level of the effect may be suggested or notified.

  Further, the mode information 215 is fixedly displayed. However, the mode information 215 is displayed using, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a device capable of switching the display such as a reel, and the operation of the button unit 200 is suggested and notified. The mode information 215 may be switched accordingly. In this case, for example, the effect control device 70 constitutes an information switching means for switching the mode information, and the control is performed together with the operation control of the button unit 200.

  Although the slot machine has been described, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like. Moreover, although the movement of the mechanical operation unit such as the effect button 10 has been described, the operation region displayed on the touch panel screen can be moved by the control of the control device. That is, the operation input unit includes not only mechanical buttons but also an operation area displayed on a touch panel screen. When the operation input unit is an operation area displayed on a touch panel screen, a control device (for example, the effect control device 70) that controls the display of the touch panel screen serves as an arrangement change unit, and is controlled by the control of the control device. Information related to the game is suggested and notified by changing the display position on the screen.

  From the above, an operation input unit that can be operated by the player is set, and predetermined processing is performed based on the operation of the operation input unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203). This is a gaming machine capable of changing the arrangement of the operation input unit along the front surface of the gaming machine (moving mechanism unit 204). Therefore, it is possible to promote the willingness to actively operate the operation input unit.

  Here, the operation input unit includes not only mechanical buttons but also an operation area displayed on a touch panel screen. In addition to operations that perform operations such as performance buttons, for example, there are also those that perform operations related to games such as the start lever 21, bet button (max bet button 17), and reel stop button 24 in the slot machine. Also, when changing the arrangement of the operation input unit along the front of the gaming machine, if the operation input unit is a mechanical button, the button itself is moved, and the operation input unit is displayed on the touch panel screen. If it is the operation area to be displayed, the display position on the screen is changed. Further, the gaming machines include pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, slot machines and the like.

  The arrangement changing unit is a moving mechanism unit 204 that moves the operation input unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the decision button 203) by the driving force of the driving source, and controls the arrangement changing unit based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Thus, an arrangement change control means (production control device 70) capable of changing the arrangement of the operation input unit is provided. Therefore, since the arrangement of the operation input unit is automatically changed, the interest regarding the operation of the operation input unit is improved.

  Here, the arrangement change control means may change the arrangement of the operation input unit based on the input by the player, or may change the arrangement of the operation input unit according to the progress of the game without depending on the input by the player. You may make it change.

  In addition, each time a predetermined change condition is satisfied, the game mode control means (effect control device 70) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game modes is provided, and the arrangement change control means (effect control device 70) is provided. The arrangement of the operation input units (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203) is changed based on the change of the game mode by the game mode control means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the game mode has changed.

  In addition, the arrangement changing unit (the moving mechanism unit 204) moves the operation input unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203) to any one of the arrangement points 214 associated with each of the plurality of game modes. The arrangement change control means (production control device 70) can change the arrangement of the operation input unit so that the operation input unit is arranged at the arrangement point 214 corresponding to the changed game mode. Will be. Therefore, the player can grasp the current game mode.

  In addition, mode information 215 indicating a game mode associated with the arrangement point 214 is displayed at the arrangement point 214. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp the current game mode.

  In addition, a storage unit 216 capable of storing the operation input unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203) is provided, and the arrangement change control unit (the effect control device 70) is in a specific game mode. In this case, the operation input unit is moved to the inside of the accommodating unit 216. Therefore, since there is a state in which the operation input unit is accommodated (cannot be operated) in the accommodation unit, it is possible to improve the willingness to operate the operation input unit in a state where it is not accommodated.

  Further, an operation restricting means (button cover member 220) for restricting the operation of the operation input unit during the change of the arrangement of the operation input unit (the effect button 10, the selection button 202, and the determination button 203) is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a failure of the arrangement changing unit.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a slot machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described first, second, third, or fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations and the description will be made. Omitted, mainly the different parts will be described. The slot machine of the present embodiment has a function of preventing fraud related to the granting of AT rights based on successive establishment of small roles.

  In the present embodiment, there are a Bell winning combination and a Replay winning as consecutive target roles to which the AT right is granted by being continuously established a predetermined number of times. When the Bell prize is established three times in a row, one AT right is stocked, and one AT right is stocked each time a consecutive win is made. In addition, one AT right is stocked when the replay winning is established four times in succession, and one AT right is stocked every time consecutive winning is made. In order to inform the player of the AT right grant based on the consecutive establishment of such consecutive target roles in an easy-to-understand manner, a history window 250 indicating the winning history of the roles is displayed on the image display device 3 as shown in FIG. The

  This history window 250 displays the winning history of the five most recent games in order, and the leftmost area indicates the winning result of the latest game (previous game), and the winning is performed toward the right in the order of the game execution. Areas for displaying results are arranged. The display contents of the history window 250 are updated every time the game is finished, and the latest game winning results are displayed in the leftmost area, and the previous game winning results are sequentially displayed in the right area. The winning result of the oldest game that cannot be displayed is deleted. The history window 250 is always displayed in the foreground except in the special gaming state.

  The winning results are indicated by icons as shown in FIG. In particular, by providing an icon indicating that the game result has been lost, it is possible to notify not only the game in which the winning is achieved but also the game result that has been lost. A missing icon may be provided to indicate that a small role has been internally won but could not be established.

  FIG. 122 shows an example of displaying the winning result in the history window 250. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the bell winning has already been established in two games in this case, and the AT right can be acquired when the bell winning is completed once more. In this state, in the history window 250, the background of the icon indicating the Bell winning a prize is changed, and the characters “Leach!” Are displayed. Also, in this game, a winning announcement effect 1 is displayed that suggests that there is a possibility that a bell winning will be established.

  When the bell winning is established, it is notified that one AT right has been acquired as shown in FIG. 122 (b), and the game result of this time is added and enlarged and displayed in the history window 250. Is informed that it is continuing. With such a display, it is possible to effectively notify the success of consecutive winning combinations (specific combination), and it is possible to enhance the expectation for occurrence of the specific gaming state.

  In the state where the consecutive winning combination of the consecutive target combination is continued, even if the internal winning is not performed for the consecutive target combination in the next game (in this case, the internal winning is performed for the replay winning combination). As shown in FIG. 122 (c), the winning announcement effect 1 is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that a bell winning will be established, and the expectation is continued. In addition, with the start of the next game, the expansion of the history window 250 is ended and the original size is displayed, and the history window 250 prevents the visual effect image from being obstructed.

  Then, when the replay winning is established and the consecutive winning of the bell winning is interrupted, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), a display of “sorry ~!” Indicating that the continuous establishment has ended is made, and the game result of this time Is added and the background of the icon indicating the bell winning in the history window 250 is returned to the normal background.

  On the other hand, when an internal winning is won in the next game from the state shown in FIG. 122 (b), a winning notice indicating that the possibility of winning the bell is higher than the winning notice effect 1 as shown in FIG. 122 (e). Production 2 is displayed. In this case as well, with the start of the next game, the expansion of the history window 250 is terminated and the original size is displayed, and the history window 250 prevents the visual effect image from being obstructed.

  When the Bell winning is established, as shown in FIG. 122 (f), it is notified that one more AT right has been acquired, and it is notified that two in total have been acquired. In addition, the history window 250 adds the current game result and displays the game result in an enlarged manner to notify that the continuous establishment is continued. In addition, once the expansion of the history window 250 is finished and the AT right is acquired again, the enlarged display is performed, so that it is possible to effectively notify the success of the consecutive winning combination of the consecutive target combination, and the specific gaming state Can increase the expectation of the occurrence of Further, when continuous establishment continues for 5 games or more, the history of continuous establishment may be displayed by increasing the display area (small window) of the history window 250.

  In addition, when the consecutive target combination to which the AT right is granted by the continuous establishment is continuously established, a specific effect is produced that directs that the establishment is continuous over the game in which the establishment is continuous. You may make it carry out by control of the control apparatus 70. FIG. That is, the production control device 70 may be a specific production execution unit capable of executing a specific production over a plurality of games from a game in which a winning combination of a specific combination (continuous target combination) is established. In this way, it is possible to effectively notify that the consecutive target combination (specific combination) is continuously established by the specific effect. In this case, the specific effect may be started from the first establishment of the consecutive target combination, or the specific effect may be started from the game before the AT right can be acquired.

  That is, a specific effect execution means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a specific effect over a plurality of games from a game in which a winning combination for a specific role (continuous target role) is established is provided. While the winning is continuously established, the specific effect may be continued. Therefore, it can be effectively notified that the specific combination is continuously established by the specific effect.

  As described above, the game result recognized by the effect control device 70 such that the command related to the game result transmitted from the game control device 50 is not received by the effect control device 70 regarding the granting of the AT right based on the consecutive establishment of the small role. There is a possibility that a fraudulent act that advances the game more advantageously than a normal player may be performed. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such an illegal act, a command identifier which is information that can identify which game corresponds to a command transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70 is added. I am doing so.

  FIG. 123 shows an example of a command structure. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), for a command whose information consists of 1-byte instruction content (Action), the command is configured by adding a 2-byte command identifier. Also, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), a command composed of 1-byte status information (Mode) and 1-byte instruction content (Action) is also added to the command by adding a 2-byte command identifier. Is configured.

  The effect image according to the progress of the game including the above-described winning notice effect is set in the game effect determination process (see FIG. 30) performed by the effect control device 70, and is controlled by the control in the display control process (see FIG. 27). It is displayed on the image display device 3. Note that the contents of the history window 250 are also set by various processes in the effect control apparatus 70 (for example, a continuous winning stock process described later), and the image display apparatus 3 is controlled by the control in the display control process (see FIG. 27). Is displayed.

  That is, the effect control device 70 provides effect image display means that can display an effect image corresponding to the progress state of the game on the display device (image display device 3), and at least during the display period of the effect image. A history window display means capable of displaying on the display device a history window 250 that enables each result to be grasped. The period for displaying the history window 250 is not limited to the effect image display period, and can be set to any period.

[Command identifier setting processing]
In the present embodiment, the command identifier setting process shown in FIG. 124 is performed during the timer interrupt process in the game control apparatus 50 shown in FIG. In this command identifier setting process, the value of the ceiling counter that counts the number of times the game has been executed since the end of the special gaming state is set as the command identifier. Since the value of the ceiling counter is the same value in one game, it is easy to identify which game the command corresponds to.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control device 70 is configured to count the number of times the game has been executed since the end of the special game state using a counter having the same function as the ceiling counter. In the ceiling stock process (step S488, see FIG. 47), three or five AT rights are stocked when the value of this counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 1000) (reaches the ceiling). .

  In this command identifier setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a RAM clear (setting change) (step S921). If there is a RAM clear (setting change) (step S921; Y), the ceiling counter is reset (1 is set) (step S925), and the value of the ceiling counter is set as a command identifier (step S926). The identifier setting process is terminated. The ceiling counter may be reset only when the RAM is cleared and the ceiling counter may not be reset when the setting is changed. In this case, it is desirable that the effect control device 70 also performs the same process.

  On the other hand, when there is no RAM clear (setting change) (step S921; N), it is determined whether the game is over (step S922). If the game has not ended (step S922; N), the value of the ceiling counter is set as the command identifier (step S926), and the command identifier setting process ends. If the game is over (step S922; Y), it is determined whether the special gaming state is over (step S923).

  When the special gaming state is ended (step S923; Y), the ceiling counter is reset (1 is set) (step S925), the value of the ceiling counter is set as the command identifier (step S926), and the command identifier is set. End the process. If the special gaming state is not ended (step S923; N), the ceiling counter is updated by +1 (step S924), the value of the ceiling counter is set as the command identifier (step S926), and the command identifier setting process is terminated. To do.

  The game control device 50 transmits a command instructing the control contents to the effect control device 70 according to the progress of the game, etc., and the effect control device 70 performs control according to this command. In the game control device 50, the command identifier set in the command identifier setting process described above is added when setting the command. In principle, this command identifier is added to all commands transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70. However, commands transmitted other than during the game (power-on command, power recovery command) A command identifier may not be added to a customer waiting command.

  That is, the game control device 50 controls the progress of the game and serves as a first control means capable of transmitting a command corresponding to the progress state every time the game progresses. Further, the effect control device 70 serves as second control means that can receive a command transmitted from the first control means and perform processing corresponding to the received command. In addition, the game control device 50 serves as an identifier setting unit that can set a different identifier for each execution of the game, and can transmit a command including the identifier set by the identifier setting unit. Make a means.

  By using the ceiling counter as a command identifier in the game control device 50 and transmitting it as a command to the effect control device 70, the effect control device 70 detects that the ceiling has been reached not only from its own counter but also from the command identifier. It is possible to reliably grant the AT right based on the arrival of the ceiling and to prevent fraud.

  In addition, as with the first embodiment, the ceiling reaching condition may be that the number of times the game is executed from the later of the special game state or the specific game state is the predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times). good. In this case, the ceiling counter is reset (1 is set) even when the specific gaming state is ended.

  Alternatively, the effect control device 70 may determine that the ceiling has been reached based on information from the ceiling counter without counting the number of games, and may grant AT rights. In this way, the production control device 70 does not have to count the number of games since the previous occurrence of the special game state, and thus the control burden can be reduced.

  That is, the first control means (game control device 50) is a special game generating means (game control device) capable of generating a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined special winning combination. 50), and the identifier setting means (game control device 50) is configured to set, as an identifier, a value that can specify the number of games since the previous occurrence of the special game state, and the specific game occurrence determination means (effect control device) 70), it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate the specific gaming state based on the number of games since the previous occurrence of the special gaming state specified by the identifier of the command.

  Here, the ceiling counter is used as a command identifier, but the present invention is not limited to this. Information that can identify which game command is at least the most recent game may be added. For example, a cumulative counter that is updated every time the game ends and is not reset even when the special gaming state ends or the specific gaming state ends may be set, and this value may be used as the command identifier. In this case, it may be reset every time the power is turned on, or may be reset when the RAM is cleared (setting change) or when the initial value of the circulation is reached, without being reset when the power is turned on. Further, if a random value (M-sequence random number or the like) is set as the command identifier at the end of the game, the security can be further improved. In this case, it is sufficient that different values can be set at least in the most recent games.

[Command error judgment processing]
In addition, the command abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 125 is performed during the timer interruption process in the effect control device 70 shown in FIG. In this command abnormality determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command transmitted from the game control device 50 at the start of the game has been received (step S931).

  When the lottery result command is received (step S931; Y), the command identifier added to the command is set as an abnormality determination value (step S932), and it is determined whether the determination target command is received (step S933). . If no lottery result command has been received (step S931; N), it is determined whether a determination target command has been received (step S933).

  The determination target commands are, for example, a freeze effect command, a freeze end command, a stop valid command, a reel stop command, a game result command, and a gaming state command. If these determination target commands have not been received (step S933; N), the command abnormality determination process is terminated. If a determination target command is received (step S933; Y), it is determined whether an abnormality determination value has been set (step S934). If the abnormality determination value has not been set (step S934; N), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a command abnormality flag is set (step S937), and the command abnormality determination process is terminated.

  If the abnormality determination value has been set (step S934; Y), it is checked whether the command identifier of the received command matches the abnormality determination value (step S935). When the command identifier of the received command matches the abnormality determination value (step S936; Y), the command abnormality determination process is terminated as reception of a normal command. If the command identifier of the received command does not match the abnormality determination value (step S936; N), the command abnormality flag is set as reception of the abnormal command (step S937), and the command abnormality determination process is terminated.

  In this way, by determining the identifier included in the game result command using the identifier included in the lottery result command transmitted at the start of the game as a determination value, it is determined whether or not the subsequent command belongs to the same game. And the accuracy of command abnormality determination can be improved. Thereby, for example, even if the game control device 50 is executing a plurality of games, the effect control device 70 is in a state where it cannot receive a command, so that the effect control device 70 is one game. It is easy to detect fraudulent acts that are recognized.

  That is, the command which can determine whether the command control which the effect control apparatus 70 receives the command containing a different identifier in one game which the 2nd control means (effect control apparatus 70) recognizes has generate | occur | produced. It serves as an abnormality determination means.

  It should be noted that the abnormality of the command is detected depending on whether the command identifiers match in one game, but in the case of a command identifier having a permutation such as a ceiling counter that is updated by +1 for each game, A function for detecting an abnormality of the command may be provided depending on whether the permutation of the command identifier and the command identifier of the current game is valid.

  From the above, the command abnormality determination means (production control device 70) receives the identifier included in the lottery result command indicating the result of the internal lottery received based on the start of the game, and the result of the game received based on the end of the variable display. In other words, it is determined whether or not the identifier included in the game result command indicating "?" Matches.

[Reel rotation stop processing]
Further, in place of the reel rotation stop process (step S11) shown in FIG. 22, the reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. 126 is performed. In this reel rotation stop process, it is determined whether there is a possibility that a winning combination is established each time the reel 6 is stopped, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control device 70. In addition to the addition of the command identifier described above, by transmitting this determination result, the player controls the game result recognized by the effect control device 70 regarding the granting of the AT right based on the continuous establishment of the small role, and from the normal player In this way, fraudulent acts that favor the game are more reliably prevented.

  In this reel rotation stop processing, after performing the processing from step S91 to step S98, the possibility of winning a winning combination is determined in advance from the internal lottery result and the reel stop information (step S941). Then, the pre-determination information corresponding to the pre-determination result is set (step S942), and a reel stop command including the reel stop information and the pre-determination information is transmitted (step S943), and it is determined whether the reel has been completely stopped (step S943). Step S108).

  As the pre-determination information, there is information that cannot be won to indicate that a small role has not been won internally, and information that can be awarded to indicate that a small role has been internally won but is currently missed or not yet decided. In addition, it is confirmed that the small role has not been elected internally and that the reel 6 is out of the stop mode, or that the small role has been internally elected but the reel 6 is out of the stop mode. Information indicating that the winning combination has been won, and winning confirmation information indicating that the winning has been confirmed has been determined, and one of them is transmitted each time the reel 6 is stopped. In this way, it is possible to improve security against fraudulent behavior by determining in advance whether or not there is a possibility of winning a prize every time the reel 6 stops.

  In addition, when the winning impossible information, the winning decision information, or the winning decision information is transmitted before all the reels 6 are stopped, it is not necessary to include the preliminary determination information in the reel stop command transmitted at the final stop. Further, similarly to FIG. 22, the control at the time of stopping the irregularity may be performed. In addition, the pre-determination information is information indicating the internal winning of the small role and the possibility of establishment of the small role, but the consecutive target role to which the AT right is granted by successive winnings (herein, replay winning) And the winning of a bell) and information indicating the possibility of establishment of the consecutive target combination.

  In addition to the reel stop command including the above-described advance determination information, the game control device 50 determines whether or not a winning has been established in a winning determination process (FIG. 24) that is performed after all the reels 6 are stopped, and the result is obtained. The game result command is transmitted to the effect control device 70. That is, the game control device 50 determines whether or not there is a possibility that a winning combination will be established before all the reels 6 are stopped, and transmits a pre-determination command (reel stop command including pre-determination information). And a post-determination means capable of transmitting a post-determination command (game result command) by determining whether or not a winning combination has been established after all reels 6 are stopped. Eggplant.

  From the above, the pre-determining means (game control device 50) determines whether or not there is a possibility that a winning combination won by the internal lottery will be established every time the reel 6 is stopped by the stop operation of the player. It will be like that. Therefore, security against fraud is increased.

[Continuous winning stock processing]
In the present embodiment, the continuous winning stock process (step S487) is not performed in the stock acquisition determination process shown in FIG. 47, and the continuous winning stock process shown in FIG. 127 is performed in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In this continuous winning stock process, it is first determined whether there is a command abnormality flag (step S951). If there is no command abnormality flag (step S951; N), it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S952). If this reel stop command has not been received (step S952; N), it is determined whether a game result command transmitted at the end of the game has been received (step S957). If a reel stop command has been received (step S952; Y), it is determined whether the pre-determination information includes information that is impossible to win (step S953).

  If there is no information indicating that no winning is possible (step S954; N), it is determined whether a game result command has been received (step S957). If there is information that cannot be won (step S954; Y), all the continuous counters are reset (step S955), the midway reset information is stored (step S956), and it is determined whether a game result command has been received. (Step S957).

  In the continuous counter, there is a counter that counts the number of consecutive establishments corresponding to each of the small roles to which the AT right is granted by continuous establishment. There is one that counts the number of consecutive establishments. If no winning information is received, none of the small prize winnings are established, so all the continuous counters are reset.

  If no game result command has been received (step S957; N), the continuous winning stock process is terminated. If a game result command has been received (step S957; Y), it is determined whether a winning combination (here, replay winning and bell winning) has been established (step S958).

  When the winning of the consecutive target combination is not established (step S958; N), all the continuous counters are reset (step S966), the display of the history window is updated based on the game result (step S972), and the continuous The winning stock process ends. If the winning of the consecutive target combination is established (step S958; Y), it is determined whether there is halfway reset information (step S959).

  If there is halfway reset information (step S959; Y), execution of winning abnormality notification is set (step S960). Halfway reset information is information that is set when non-winning information indicating that a winning is not established is received in the middle of the game. It is when some abnormality has occurred. For this reason, processing corresponding to the occurrence of abnormality is performed. That is, the abnormality determination that enables the effect control device 70 to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred between the prior determination command (reel stop command including the prior determination information) and the subsequent determination command (game result command). Make a means.

  Next, it is determined whether it is in a penalty state in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed (step S961). If not in the penalty state (step S961; N), the penalty state is set (step S962), the number of penalty games at the time of abnormality is set (step S963), and the display content of the history window is reset (step S963). S964). If it is already in the penalty state (step S961), the display content of the history window is reset (step S964). Thereafter, the cause of the abnormality (reset) is displayed in the vicinity of the history window (step S965), and the continuous winning stock process is terminated.

  By the process of resetting the display contents of the history window (step S964), it is possible to clearly notify that the display contents of the history window 250 are erased and the continuous count number has been reset. The cause can be notified by the process (step S965) of displaying the cause of the abnormality (reset) in the vicinity of the history window, the player can be warned and the cause can be clearly notified to the store clerk of the game store.

If the winning of the consecutive target combination is established (step S958; Y), but there is reset information on the way (step S959; Y), the penalty in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed as a penalty Although the state is set, in this case, even if the winning of the consecutive target combination is actually established, since the process of updating the continuous counter by 1 is not performed, this is also a penalty for the player. It has become. As described above, since a penalty is given when there is an illegal act that falsifies the game result, the illegal act can be efficiently suppressed. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as a penalty granting unit that can give a penalty disadvantageous to the player based on the fact that the abnormality determination unit determines that an abnormality has occurred.

  However, game value payout based on winning is controlled by the game control device 50 (see, for example, FIG. 24). That is, the game control device 50 constitutes a game value giving means that can give a game value to the player based on the winning of the winning combination in the internal lottery as a result of the game. Therefore, even if the production control device 70 imposes a penalty on the player, when the winning is established, the corresponding game value is paid out, and the player is extremely disadvantageous. It is made so that it will not become.

  On the other hand, when there is no midway reset information (step S959; N), the continuation counter corresponding to the continuation target combination for which winning is established is updated by +1 (step S967), and the other continuation counters are reset (step S968). That is, when a winning combination of one target combination is established, the continuous establishment of the other does not continue, so the continuous counter corresponding to the other target combination is reset.

  Next, it is checked whether or not the updated continuous counter value is equal to or greater than the corresponding continuous determination value (step S969). If it is not equal to or greater than the continuous determination value (step S970; N), the history window display is updated based on the game result (step S972), and the continuous winning stock process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the continuous determination value (step S970; Y), the AT right stock information is updated by +1, the history window display is updated (step S972), and the continuous winning stock process is terminated. Thereby, the AT right is granted as a grant of a privilege related to the progress of the game when the target combination is established a predetermined number of times, and the AT right is granted every time it is subsequently established.

  In the process of updating the display of the history window based on the game result (step S972), for example, the process of adding and displaying the current game result to the history window 250, or expanding the history window 250 when the AT right is acquired. Process to display. In the effect control device 70, an effect setting for notifying the acquisition of the AT right is also set, whereby an effect image is displayed on the image display device 3.

  That is, the production control device 70 can update the continuous count number indicating that a predetermined winning combination (continuous target combination) is continuously established based on the post-determination command (game result command). Provides continuous counting means. Further, the effect control device 70 serves as a specific game occurrence determination unit capable of determining whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the continuous count number updated by the continuous count unit.

  On the other hand, if there is a command abnormality flag (step S951; Y), all the continuous counters are reset (step S973), execution of command abnormality notification is set (step S974, AT right acquisition lottery is not performed) It is determined whether a penalty state is in effect (step S975).

  If it is not in the penalty state (step S975; N), the penalty state is set (step S976), the number of penalty games at the time of abnormality is set (step S977), and the display contents of the history window are reset (step S977). S978). If it is already in the penalty state (step S975), the display content of the history window is reset (step S978). By the process of resetting the display contents of the history window (step S978), the display contents of the history window 250 are erased, and it can be clearly notified that the continuous count number has been reset.

  Thereafter, the cause of the abnormality (reset) is displayed in the vicinity of the history window (step S979), and the continuous winning stock process is terminated. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as an abnormality notification executing means capable of executing an abnormality notification based on the command abnormality determining means determining that a command abnormality has occurred. In this way, by resetting the continuous count due to a command abnormality, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts that increase the continuous count by operating the game result recognized by the effect control device 70. It becomes. The command abnormality flag is reset after the processing of steps S951 to S979 is performed, but the command abnormality flag may be maintained for a predetermined game.

If there is a command abnormality flag (step S951; Y), a penalty state in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed is set as a penalty. Even if the winning of is established, since the process of updating the continuous counter by +1 is not performed, this is also a penalty for the player. In this way, a penalty that the continuous count is not updated in a game in which an abnormality has occurred is given, so that it is possible to reduce the willingness to commit fraud. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as a penalty granting unit that can give a penalty disadvantageous to the player based on the fact that the command abnormality determination unit determines that an abnormality has occurred.

  However, game value payout based on winning is controlled by the game control device 50 (see, for example, FIG. 24). That is, the game control device 50 constitutes a game value giving means that can give a game value to the player based on the winning of the winning combination in the internal lottery as a result of the game. Therefore, even if the production control device 70 imposes a penalty on the player, when the winning is established, the corresponding game value is paid out, and the player is extremely disadvantageous. It is made so that it will not become.

  Here, the abnormality is detected by both the detection of the abnormality of the command by the command identifier and the detection of the abnormality of the winning based on the prior determination information, but the abnormality may be detected by only one of them. . In addition, even if the game is a game in which the continuous counter is reset halfway based on the information indicating that no winnings can be made, if the penalty is not in progress, it will not be judged as abnormal and the consecutive counter will be updated by +1. May be. Further, even if a small combination other than the consecutive target combination is used, if the game result is different from the preliminary determination information, a prize abnormality notification may be performed.

  In addition, when the continuation target combination is different or the continuation condition is different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, the continuation counter is used properly or the continuation determination value is changed according to the gaming state. In addition, when the number of consecutive winnings of consecutive consecutive winning combinations is equal to or greater than the continuous determination value, AT right stock (number of sets) is added, but if it is in a specific gaming state, it can be executed in ART state You may make it add the number of various games. In this case, after reaching the continuous determination value, the number of games is increased more than when the continuous determination value is reached, or the number of games to be added is increased every time a winning is established. You may do it.

  In addition, the penalty imposed on the player based on the command abnormality or the winning abnormality may be disadvantageous to the player, and the specific game state such as not updating the continuous count over the predetermined number of games as described above. It is not limited to a penalty for preventing the acquisition of the right to shift to a state of notifying the penalty information for the occurrence of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player and the assist information relating to the stop operation over a predetermined number of games. Further, when an irregular stop operation is performed, the continuous count number may be reset regardless of whether or not there is a possibility that a winning will be established at that time.

  From the above, an internal lottery that determines whether or not a winning combination is determined based on a start operation by the player, a game with a variable display of the plurality of reels 6 is executed, and a plurality of reels are performed based on a stop operation by the player When the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery is derived as a result of stopping the variable display of 6, the game progress is controlled in the slot machine where the winning combination of the winning combination is established, First control means (game control device 50) capable of transmitting a command corresponding to the progress state each time it progresses, and a process corresponding to the received command received from the first control means A second control means (production control device 70) capable of performing the game, is the first control means likely to win a winning combination before all the reels 6 are stopped? A pre-determination means (game control device 50) capable of determining whether or not a winning combination has been established after all reels 6 are stopped, and a post-determination command. And a post-determination means (game control device 50) capable of transmitting the information, and the second control means, based on the post-determination command, continuously winning a predetermined specific combination (continuous target combination) is established Based on the continuous count means (production control device 70) capable of updating the continuous count number indicating that the game has been performed and the continuous count number updated by the continuous count means, whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player Specific game occurrence determination means (effect control device 70) that can determine whether or not, the continuous counting means is denied the possibility of winning a winning combination by a prior determination command Based on bets, and to have so as to reset the number of continuous counting. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud that increases the continuous count by operating the game result recognized by the second control means (production control device).

  Here, the possibility of winning a winning combination is a state in which a symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning combination can be formed on an effective line for determining winning. In addition, for example, in the case where a combination that is established only with a symbol derived from a specific reel among a plurality of reels 6 is won, such as a combination that is established only by the cherry being derived from the left reel 6a, This includes a state in which a winning combination has already been confirmed before all reels 6 are stopped. The first control means and the second control means may be configured by a single control device (control board) or may be configured by a plurality of control devices (control boards).

  Also, effect image display means (effect control device 70) capable of displaying effect images according to the progress of the game on the display device (image display device 3), and results for each game during the effect image display period A history window display means (production control device 70) capable of displaying on the display device a history window 250 that makes it possible to grasp the history window, and the history window display means receives at least a specific combination (continuous target combination) winning a prize. When established continuously, the history window 250 is enlarged and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the establishment of a consecutive winning combination of a specific combination, and it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for occurrence of a specific gaming state.

  Further, the history window display means (the effect control device 70) returns the history window 250 enlarged and displayed based on the start of the game to the original size. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the visual recognition of the effect image from being inhibited by the history window.

  Further, the second control means (production control device 70) is capable of determining whether or not an abnormality in which the prior determination command and the subsequent determination command contradict each other has occurred, Based on the fact that the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred, it is provided with penalty providing means (production control device 70) capable of giving a penalty unfavorable to the player. Therefore, since a penalty is given when there is an illegal act that falsifies the game result, the illegal act can be efficiently suppressed.

  In addition, the penalty granting means (production control device 70) prevents the continuous count from being updated even if a winning combination of a specific combination (continuous target combination) is established in a game in which an abnormality has occurred as a penalty. . Therefore, since the continuous count is not updated in a game in which an abnormality has occurred, the willingness to commit fraud can be reduced.

  In addition, the game can be executed after the player has bet the game value by the player, and the game value can be given to the player based on the winning of the winning combination in the internal lottery as a result of the game. The game value granting means includes a granting means (game control device 50), and the game value granting means is awarded when the winning combination is won in the internal lottery even if the penalty is given by the penalty granting means (production control device 70). Will give game value. Therefore, even if a penalty is given, the game value is given, so that the player is not extremely disadvantaged.

  In addition, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on a start operation by the player, and a game with a change display of the plurality of reels 6 is executed. As a result of stopping the display, when a symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery is derived, in the slot machine where the winning combination of the winning combination is established, the progress of the game is controlled and each time the game progresses A first control unit (game control device 50) capable of transmitting a command according to the progress state, and receiving a command transmitted from the first control unit and performing a process corresponding to the received command Second control means (production control device 70) capable of setting an identifier setting means (play game) capable of setting a different identifier for each game execution. Control device 50) and command transmission means (game control device 50) capable of transmitting a command including the identifier set by the identifier setting means. The command transmission means transmits during one game. Whether the command to be transmitted includes the same identifier and the second control means receives a command including a different identifier during one game recognized by the second control means. Command abnormality determination means (production control device 70) capable of determining whether or not, and abnormality notification execution capable of executing abnormality notification based on the command abnormality determination means determining that a command abnormality has occurred Means (production control device 70). Therefore, by determining the command abnormality, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of illegal acts such as operating the game result recognized by the second control means (production control device).

  Here, including an identifier includes not only simply adding an identifier but also performing an operation using the identifier, so that any game command can be identified. May be in any form. In addition, the one game recognized by the second control means includes a case where it is different from the one game executed by the first control means. The first control means and the second control means may be configured by a single control device (control board) or may be configured by a plurality of control devices (control boards).

  Further, the second control means (production control device 70) continuously indicates that a predetermined combination (continuous target combination) winning is continuously established based on the game result command received based on the end of the variable display. Continuous counting means (effect control device 70) capable of updating the number of counts and specific game occurrence determination means (effect control device) capable of determining whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player 70), and the specific game occurrence determination means can determine whether or not to generate a specific game state based on the continuous count number updated by the continuous count means. Based on the fact that the abnormality determination means (the effect control device 70) determines that the command abnormality has occurred, the continuous count number is reset. Accordingly, by resetting the continuous count due to a command abnormality, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts that increase the continuous count by operating the game result recognized by the second control means. .

  Further, the second control means (effect control device 70) can display a history window 250 that enables the display device (image display device 3) to display a history window 250 that can grasp the result of each game. 70), and the history window display means deletes the contents of the history window 250 based on the fact that the continuous count number is reset by the continuous count means (effect control device 70). Therefore, the reset of the continuous count number can be clearly notified.

  Further, the second control means (production control device 70) can give a penalty disadvantageous to the player based on the fact that the command abnormality determination means (production control device 70) determines that an abnormality has occurred. Penalty grant means (production control device 70) is provided, and the penalty grant means does not update the continuous count number even if a winning combination of a specific combination (continuous target combination) is established in a game in which an abnormality has occurred as a penalty. Will be. Therefore, a penalty that the continuous count is not updated in a game in which an abnormality has occurred is given, and the willingness to commit fraud can be reduced.

  FIG. 128 shows an example of command reception in the effect control device 70. FIG. 128 (a) shows a normal flow of command reception. Here, an example is shown in which a winning is won in the first game from the RAM clear (setting change).

  When the player operates the start lever 21 to start the game, an internal lottery is performed, and a lottery result command (C1) including information that the lottery result is “out” is transmitted to the effect control device 70. Here, since it is the first game from the RAM clear (setting change), “00001” is added as a command identifier.

  Next, when the stop operation becomes valid, a stop valid command (C2) is transmitted to the effect control device 70. “00001” is also added as a command identifier to this command, and the effect control device 70 determines that it is a normal command because it has the same command identifier as the lottery result command (C1).

  Thereafter, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed, a reel stop command 1 (C3) and a reel stop command 2 (C4) are transmitted to the effect control device 70, respectively. “00001” is also added as a command identifier to these commands, and the effect control device 70 determines that the command is normal because it has the same command identifier as the lottery result command C1. Further, since the result of the internal lottery is out of place, the reel stop command 1 (C3) and the reel stop command 2 (C4) include information indicating that no winning can be achieved.

  When the third stop operation is performed, a reel stop command 3 (C5) is transmitted to the effect control device 70. “00001” is also added as a command identifier to this command, and the production control device 70 determines that the command is normal because it has the same command identifier as the lottery result command C1. Further, since the reel stop mode is a stop mode, the reel stop command 3 (C5) includes the release confirmation information.

  Thereafter, a game result command (C6) is transmitted to the effect control device 70. “00001” is also added as a command identifier to this command, and the effect control device 70 determines that it is a normal command because it has the same command identifier as the lottery result command (C1). Since neither the end of the special game state nor the end of the specific game state here, “00002” is added as a command identifier in the next game.

  FIG. 128 (b) shows an example of an abnormal command flow. Here, the Bell winning is established continuously for two games, and the replay winning is won in the next game. Then, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the establishment of the replay prize, the player turns off the power of the effect control apparatus 70 before the replay prize is established. After that, turn on the power of the production control device 70 before the next prize is won in the next game, and let the production control device 70 recognize as if the prize has been made continuously, and acquire the AT right illegally. It shows an example in which cheating is done.

  When the player operates the start lever 21 to start the game, an internal lottery is performed, and a lottery result command (C11) including information that the lottery result is “replay winning” is transmitted to the effect control device 70. Here, “00005” is added as a command identifier.

  Next, the stop operation becomes valid, and a stop valid command (C12) with “00005” added as a command identifier is transmitted to the effect control device 70. Thereafter, when the first and second stop operations are performed, the reel stop command 1 (C13) and the reel stop command 2 (C14) to which “00005” is added as a command identifier are transmitted to the effect control device 70. Here, the reel 6 is stopped in a stop mode in which a replay winning can be established, and the reel stop command includes winning information. Up to this point, each command has the same command identifier as the lottery result command (C11), so it is determined as a normal command.

  Here, it is recognized from the stop mode of the reel 6 that the player has won a replay, the power of the effect control device 70 is intentionally shut off, and a third stop operation is performed to end the game. Furthermore, when the next game is started and the second stop operation is performed, it is recognized from the stop state of the reel 6 that the player has won a bell, and the power of the effect control device 70 is restored. In the period of this power failure, the production control device 70 cannot receive a command from the game control device 50 and is not aware of the establishment of the replay winning.

  When the third stop operation is performed, a reel stop command 3 (C15) is transmitted from the game control device 50. The game control device 50 updates the identifier with the end of the previous game, and “00006” is added as the command identifier of this reel stop command. Since this identifier is different from “00005” which is the command identifier of the lottery result command (C11) known by the production control device 70, the production control device 70 determines that a command abnormality has occurred and Process. Thereafter, a game result command (C16) including information on the establishment of the bell winning is transmitted.

  In addition, if information on a winning combination or a winning combination is included in the pre-determination information, information on the winning combination included in the winning confirmation information in the reel stop command 3 (C15) and the reel stop command It is also possible to detect an abnormality based on the fact that the combination information included in the winning information in 1 (C13) and the reel stop command 2 (C14) is different.

  FIG. 128 (c) also shows an example of an abnormal command flow. Here, two consecutive wins for the Bell are established, and the next game is won in the push order Bell. An example is shown in which an improper act was performed in which the winning order was not established because the push order could not be correctly answered, but a command transmitted to the effect control device 70 was operated to recognize as if the winning was achieved. ing. Here, it is assumed that there is no penalty based on the irregular stop operation even in the normal gaming state, and the player can aim at the push order bell.

  When the player operates the start lever 21 to start the game, an internal lottery is performed, and a lottery result command (C21) including information that the lottery result is “push order bell prize” is transmitted to the effect control device 70. Here, “00005” is added as a command identifier.

  Next, the stop operation becomes valid, and a stop valid command (C22) with “00005” added as a command identifier is transmitted to the effect control device 70. Thereafter, when the first stop operation is performed, a reel stop command 1 (C23) to which “00005” is added as a command identifier is transmitted to the effect control device 70. At this stage, the reels 6 are stopped in a stop mode in which a bell winning can be achieved in accordance with the pressing order of the internal lottery results, and the reel stop command 1 (C23) includes winning information.

  When the second stop operation is performed, a reel stop command 2 (C24) to which “00005” is added as a command identifier is transmitted to the effect control device 70. At this stage, it does not match the pushing order of the internal lottery result, the reel 6 is stopped in a stop mode in which a bell winning cannot be achieved, and the reel stop command 2 (C24) includes information indicating that no winning is possible. .

  Here, an illegal act is performed in which the player operates a command transmitted to the effect control device 70 to recognize as if a winning has been established. In the reel stop command 3 (C25) based on the third stop operation, Even though the reel 6 is in the stop mode in which the bell winning is not established, the winning confirmation information is included, and the game result command (C26) including the information on the establishment of the push order bell winning is transmitted.

  The production control device 70 resets the continuous counter at the time when the reel stop command 2 (C24) including the information indicating that the winning is impossible is received, and stores the reset information in the middle, and thereafter, information on the establishment of the push order bell winning is obtained. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred by receiving the included game result command (C26), and processing when the abnormality has occurred is performed.

  129 and 130 show display examples when the command abnormality shown in FIG. 128 (b) occurs. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), here, two consecutive wins are made, and in the history window 250 of the image display device 3, the background of the icon indicating the bell win is changed, and “Leach! "Is displayed. Then, when the player operates the start lever 21 to start the game, the winning announcement effect 1 is displayed, which suggests that there is a possibility that a bell winning will be established.

  The result of the internal lottery is a win for replay winning, and “00005” is added as a command identifier to the effect control device 70 and a lottery result command (C11) including information that the lottery result is “replay winning” is transmitted. The In the figure, the display of “◯” shown on the right side of the command indicates that the effect control device 70 has received the command normally.

  When the player performs the first stop operation as shown in FIG. 129 (b), a reel stop command 1 (C12) to which “00005” is added as a command identifier is transmitted. The stop mode of the reel 6 here is a stop mode in which a replay winning can be established, and the reel stop command 1 (C12) includes winning possible information. Further, in the image display device 3, the stage of the winning announcement effect proceeds and becomes the winning announcement effect 1-1.

  When the player performs the second stop operation as shown in FIG. 129 (c), a reel stop command 2 (C14) to which “00005” is added as a command identifier is transmitted. The stop mode of the reel 6 here is a stop mode in which a replay winning can be established, and the reel stop command 2 (C14) includes winning information. Further, in the image display device 3, the stage of the winning announcement effect proceeds and becomes the winning announcement effect 1-2.

  Here, the player recognizes that the player is going to win a replay from the stop mode of the reel 6 and intentionally shuts off the power of the effect control device 70. As shown in FIG. 129 (d), even if the third stop operation is performed in this state, the game control device 50 controls the game such as the operation of the reel 6, so that the replay winning is established. However, since the production control device 70 cannot receive the reel stop command 3 (C10a) or the game result command (C10b), it cannot recognize the establishment of the replay winning. In addition, since the effect control device 70 controls the image display device 3, the display on the image display device 3 is turned off. It should be noted that the display of “x” shown on the right side of the command in the drawing indicates that the effect control device 70 has not received the command normally.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the player starts the next game in a state where the power of the effect control device 70 is shut off. At this time, the game control device 50 updates the command identifier to “00006”, and this command identifier is added to the lottery result command (C10c). Since the effect control device 70 cannot receive this command, it cannot recognize that the next game has started.

  When the first and second stop operations are performed and the reel 6 is stopped as shown in FIGS. 130B and 130C, the reel stop command 1 (C10d) and the reel stop command (C10e) are transmitted. This command cannot be received by the effect control device 70. At this stage, the player recognizes that the player has won a bell from the stop mode of the reel 6, and the power of the effect control device 70 is restored.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (d), a third stop operation is performed to establish a bell winning. At this time, a reel stop command 3 (C15) or a game result command (C16) transmitted to the effect control device 70. Is received by the production control device 70. However, the command identifiers of these commands are different from “00005”, which is a command identifier that the presentation control device 70 grasps.

  Therefore, the effect control device 70 determines that a command abnormality has occurred, and resets the continuous counter and sets a penalty state as processing when the abnormality occurs. Further, the fact that a command abnormality has occurred is displayed on the image display device 3 as a notification of the cause of the abnormality determination, and the information in the history window 250 is deleted to indicate that the continuous counter has been reset. Also, a voice message “Command is abnormal” is output to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, since medals are consumed for the execution of the game, the game value (medals) relating to the establishment of the bell winning is paid out (given). Moreover, you may make it alert | report that payout is performed.

  FIG. 131 shows a display example when the winning abnormality shown in FIG. 128 (c) occurs. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), here, two consecutive wins are made for the bell, and in the history window 250 of the image display device 3, the background of the icon indicating the bell win is changed and “reach! "Is displayed. Then, when the player operates the start lever 21 to start the game, the winning announcement effect 1 is displayed, which suggests that there is a possibility that a bell winning will be established.

  The result of the internal lottery is the winning of the push order bell prize, and “00005” is added as a command identifier to the effect control device 70, and the lottery result command (C21 including information that the lottery result is “push order bell prize”). ) Is sent.

  When the player performs the first stop operation as shown in FIG. 131 (b), a reel stop command 1 (C23) to which “00005” is added as a command identifier is transmitted. At this stage, the reels 6 are stopped in a stop mode in which a bell winning can be established in accordance with the pressing order of the internal lottery results, and the reel stop command 1 (C23) includes winning information. Further, in the image display device 3, the stage of the winning announcement effect proceeds and becomes the winning announcement effect 1-1.

  When the player performs the second stop operation as shown in FIG. 131 (c), a reel stop command 2 (C24) to which “00005” is added as a command identifier is transmitted. At this stage, it does not match the pushing order of the internal lottery result, the reel 6 is stopped in a stop mode in which a bell winning cannot be achieved, and the reel stop command 2 (C24) includes information indicating that no winning is possible. . Further, in the image display device 3, the stage of the winning announcement effect proceeds and becomes the winning announcement effect 1-2.

  Here, an illegal act is performed in which the player operates a command transmitted to the effect control device 70 to recognize as if a winning has been established, and based on the third stop operation as shown in FIG. 130 (d). In the reel stop command 3 (C25), winning confirmation information is included even though the reel 6 is in a stop mode in which no bell winning is established. Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (e), a game result command (C25) including information on the establishment of the push order bell prize is transmitted even though the push order prize winning is not established.

  The production control device 70 resets the continuous counter at the time when the reel stop command 2 (C24) including the information indicating that the winning is impossible is received, and stores the reset information in the middle, and thereafter, information on the establishment of the push order bell winning is obtained. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred by receiving the included game result command (C26), and processing when the abnormality has occurred is performed.

  As a process at the time of occurrence of an abnormality, a penalty state is set, and a notice that a prize abnormality has occurred is displayed on the image display device 3 as a notification of the cause of the abnormality determination, and the continuous counter is reset. Therefore, the information in the history window 250 is deleted. Also, a voice “abnormal winning” is output to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

  Even if a command including information on the establishment of the bell winning is transmitted to the effect control device 70, the bell winning is not actually established in the game result grasped by the game control device 50. Will not be paid out.

  Note that the first control means is game controlled with respect to the command abnormality determination means capable of determining whether or not a command abnormality for receiving a command including a different identifier occurs in one game recognized by the second control means. Although the device 50 and the second control means are described as the production control device 70, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the relationship between the first control means for transmitting a command and the second control means capable of performing processing corresponding to the command transmitted from the first control means, the first control means adds an identifier to the command. Any control device can be applied as long as it is a control device that transmits and receives commands. Further, the present invention is not limited to slot machines and can be applied to pachinko gaming machines.

  That is, a first control unit capable of transmitting a command, and a second control unit capable of receiving a command transmitted from the first control unit and performing processing corresponding to the received command, The first control means includes an identifier setting means capable of setting a different identifier for each execution of the game, and a command transmission means capable of transmitting the command including the identifier set by the identifier setting means. And the second control means can determine whether or not a command abnormality for receiving a command including a different identifier has occurred in one game recognized by the second control means. What is necessary is just to have a means.

  Also, any format may be used as long as it includes an identifier in the command so that it can be recognized which command of the game. In addition to simply adding the identifier, the calculation is performed using the identifier. It is also included.

  The gaming machine as described above is a gaming machine that includes a plurality of reels 6 capable of executing a game for variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and in which the plurality of reels 6 are arranged in parallel so that their rotation axes are located on the same line. The effect space 170 provided between the inside of the reel 6 and the reel 6 adjacent to the reel 6, and the light emission effect device (the first light emission effect device provided in the effect space 170 and capable of performing a predetermined light emission effect) 2 hiding effect device 162). Therefore, it is possible to produce a game-related effect around the reel 6 that is most watched by the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Here, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine, an arrangement ball gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like.

  In addition, reel moving means (reel moving mechanism unit 150, effect control device 70) capable of widening the interval between the adjacent reels 6 by moving at least one of the adjacent reels 6 in the rotation axis direction is provided. . Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the light emitting effect device that performs the light emitting effect in the effect space 170.

  In addition, an effect control means (effect control apparatus 70) capable of controlling the light emission effect device (second hidden effect device 162) is provided, and the effect control means is a reel moving means (reel moving mechanism 150, effect control device). 70), when the reel 6 does not move, the light emitting effect is not performed or the light emitting effect is performed at a luminance lower than the normal luminance. On the other hand, when the reel 6 is moved by the reel moving means, the normal luminance is applied. A light emission effect is performed. Therefore, the light emission effect when the reel 6 moves is conspicuous and the effect is improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine performs an internal lottery to determine whether or not to win a prize based on a start operation by the player, executes a game with a variable display of the plurality of reels 6, and performs a plurality of stop operations by the player. A slot machine 1 for stopping the variable display of the reel 6, and a freeze state generating means (game control device) capable of generating a freeze state for rendering that makes the stop operation invalid for a predetermined period during the execution of the game 50), and the reel moving means (the reel moving mechanism unit 150 and the effect control device 70) moves the reel 6 during the occurrence of the freeze state, and moves the reel 6 moved by the end of the freeze state to the original state. It is made to return to the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the reel 6 from hindering the pressing (stopping operation) of the reel 6.

  In addition, special effect execution means (game control device 50) capable of performing a special effect by variably displaying the reel 6 in a predetermined variable display mode during the occurrence of the freeze state is provided, and a light emission effect device (second hidden effect) is provided. In the device 162), a plurality of light emitting units (LEDs 166) are provided along the variable display direction of the reel 6, and the effect control means (effect control device 70) is synchronized with the variable display of the reel 6 during the special effect. A light emission effect that changes the light emission mode is performed. Therefore, since the light emission mode changes so as to synchronize with the special production by the reel 6, the production effect during the freeze state is enhanced.

  Here, changing the light emission mode so as to synchronize means changing the number of light emitting units that emit light by sequentially turning on or off the light emitting units in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel 6, for example.

  The front panel 9 is provided with a symbol display window 5 that is disposed in front of the plurality of reels 6 and allows the plurality of reels 6 to be seen through. The symbol display window 5 includes reel moving means (reel moving mechanism unit). 150, the effect control device 70) is set to such a size that the symbol of the reel 6 can be visually recognized even if the reel 6 is moved. Therefore, even if the reel 6 moves, visual recognition of the symbol is not hindered.

  The slot machine of the present invention is not limited to the slot machine that uses medals as shown in the above-mentioned embodiment as the slot machine. For example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls It is applicable to. In addition, the configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine. Applicable. The configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 slot machine (game machine)
5 Symbol display window 6 Reel 9 Front panel 50 Game control device (freeze state generating means, special effect executing means)
70 Production control device (reel moving means, production control means)
150 Reel moving mechanism (reel moving means)
162 Second hidden effect device (light emission effect device)
166 LED (light emitting part)
170 Production space

Claims (2)

A first display means for performing an effect according to the game, performing an internal lottery to determine whether or not to win a role in response to the establishment of a starting condition, and executing a game with variable display of a plurality of reels; In a slot machine in which a winning combination of the combination is established when a symbol combination mode corresponding to the combination determined by the internal lottery is derived,
Second display means different from the first display means,
The combination includes a special combination that is capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player because the symbol combination mode is a special mode, and the special combination can be elected redundantly and has a high degree of expectation. And a second role that can be elected in duplicate with the special role and has a different expectation from the first role,
The second display means includes
A first display mode corresponding to the case where the combination determined by the internal lottery is the first combination;
A second display mode corresponding to the case where the combination determined by the internal lottery is the second combination, can be displayed;
The first display mode and the second display mode are:
Consists of a common display portion common to each display mode and a non-common display portion that is different in each display mode,
A slot machine characterized in that the degree of expectation can be identified by the difference between the non-common display portions. For the special role,
A first special combination that can be won in duplicate with the first role and cannot be won in duplicate with the second role;
A second special combination that is incapable of double winning with the first role and that can be double-winned with the second role,
The first display mode and the second display mode can identify which of the first special combination and the second special combination is won by the difference between the non-common display portions. The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein:

Images